UNITED STATES SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
Washington, D.C.  20549
_________________

Form 10-Q
(Mark One)
 
þ           QUARTERLY REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d)
OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the quarterly period ended March 31, 2011

                                                                                                 or

 
¨   TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15 (d)
 
              OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

Commission file number:  001-34814
_________________

Capitol Federal Financial, Inc.
( Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)

                                                                                                                        Maryland                                                                            27-2631712
                                                                                                                    (State or other jurisdiction of incorporation                                            (I.R.S. Employer
                                                                                                                                  or organization)                                                              Identification No.)

                                                                                                                                   700 Kansas Avenue, Topeka, Kansas                                                     66603
                                                                                                                                  (Address of principal executive offices)                                               (Zip Code)

Registrant’s telephone number, including area code:
(785) 235-1341


Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports) and (2) has been subject to such requirements for the past 90 days.   Yes þ     No ¨
 
 
Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically and posted on its corporate Web site, if any, every Interactive Data File required to be submitted and posted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T (§232.405 of this chapter) during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit and post such files.) Yes ¨   No ¨

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, or a smaller reporting company. See definition of “accelerated filer, large accelerated filer, and smaller reporting company” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act. (Check one):

Large accelerated filer        ¨       Accelerated filer     ¨         Non-accelerated filer     þ      Smaller Reporting Company    ¨
                                                                                              (do not check if a smaller
                                                                                                   reporting company)
 
 
Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act).   Yes   ¨   No   þ
 
 
As of May 6, 2011, there were 167,493,608 shares of Capitol Federal Financial, Inc. Common Stock outstanding.



 
1

 



 
PART I -- FINANCIAL INFORMATION
Page
Number
 
Item 1.  Financial Statements (Unaudited):
 
              Consolidated Balance Sheets at March 31, 2011 and September 30, 2010
3
              Consolidated Statements of Operations for the three and six months ended
 
                  March 31, 2011 and March 31, 2010
4
              Consolidated Statement of Stockholders’ Equity for the six months ended
 
                  March 31, 2011
6
              Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows for the six months ended
 
                  March 31, 2011 and March 31, 2010
7
9
Item 2.   Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and
 
                  Results of Operations
33
80
85
   
PART II -- OTHER INFORMATION
 
Item 1.     Legal Proceedings
85
86
Item 2.     Unregistered Sales of Equity Securities and Use of Proceeds
86
86
Item 4.    (Removed and Reserved)
86
Item 5.     Other Information
86
Item 6.     Exhibits
86
   
87
   
INDEX TO EXHIBITS
88
   


 
2

 

PART I -- FINANCIAL INFORMATION
Item 1. Financial Statements
CAPITOL FEDERAL FINANCIAL, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS (Unaudited)
(Dollars in thousands)
   
March 31,
   
September 30,
 
   
2011
   
2010
 
ASSETS:
           
Cash and cash equivalents (includes interest-earning deposits of $104,883 and $50,771)
  $ 122,002     $ 65,217  
Securities:
               
  Available-for-sale (“AFS”) at estimated fair value (amortized cost of $1,207,245 and $1,009,142)
    1,250,153       1,060,366  
  Held-to-maturity (“HTM”) at amortized cost (estimated fair value of $2,966,745 and $1,913,454)
    2,953,661       1,880,154  
Loans receivable, net of allowance for credit losses (“ACL”) of $13,814 and $14,892
    5,096,615       5,168,202  
Bank-owned life insurance (“BOLI”)
    55,546       54,710  
Capital stock of Federal Home Loan Bank (“FHLB”), at cost
    122,651       120,866  
Accrued interest receivable
    30,778       30,220  
Premises and equipment, net
    43,211       41,260  
Real estate owned (“REO”), net
    11,337       9,920  
Income taxes receivable
    --       716  
Other assets
    47,157       55,499  
TOTAL ASSETS
  $ 9,733,111     $ 8,487,130  
                 
LIABILITIES:
               
Deposits
  $ 4,711,189     $ 4,386,310  
Advances from FHLB
    2,351,863       2,348,371  
Other borrowings, net
    643,609       668,609  
Advance payments by borrowers for taxes and insurance
    48,095       55,036  
Income taxes payable
    2,411       --  
Deferred income tax liabilities, net
    19,520       33,244  
Accounts payable and accrued expenses
    30,015       33,610  
    Total liabilities
    7,806,702       7,525,180  
                 
STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY:
               
Preferred stock ($0.01 par value) 100,000,000 shares authorized; none issued
    --       --  
Common stock ($0.01 par value) 1,400,000,000 shares authorized, 167,493,608
               
    shares issued;  167,493,608 and 73,992,678 shares outstanding
               
    as of March 31, 2011 and September 30, 2010, respectively
    1,675       915  
Additional paid-in capital
    1,390,949       457,795  
Unearned compensation, Employee Stock Ownership Plan (“ESOP”)
    (52,033 )     (6,050 )
Unearned compensation, Recognition and Retention Plan (“RRP”)
    (184 )     (255 )
Retained earnings
    559,313       801,044  
Accumulated other comprehensive income (“AOCI”), net of tax
    26,689       31,862  
Less shares held in treasury (0 and 17,519,609 shares as of March 31, 2011
               
    and September 30, 2010, respectively, at cost)
    --       (323,361 )
  Total stockholders' equity
    1,926,409       961,950  
TOTAL LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY
  $ 9,733,111     $ 8,487,130  


See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.
<Index>

 
3

 

CAPITOL FEDERAL FINANCIAL, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY
 
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS (Unaudited)
 
(Dollars in thousands, except share and per share data)
 
   
For the Three Months Ended
   
For the Six Months Ended
 
   
March 31,
   
March 31,
 
   
2011
   
2010
   
2011
   
2010
 
INTEREST AND DIVIDEND INCOME:
                       
Loans receivable
  $ 61,554     $ 70,315     $ 127,497     $ 144,841  
Mortgage-backed securities ("MBS")
    17,320       18,627       32,760       39,381  
Investment securities
    4,743       3,726       9,518       6,285  
Capital stock of FHLB
    883       985       1,785       1,986  
Cash and cash equivalents
    441       54       628       101  
     Total interest and dividend income
    84,941       93,707       172,188       192,594  
                                 
INTEREST EXPENSE:
                               
FHLB advances
    21,968       24,299       45,099       49,118  
Deposits
    16,069       19,776       33,450       41,881  
Other borrowings
    6,348       6,949       13,078       14,058  
     Total interest expense
    44,385       51,024       91,627       105,057  
                                 
NET INTEREST INCOME
    40,556       42,683       80,561       87,537  
                                 
PROVISION FOR CREDIT LOSSES
    520       3,200       1,170       6,315  
    NET INTEREST INCOME AFTER
                               
       PROVISION FOR CREDIT LOSSES
    40,036       39,483       79,391       81,222  
                                 
OTHER INCOME:
                               
Retail fees and charges
    3,561       4,213       7,504       8,936  
Insurance commissions
    888       753       1,706       1,335  
Loan fees
    621       674       1,276       1,255  
Income from BOLI
    504       223       836       491  
Gain on securities, net
    --       --       --       6,454  
Other income, net
    570       673       1,139       1,196  
     Total other income
    6,144       6,536       12,461       19,667  
                                 
OTHER EXPENSES:
                               
Salaries and employee benefits
    11,067       10,807       21,058       21,339  
Communications, information technology, and occupancy
    3,977       3,854       7,853       7,796  
Federal insurance premium
    1,128       1,845       2,986       3,659  
Deposit and loan transaction costs
    1,274       1,316       2,626       2,696  
Regulatory and outside services
    1,139       994       2,328       2,442  
Advertising and promotional
    693       1,337       1,524       2,981  
Contribution to Capitol Federal Foundation (“Foundation”)
    --       --       40,000       --  
Other expenses, net
    3,577       2,947       7,818       4,936  
     Total other expenses
    22,855       23,100       86,193       45,849  
INCOME BEFORE INCOME TAX EXPENSE
    23,325       22,919       5,659       55,040  
INCOME TAX EXPENSE
    7,689       8,264       1,281       19,405  
NET INCOME
  $ 15,636     $ 14,655     $ 4,378     $ 35,635  
     (Continued)



 
4

 





   
For the Three Months Ended
   
For the Six Months Ended
 
   
March 31,
   
March 31,
 
   
2011
   
2010
   
2011
   
2010
 
                         
                         
Basic earnings per common share
  $ 0.10     $ 0.09     $ 0.03     $ 0.22  
Diluted earnings per common share
  $ 0.10     $ 0.09     $ 0.03     $ 0.22  
Dividends declared per public share
  $ 0.68     $ 0.50     $ 1.48     $ 1.29  
                                 
Basic weighted average common shares
    161,499,795       165,734,124       163,542,495       165,794,605  
Diluted weighted average common shares
    161,507,374       165,798,989       163,550,750       165,847,257  
 
(Concluded)
 

 
See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.

 
5

 

CAPITOL FEDERAL FINANCIAL, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY
(Unaudited)
(Dollars in thousands)

         
Additional
   
Unearned
                     
Total
 
   
Common
   
Paid-In
   
Compensation-
   
Retained
         
Treasury
   
Stockholders'
 
   
Stock
   
Capital
   
ESOP
   
RRP
   
Earnings
   
AOCI
   
Stock
   
Equity
 
                                                 
Balance at October 1, 2010
  $ 915     $ 457,795     $ (6,050 )   $ (255 )   $ 801,044     $ 31,862     $ (323,361 )   $ 961,950  
Comprehensive income:
                                                               
   Net income
                                    4,378                       4,378  
   Other comprehensive (loss) income:
                                                               
      Changes in unrealized gain/losses on
                                                               
      securities AFS, net of deferred
                                                               
      income taxes of $3,143
                                            (5,173 )             (5,173 )
Total comprehensive (loss) income
                                                            (795 )
                                                                 
ESOP activity, net
            1,625       1,277                                       2,902  
RRP activity, net
            (4                                             (4
Stock based compensation - stock options
     and RRP
            63               71                               134  
Stock options exercised
            1                                               1  
Dividends on common stock to
                                                               
     stockholders $1.48 per share
                                    (125,899 )                     (125,899 )
                                                                 
Corporate reorganization:
                                                               
   Merger of Capitol Federal Savings Bank
      MHC
    (522 )     1,997                       (1,223 )                     252  
   Retirement of treasury stock
    (175 )     (204,199 )                     (118,987 )             323,361       --  
   Exchange of common stock
    276       (323 )                                             (47 )
   Proceeds from stock offering, net of offering
      expenses
    1,181       1,133,994                                               1,135,175  
                                                                 
Purchase of common stock by ESOP
                    (47,260 )                                     (47,260 )
Balance at March 31, 2011
  $ 1,675     $ 1,390,949     $ (52,033 )   $ (184 )   $ 559,313     $ 26,689     $ --     $ 1,926,409  


See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.
<Index>


 
6

 

CAPITOL FEDERAL FINANCIAL, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS
(Unaudited)
(Dollars in thousands)

   
For the Six Months Ended
 
   
March 31,
 
   
2011
   
2010
 
CASH FLOWS FROM OPERATING ACTIVITIES:
           
Net income
  $ 4,378     $ 35,635  
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by
               
    operating activities:
               
    FHLB stock dividends
    (1,785 )     (1,986 )
    Provision for credit losses
    1,170       6,315  
    Originations of loans receivable held-for-sale (“LHFS”)
    (8,106 )     (5,035 )
    Proceeds from sales of LHFS
    9,597       3,188  
    Amortization and accretion of premiums and discounts on securities
    3,375       3,005  
    Depreciation and amortization of premises and equipment
    2,218       2,410  
    Amortization of deferred amounts related to FHLB advances, net
    3,492       3,272  
    Common stock committed to be released for allocation - ESOP
    2,902       3,263  
    Stock based compensation - stock options and RRP
    134       285  
    Gain on the sale of trading securities received
               
        in the loan swap transaction
    --       (6,454 )
Changes in:
               
    Prepaid federal insurance premium
    2,743       (24,005 )
    Accrued interest receivable
    (558 )     851  
    Other assets, net
    2,478       (629 )
    Income taxes payable/receivable
    (7,458 )     (1,321 )
    Accounts payable and accrued expenses
    (8,245 )     (6,948 )
        Net cash provided by operating activities
    6,335       11,846  
                 
CASH FLOWS FROM INVESTING ACTIVITIES:
               
Proceeds from sale of trading securities
               
       received in the loan swap transaction
    --       199,144  
Purchase of AFS securities
    (405,815 )     --  
Purchase of HTM securities
    (1,658,451 )     (616,717 )
Proceeds from calls, maturities and principal reductions of AFS securities
    206,371       262,088  
Proceeds from calls, maturities and principal reductions of HTM securities
    582,910       92,063  
Loan originations and purchases, net of principal collected
               
       and deferred loan fees
    62,530       17,695  
Purchases of premises and equipment
    (4,011 )     (5,094 )
Proceeds from sales of REO
    5,774       5,967  
        Net cash used in investing activities
    (1,210,692 )     (44,854 )


(Continued)

 
7

 


             
   
For the Six Months Ended
 
   
March 31,
 
   
2011
   
2010
 
CASH FLOWS FROM FINANCING ACTIVITIES:
           
Dividends paid
    (125,899 )     (27,408 )
Deposits, net of withdrawals
    342,569       90,457  
Proceeds from borrowings
    300,000       --  
Repayments of borrowings
    (325,000 )     --  
Change in advance payments by borrowers for taxes and insurance
    (6,941 )     (6,561 )
Acquisitions of treasury stock
    --       (4,019 )
Net proceeds from common stock offering
    1,076,412       --  
Stock options exercised
    --       86  
Excess tax benefits from stock options
    1       34  
        Net cash provided by financing activities
    1,261,142       52,589  
                 
NET INCREASE IN CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS
    56,785       19,581  
CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS:
               
Beginning of period
    65,217       41,154  
End of period
  $ 122,002     $ 60,735  
                 
SUPPLEMENTAL DISCLOSURES OF CASH FLOW INFORMATION:
               
      Income tax payments
  $ 8,738     $ 20,687  
      Interest payments
  $ 88,477     $ 103,181  
                 
SUPPLEMENTAL DISCLOSURE OF NON-CASH
               
    INVESTING AND FINANCING ACTIVITIES:
               
                 
     Note received from ESOP in exchange for common stock
  $ 47,260     $ --  
                 
     Customer deposit holds related to common stock offering
  $ 17,690     $ --  
                 
      Loans transferred to REO
  $ 8,355     $ 5,344  
                 
      Swap of loans for trading securities
  $ --     $ 193,889  

(Concluded)
See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.
<Index>


 
8

 

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements (Unaudited)

1.   Summary of Significant Accounting Policies

Basis of Presentation - In December 2010, Capitol Federal Financial completed its conversion from a mutual holding company form of organization to a stock form of organization (“corporate reorganization”).   Capitol Federal Financial, which owned 100% of Capitol Federal Savings Bank (the “Bank”), was succeeded by Capitol Federal Financial, Inc. (“the Company”), a new Maryland corporation.  As part of the corporate reorganization, Capitol Federal Savings Bank MHC’s (“MHC”) ownership interest in Capitol Federal Financial was sold in a public offering.  Gross proceeds from the offering were $1.18 billion and related offering expenses were $46.7 million, of which $6.0 million were incurred and deferred in fiscal year 2010.  The publicly held shares of Capitol Federal Financial were exchanged for new shares of common stock of the Company.  The exchange ratio was 2.2637 and ensured that immediately after the corporate reorganization the public stockholders of Capitol Federal Financial owned the same aggregate percentage of Capitol Federal Financial, Inc. common stock that they owned of Capitol Federal Financial common stock immediately prior to the reorganization.  All share information used to calculate earnings per share in the consolidated financial statements prior to the corporate reorganization has been revised to reflect the 2.2637 exchange ratio.  In conjunction with the corporate reorganization, the Company contributed $40.0 million of cash to the Bank’s charitable foundation, Capitol Federal Foundation.  Additionally, a “liquidation account” has been established for the benefit of certain depositors of the Bank in an amount equal to MHC’s ownership interest in the retained earnings of Capitol Federal Financial as of June 30, 2010.  Under Office of Thrift Supervision (“OTS”) regulations, neither the Company nor the Bank is permitted to pay dividends on its capital stock to its stockholders if stockholders’ equity would be reduced below the total of the liquidation account.

The consolidated financial statements include the accounts of the Company and its wholly-owned subsidiary, the Bank.  The Bank has a wholly-owned subsidiary, Capitol Funds, Inc.  Capitol Funds, Inc. has a wholly-owned subsidiary, Capitol Federal Mortgage Reinsurance Company.  All intercompany accounts and transactions have been eliminated in consolidation.  The financial information presented is derived from the consolidated financial statements of the Company after the corporate reorganization in December 2010 and from the consolidated financial statements of Capitol Federal Financial prior to the corporate reorganization.

Capitol Federal Financial’s treasury shares were retired in connection with the corporate reorganization.  As noted above, the Company is a Maryland corporation.  Under Maryland law, there is no concept of “treasury shares.”  Instead, shares purchased by the Company constitute authorized but unissued shares under Maryland law.  There were no treasury shares at March 31, 2011.

The accompanying consolidated financial statements of the Company have been prepared in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America (“GAAP”) for interim financial information and with the instructions to Form 10-Q and Rule 10-01 of Regulation S-X.  Accordingly, they do not include all of the information and footnotes required by GAAP for complete financial statements.  In the opinion of management, all adjustments (consisting of normal recurring adjustments) considered necessary for a fair presentation have been included.  These statements should be read in conjunction with the consolidated financial statements and notes thereto included in the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended September 30, 2010, filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”).  Interim results are not necessarily indicative of results for a full year.  In preparing the financial statements, management is required to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements and revenues and expenses during the reporting periods.  Significant estimates include the ACL and fair value measurements.  Actual results could differ from those estimates.

Loans Receivable - Loans receivable that management has the intent and ability to hold for the foreseeable future are carried at the amount of unpaid principal, net of the ACL, undisbursed loan funds, unamortized premiums and discounts, and deferred loan origination fees and costs.  Net loan origination fees and costs and premiums and discounts are amortized as yield adjustments to interest income using the level-yield method, adjusted for the estimated prepayment speeds of the related loans when applicable.  Interest on loans is credited to income as earned and accrued only if deemed collectible.

Existing loan customers, whose loans have not been sold to third parties and who have been current on their contractual loan payments for the previous 12 months, have the opportunity, for a fee, to modify their original loan terms to current loan terms being offered.  The fee assessed for modifying the mortgage loan is deferred and amortized over the life of the modified loan using the level-yield method and is reflected as an adjustment to interest income.  Each modification is examined on a loan-by-loan basis and if the modification of terms represents more than a minor change to the loan, then the unamortized balance of the pre-modification deferred fees or costs associated with the mortgage loan are recognized in interest income at the time of the modification.  If the modification of terms does not represent more than a minor change to the loan, then the unamortized balance of the pre-modification deferred fees or costs continue to be deferred.

 
9

 
A loan is considered delinquent when payment has not been received within 30 days of its contractual due date.  The accrual of income on loans is discontinued when interest or principal payments are 90 days in arrears.  Loans on which the accrual of income has been discontinued are designated as non-accrual loans and outstanding interest previously credited beyond 90 days delinquent is reversed.  A non-accrual loan is returned to accrual status once the contractual payments have been made to bring the loan less than 90 days past due.

A condition in which the Bank grants a concession that it would not otherwise consider to a borrower due to financial difficulties is a troubled debt restructuring (“TDR”).  The majority of the Bank’s TDRs involve a modification in loan terms such as a temporary reduction in the payment amount requiring only interest and escrow payments (if required) and extending the maturity date of the loan.

A loan is considered impaired when, based on current information and events, it is probable that the Bank will be unable to collect all amounts due, including principal and interest, according to the contractual terms of the loan agreement.  Interest income on impaired loans is recognized in the period collected unless the ultimate collection of principal is considered doubtful.  Management considers the following loans to be impaired loans: all non-accrual loans, loans classified as substandard, loans with specific valuation allowances (“SVA”), and TDRs that have not been performing under the new terms for 12 consecutive months or are required by the accounting literature to be classified as a TDR for the life of the loan.

Allowance for Credit Losses - The ACL represents management’s best estimate of the amount of known and inherent losses in the loan portfolio as of the balance sheet date.  Management’s methodology for assessing the appropriateness of the ACL consists of a formula analysis for general valuation allowances and SVAs for identified problem loans.  Management maintains the ACL through provisions for loan losses that are charged to income.

For one-to four-family loans, losses are charged-off when a loan is transferred to REO or if there is a short-sale of the collateral.   For consumer home equity loans where the Bank only holds the second mortgage, if the loan balance is in excess of the fair value and the loan is in foreclosure, the difference between the loan balance and the fair value is charged-off.  Private mortgage insurance (“PMI”) and estimated selling costs are taken into consideration when calculating the amount to charge-off for home equity loans.  Other consumer loans that are unsecured are entirely charged-off once the loan is 120 days past due.  For multi-family and commercial loans, the Bank records a charge-off when it is determined that the collection of all or a portion of a loan may not be collected and the amount of that loss is reasonably estimated.

The Bank’s primary lending emphasis is the origination and purchase of one- to four-family first mortgage loans on residential properties and, to a lesser extent, second mortgage loans on one- to four-family residential properties, resulting in a loan concentration in residential mortgage loans.  The Bank has a concentration of loans secured by residential property located in Kansas and Missouri.  Based on the composition of the Bank’s loan portfolio, the primary risks inherent in the one- to four-family and consumer loan portfolios are the continued weakened economic conditions, continued high levels of unemployment or underemployment, and a continuing decline in residential real estate values.  Any one or a combination of these events may adversely affect borrowers’ ability to repay their loans, resulting in increased delinquencies, non-performing assets, loan losses, and future loan loss provisions.  Although the multi-family and commercial loan portfolio also shares the risk of continued weakened economic conditions, the primary risks for the portfolio include the ability of the borrower to sustain sufficient cash flows from leases and to control expenses to satisfy their contractual debt payments, or the ability to utilize personal and/or business resources to pay their contractual debt payments if the cash flows are not sufficient.  Additionally, if the Bank were to repossess the secured collateral of a multi-family or commercial loan, the pool of potential buyers is limited more than that for a residential property; therefore, the Bank could hold the property for an extended period of time and potentially be forced to sell at a discounted price, resulting in additional losses.

Management considers several quantitative and qualitative factors quarterly while monitoring the credit quality of the loan portfolio and evaluating the adequacy of the ACL.  Such factors include the trend and composition of delinquent and non-performing loans, results of foreclosed property and short-sale transactions (historical losses and net charge-offs), the current status and trends of local and national economies, particularly levels of unemployment, trends and current conditions in the residential real estate markets, and loan portfolio growth and concentrations. Since the Bank’s loan portfolio is primarily concentrated in one- to four-family real estate, management monitors residential real estate market value trends in the Bank’s local market areas and geographic sections of the U.S. by
 
 
10

 
reference to various industry and market reports, economic releases and surveys, and management’s general and specific knowledge of the real estate markets in which the Bank lends, in order to determine what impact, if any, such trends may have on the level of ACL.   Reviewing these quantitative and qualitative factors assists management in evaluating the overall credit quality of the loan portfolio and the reasonableness of the ACL on an ongoing basis, and whether changes need to be made to the Bank’s allowance for credit loss methodology.  Management seeks to apply the allowance for credit loss methodology in a consistent manner; however, the methodology can be modified in response to changing conditions.  There were no significant modifications to the formula analysis methodology during the current quarter.  The formula analysis for general valuation allowances is updated each quarter.  Within the formula analysis, the loan portfolio is segregated into the following categories:  one- to four-family loans, multi-family and commercial loans, consumer home equity loans, and other consumer loans.  Home equity loans with the same underlying collateral as a one- to four-family loan are combined with the one- to four-family loan in the formula analysis to calculate a combined loan-to-value (“LTV”) ratio.  Impaired loans are excluded from the formula analysis as they are individually evaluated for SVAs.  The one- to four-family loan portfolio and related home equity loans are segregated into additional categories based on the following risk characteristics:  originated or purchased from nationwide lender, interest payments (fixed-rate, adjustable-rate, and interest-only), LTV ratios, borrower’s credit scores, and certain states where the Bank has experienced measurable losses on REO and short-sales.  The additional categories were derived by management based on reviewing the historical performance of the one- to four-family loan portfolio and taking into consideration current economic conditions, such as trends in the residential real estate values in certain areas of the U.S. and unemployment rates.

Quantitative loss factors are applied to each loan category in the formula analysis based on the historical loss experience and current SVAs, adjusted for loan delinquency trends, for each respective loan category.  Each quarter, management reviews the historical loss time periods and utilizes the historical loss time periods believed to be the most reflective of the current economic conditions and recent charge-off experience for each respective loan category.

Qualitative loss factors are applied to each loan category in the formula analysis.  The qualitative factors for the one- to four-family and consumer loan portfolios are:  unemployment rate trends, collateral value trends, credit score trends, and delinquent loan trends.  The qualitative factors for the multi-family and commercial loan portfolio are:  unemployment rate trends, collateral value trends, and delinquent loan trends.  As loans are classified as special mention or become 30 to 89 days delinquent, the qualitative loss factors increase based upon delinquent loan trends.  As with the additional categories in the formula analysis for one- to four-family loans, the qualitative factors were derived by management based on a review of the historical performance of the respective loan portfolios and consideration of current economic conditions and their likely impact to the loan portfolio.

SVAs are established in connection with individual loan reviews of impaired loans.  Since the majority of the Bank’s loan portfolio is composed of residential real estate, determining the estimated fair value of the underlying collateral is important in evaluating the amount of SVAs required for impaired one-to four-family loans.  If the estimated fair value of the collateral, less estimated costs to sell and anticipated PMI proceeds, is less than the current loan balance, an SVA is established for the difference.  Once a purchased one-to four-family loan is 90 days delinquent, new collateral values are obtained through automated valuation models (“AVMs”) or broker price opinions (“BPOs”).  An updated AVM or BPO is then requested approximately every 6 months while the loan is greater than 90 days delinquent.   Due to the relatively stable home values in Kansas and Missouri, new appraisals on originated one- to four- family loans are not obtained until a loan enters foreclosure.  For originated one- to four-family loans and home equity loans that are impaired and the most recent appraisal is more than one year old, management estimates the fair value of the collateral using the most recently published Federal Housing Finance Agency (“FHFA”) index.  If the Bank holds the first and second mortgage, both loans are combined when evaluating the need for an SVA.

Loans with an outstanding balance of $1.5 million or more are reviewed annually if secured by property in one of the following categories:  multi-family (five or more units) property, unimproved land, other improved commercial property, acquisition and development of land projects, developed building lots, office building, single-use building, or retail building.  SVAs are established if necessary, or management may charge-off such losses if deemed appropriate.

Assessing the adequacy of the ACL is inherently subjective.  Actual results could differ from estimates as a result of changes in economic or market conditions.  Changes in estimates could result in a material change in the ACL.  In the opinion of management, the ACL, when taken as a whole, is adequate to absorb estimated losses inherent in the loan portfolio.  However, future adjustments may be necessary if loan portfolio performance or economic or market conditions differ substantially from the conditions that existed at the time of the initial determinations.

 
11

 
Recent Accounting Pronouncements - Effective October 1, 2010, the Company adopted new authoritative accounting guidance under Accounting Standards Codification (“ASC”) 860, Transfers of Servicing Assets.  The objective of this standard is   to improve the relevance, representational faithfulness, and comparability of the information provided in the financial statements related to the transfer of financial assets; the effects of a transfer on the company’s financial position, financial performance, and cash flows; and a transferor’s continuing involvement in transferred financial assets.  The adoption of this standard did not have a material impact on the Company’s financial condition or results of operations.

Effective October 1, 2010, the Company also adopted new authoritative accounting guidance under ASC 810, Consolidation (“ASC 810”).  The new guidance did not change many of the key principles for determining whether an entity is a variable interest entity consistent with the ASC on “Consolidation”, but does amend many important provisions of the existing guidance on “Consolidation.”  The adoption of this standard did not have an impact on the Company’s financial condition, results of operations, or financial statement disclosures.

In July 2010, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”) issued Accounting Standards Update (“ASU”) 2010-20, Disclosures about Credit Quality of Financing Receivables and the Allowance for Credit Losses , which amends ASC 310, Receivables , by requiring more robust and disaggregated disclosures about the credit quality of an entity’s financing receivables and its ACL. The objective of enhancing these disclosures is to improve financial statement users’ understanding of (1) the nature of an entity’s credit risk associated with its financing receivables and (2) the entity’s assessment of that risk in estimating its ACL as well as changes in the allowance and the reasons for those changes.   The new and amended disclosures that relate to information as of the end of a reporting period were effective for the Company at December 31, 2010. The disclosures that include information for activity that occurs during a reporting period were effective beginning January 1, 2011 for the Company.  Since the provisions of ASU 2010-20 are disclosure-related, the Company’s adoption of this guidance did not have an impact to its financial condition or results of operations.

In January 2011, the FASB issued ASU 2011-01, Deferral of the Effective Date of Disclosures About Troubled Debt Restructurings in Update No. 2010-20 , which temporarily deferred the effective date in ASU 2010-20 for disclosures about TDRs by creditors until the FASB finalized its project on determining what constitutes a TDR for a creditor. In April 2011, the FASB issued ASU 2011-02, Receivables (Topic 310): A Creditor's Determination of Whether a Restructuring Is a Troubled Debt Restructuring, which amends the content in ASC 310 related to identifying TDRs and effectively nullifies ASU 2011-01.  ASU 2011-02 removes the deferral of the TDR disclosure requirements of ASU 2010-20 for public entities and thus establishes the effective date for those disclosures.  ASU 2011-02 is effective for the first interim or annual period beginning on or after June 15, 2011, which is July 1, 2011 for the Company.  The pronouncement is to be applied retrospectively to modifications occurring on or after the beginning of the fiscal year of adoption, which is October 1, 2010 for the Company.  The Company has not yet completed it assessment of the impact of ASU 2011-02.


 
12

 




2.   Earnings Per Share

The Company accounts for the shares acquired by its ESOP and the shares awarded pursuant to its RRP in accordance with ASC 260, which requires that unvested RRP awards that contain nonforfeitable rights to dividends be treated as participating securities in the computation of earnings per share pursuant to the two-class method. The two-class method is an earnings allocation that determines earnings per share for each class of common stock and participating security. Shares acquired by the ESOP are not considered in the basic average shares outstanding until the shares are committed for allocation or vested to an employee’s individual account.  All share information prior to the corporate reorganization in December 2010 has been revised to reflect the 2.2637 exchange ratio.

   
For the Three Months Ended
   
For the Six Months Ended
 
   
March 31,
   
March 31,
 
   
2011
   
2010
   
2011
   
2010
 
   
(in thousands, except share and per share data)
 
Net income (1)
  $ 15,636     $ 14,655     $ 4,378     $ 35,635  
                                 
Average common shares outstanding
    161,381,230       165,618,743       163,483,221       165,736,922  
Average committed ESOP shares outstanding
    118,565       115,381       59,274       57,683  
Total basic average common shares outstanding
    161,499,795       165,734,124       163,542,495       165,794,605  
                                 
Effect of dilutive RRP shares
    2,104       5,851       3,250       9,020  
Effect of dilutive stock options
    5,475       59,014       5,005       43,632  
                                 
Total diluted average common shares outstanding
    161,507,374       165,798,989       163,550,750       165,847,257  
                                 
Net earnings per share:
                               
     Basic
  $ 0.10     $ 0.09     $ 0.03     $ 0.22  
     Diluted
  $ 0.10     $ 0.09     $ 0.03     $ 0.22  
                                 
Antidilutive stock options and RRP shares excluded
                               
  from the diluted average common shares
                               
  outstanding calculation
    902,945       354,839       902,939       645,946  


(1)  
Net income available to participating securities (unvested RRP shares) was inconsequential for the three and six months ended March 31, 2011 and 2010.



 
13

 


3.   Securities

The following tables reflect the amortized cost, estimated fair value, and gross unrealized gains and losses of AFS and HTM securities at March 31, 2011 and September 30, 2010.  The majority of the MBS and investment portfolios are composed of securities issued by U.S. government-sponsored enterprises (“GSEs”).

   
March 31, 2011
 
   
 
   
Gross
   
Gross
   
Estimated
 
   
Amortized
   
Unrealized
   
Unrealized
   
Fair
 
   
Cost
   
Gains
   
Losses
   
Value
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
AFS:
                       
   GSE debentures
  $ 404,886     $ 137     $ 64     $ 404,959  
   Municipal bonds
    2,639       114       --       2,753  
   Trust preferred securities
    3,708       --       929       2,779  
   MBS
    796,012       43,651       1       839,662  
      1,207,245       43,902       994       1,250,153  
HTM:
                               
   GSE debentures
    1,376,742       1,305       7,682       1,370,365  
   Municipal bonds
    60,682       1,627       65       62,244  
   MBS
    1,516,237       26,175       8,276       1,534,136  
      2,953,661       29,107       16,023       2,966,745  
    $ 4,160,906     $ 73,009     $ 17,017     $ 4,216,898  
                                 
   
September 30, 2010
 
           
Gross
   
Gross
   
Estimated
 
   
Amortized
   
Unrealized
   
Unrealized
   
Fair
 
   
Cost
   
Gains
   
Losses
   
Value
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
AFS:
                               
   GSE debentures
  $ 50,151     $ 104     $ --     $ 50,255  
   Municipal bonds
    2,649       170       --       2,819  
   Trust preferred securities
    3,721       --       925       2,796  
   MBS
    952,621       51,881       6       1,004,496  
      1,009,142       52,155       931       1,060,366  
HTM:
                               
   GSE debentures
    1,208,829       4,441       --       1,213,270  
   Municipal bonds
    67,957       2,654       1       70,610  
   MBS
    603,368       26,209       3       629,574  
      1,880,154       33,304       4       1,913,454  
    $ 2,889,296     $ 85,459     $ 935     $ 2,973,820  


 
14

 



 

 
 
At March 31, 2011 and September 30, 2010, the MBS held within our portfolio were issued by Federal National Mortgage Association (“FNMA”), Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation (“FHLMC”), or Government National Mortgage Association (“GNMA”), with the exception of $2.2 million and $2.9 million at those respective dates, which were issued by a private issuer.  The following table presents the carrying value of the MBS in our portfolio by issuer at March 31, 2011 and September 30, 2010.
 
   
March 31, 2011
   
September 30, 2010
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
             
FNMA
  $ 1,309,547     $ 890,216  
FHLMC
    836,664       712,253  
GNMA
    207,448       2,452  
Private Issuer
    2,240       2,943  
    $ 2,355,899     $ 1,607,864  

 
The following table presents the taxable and non-taxable components of interest income on investment securities for the three and six months ended March 31, 2011 and 2010:
 
   
For the Three Months Ended
   
For the Six Months Ended
 
   
March 31,
   
March 31,
 
   
2011
   
2010
   
2011
   
2010
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
                         
Taxable
  $ 4,266     $ 3,188     $ 8,537     $ 5,213  
Non-taxable
    477       538       981       1,072  
    $ 4,743     $ 3,726     $ 9,518     $ 6,285  


 
15

 




The following tables summarize the estimated fair value and gross unrealized losses of those securities on which an unrealized loss at March 31, 2011 and September 30, 2010 was reported and the continuous unrealized loss position for the 12 months prior to March 31, 2011 and September 30, 2010 or for a shorter period of time, as applicable.

   
March 31, 2011
 
   
Less Than
   
Equal to or Greater
 
   
12 Months
   
Than 12 Months
 
         
Estimated
   
Unrealized
         
Estimated
   
Unrealized
 
   
Count
   
Fair Value
   
Losses
   
Count
   
Fair Value
   
Losses
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
AFS:
                                   
   GSE debentures
    4     $ 81,114     $ 64       --     $ --     $ --  
   Trust preferred securities
    --       --       --       1       2,779       929  
   MBS
    3       521       1       --       --       --  
      7     $ 81,635     $ 65       1     $ 2,779     $ 929  
                                                 
HTM:
                                               
   GSE debentures
    24     $ 700,867     $ 7,682       --     $ --     $ --  
   Municipal bonds
    5       3,549       36       1       848       29  
   MBS
    23       612,510       8,276       --       --       --  
      52     $ 1,316,926     $ 15,994       1     $ 848     $ 29  
 
 
   
September 30, 2010
 
   
Less Than
   
Equal to or Greater
 
   
12 Months
   
Than 12 Months
 
         
Estimated
   
Unrealized
         
Estimated
   
Unrealized
 
   
Count
   
Fair Value
   
Losses
   
Count
   
Fair Value
   
Losses
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
AFS:
                                   
   GSE debentures
    --     $ --     $ --       --     $ --     $ --  
   Trust preferred securities
    --       --       --       1       2,796       925  
   MBS
    4       1,678       5       3       359       1  
      4     $ 1,678     $ 5       4     $ 3,155     $ 926  
                                                 
HTM:
                                               
   GSE debentures
    --     $ --     $ --       --     $ --     $ --  
   Municipal bonds
    --       --       --       1       878       1  
   MBS
    1       48,392       3       --       --       --  
      1     $ 48,392     $ 3       1     $ 878     $ 1  
 
 
 
 
16

 
On a quarterly basis, management conducts a formal review of securities for the presence of an other-than-temporary impairment.  Management assesses whether an other-than-temporay impairment is present when the fair value of a security is less than its amortized cost basis at the balance sheet date.  For such securities, other-than-temporary impairment is considered to have occurred if the Company intends to sell the security, if it is more likely than not the Company will be required to sell the security before recovery of its amortized cost basis, or if the present value of expected cash flows is not sufficient to recover the entire amortized cost.

The unrealized losses at March 31, 2011 and September 30, 2010 are primarily a result of increases in market yields from the time of purchase.  In general, as market yields rise, the fair value of securities will decrease; as market yields fall, the fair value of securities will increase. Management generally views changes in fair value caused by changes in interest rates as temporary; therefore, these securities have not been classified as other-than-temporarily impaired.  Additionally, the impairment is also considered temporary because scheduled coupon payments have been made, it is anticipated that the entire principal balance will be collected as scheduled, and management neither intends to sell the securities and it is not more likely than not that the Company will be required to sell the securities before the recovery of the remaining amortized cost amount, which could be at maturity.

The amortized cost and estimated fair value of securities by remaining contractual maturity without consideration for call features or pre-refunding dates as of March 31, 2011 are shown below.  Actual maturities of MBS may differ from contractual maturities because borrowers have the right to prepay obligations, generally without penalty.  Maturities of MBS depend on the repayment characteristics and experience of the underlying financial instruments.

   
AFS
   
HTM
 
   
 
   
Estimated
         
Estimated
 
   
Amortized
   
Fair
   
Amortized
   
Fair
 
   
Cost
   
Value
   
Cost
   
Value
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
                         
One year or less
  $ 222,192     $ 222,238     $ 3,687     $ 3,712  
One year through five years
    183,271       183,323       1,378,831       1,373,210  
Five years through ten years
    178,185       190,828       492,400       502,343  
Ten years and thereafter
    623,597       653,764       1,078,743       1,087,480  
    $ 1,207,245     $ 1,250,153     $ 2,953,661     $ 2,966,745  

 
Issuers of certain investment securities have the right to call and prepay obligations with or without prepayment penalties.  As of March 31, 2011, the amortized cost of the securities in our portfolio which are callable or have pre-refunding dates within one year totaled $1.29 billion.
 
 
The following table summarizes the amortized cost and estimated fair value of securities pledged as collateral as of the dates indicated.
 
   
March 31, 2011
   
September 30, 2010
 
   
 
   
Estimated
         
Estimated
 
   
Amortized
   
Fair
   
Amortized
   
Fair
 
   
Cost
   
Value
   
Cost
   
Value
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
                         
Repurchase agreements
  $ 648,839     $ 685,856     $ 671,852     $ 709,919  
Retail deposits
    211,466       210,024       --       --  
Public unit deposits
    119,482       126,880       120,241       128,621  
Federal Reserve Bank
    29,886       31,225       34,720       36,363  
    $ 1,009,673     $ 1,053,985     $ 826,813     $ 874,903  
 
During fiscal year 2010, the Bank swapped originated fixed-rate mortgage loans with FHLMC for MBS (“loan swap transaction”).  The $192.7 million of MBS received, at amortized cost, in the loan swap transaction were classified as trading securities prior to their subsequent sale by the Bank.  Proceeds from the sale of these securities were $199.1 million, resulting in a gross realized gain of $6.5 million.  The gain is included in gain on securities, net in the consolidated statements of income for the year ended September 30, 2010.  All other dispositions of securities during fiscal year 2010 were the result of principal repayments or maturities.
 
 

 
17

 
 
4.   Loans Receivable and Allowance for Credit Losses
 
Loans receivable, net at March 31, 2011 and September 30, 2010 is summarized as follows:
 
   
March 31, 2011
   
September 30, 2010
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
Mortgage loans:
           
  One- to four-family
  $ 4,867,405     $ 4,915,651  
  Multi-family and commercial
    60,869       66,476  
  Construction
    39,694       33,168  
     Total real estate loans
    4,967,968       5,015,295  
                 
Consumer loans:
               
  Home equity
    169,150       186,347  
  Other
    6,932       7,671  
     Total consumer loans
    176,082       194,018  
                 
Total loans receivable
    5,144,050       5,209,313  
                 
Less:
               
  Undisbursed loan funds
    21,004       15,489  
  Unearned loan fees and deferred costs
    12,617       10,730  
  ACL
    13,814       14,892  
    $ 5,096,615     $ 5,168,202  

 
Lending Practices and Underwriting Standards - Originating and purchasing loans secured by one- to four-family residential properties is the Bank’s primary business, resulting in a loan concentration in residential first mortgage loans.  One-to four-family loans are purchased from a select group of correspondent lenders in the Bank’s primary market areas and selected market areas in Missouri.  As a result, the Bank has a concentration of loans secured by real property located in Kansas and Missouri.  Additionally, the Bank purchases whole one- to four-family loans from nationwide lenders.  The servicing rights for these loans are generally retained by the lender.  The Bank also makes consumer loans, construction loans secured by residential or commercial properties, and real estate loans secured by multi-family dwellings.

One- to four-family loans - One- to four-family loans are underwritten manually or by an automated underwriting system developed by a third party.  The system’s components closely resemble the Bank’s manual underwriting standards which are generally in accordance with FHLMC and FNMA manual underwriting guidelines.  The automated underwriting system analyzes the applicant’s data, with emphasis on credit history, employment and income history, qualifying ratios reflecting the applicant’s ability to repay, asset reserves, and LTV ratio.  Full documentation to support the applicant’s credit, income, and sufficient funds to cover all applicable fees and reserves at closing is required on all loans.  Loans that do not meet the automated underwriting standards are referred to a staff underwriter for manual underwriting.  Properties securing one- to four-family loans are appraised by either staff appraisers or fee appraisers, both of which are independent of the loan origination function.

The underwriting standards for loans purchased from correspondent and nationwide lenders are generally similar to the Bank’s internal underwriting standards.  The underwriting of loans purchased from correspondent lenders is generally performed by the Bank’s underwriters and the Bank services the loans.  Before committing to purchase a pool of loans from a nationwide lender, the Bank’s Chief Lending Officer or Secondary Marketing Manager reviews specific criteria such as loan amount, credit scores, LTV ratios, geographic location, and debt ratios of each loan in the pool.  If the specific criteria do not meet the Bank’s underwriting standards and compensating factors are not sufficient, then a loan will be removed from the pool.  Before the pool is funded, an internal Bank underwriter reviews at least 25% of the loan files to confirm loan terms, credit scores, debt service ratios, property appraisals, and other underwriting related documentation.  The Bank does not service the loans purchased from nationwide lenders.  For the tables within this footnote, loans purchased from correspondent lenders are included with originated loans, and loans purchased from nationwide lenders are reported as purchased loans.

 
18

 
The Bank also originates construction-to-permanent loans secured by one- to four-family residential real estate.  The majority of the one- to four-family construction loans are secured by property located within the Bank’s Kansas City market area.  Construction loans are obtained primarily by homeowners who will occupy the property when construction is complete.  Construction loans to builders for speculative purposes are not permitted.  The application process includes submission of complete plans, specifications, and costs of the project to be constructed.  All construction loans are manually underwritten using the Bank’s internal underwriting standards.  Construction draw requests and the supporting documentation are reviewed and approved by management.  The Bank also performs regular documented inspections of the construction project to ensure the funds are being used for the intended purpose and the project is being completed according to the plans and specifications provided.

For a conventional mortgage with an LTV ratio in excess of 80% at the time of origination, PMI is required in order to reduce the Bank’s loss exposure to less than 80% of either the appraised value or the purchase price of the property, whichever is less.  The Bank will lend up to 97% of the lesser of the appraised value or purchase price for conventional one- to four-family loans, provided PMI is obtained.

Multi-family and commercial loans - The Bank’s multi-family and commercial real estate loans are secured primarily by multi-family dwellings and small commercial buildings generally located in the Bank’s market areas.  These loans are granted based on the income producing potential of the property and the financial strength of the borrower.  At the time of origination, LTV ratios on multi-family and commercial real estate loans cannot exceed 80% of the appraised value of the property securing the loans.  The net operating income, which is the income derived from the operation of the property less all operating expenses, must be sufficient to cover the payments related to the outstanding debt at the time of origination.  The Bank generally requires personal guarantees of the borrowers covering a portion of the debt in addition to the security property as collateral for these loans.  Appraisals on properties securing these loans are performed by independent state certified fee appraisers.

Consumer loans -The Bank offers a variety of secured consumer loans, including home equity loans and lines of credit, home improvement loans, auto loans, and loans secured by savings deposits.   The Bank also originates a very limited amount of unsecured loans.  The Bank does not originate any consumer loans on an indirect basis, such as contracts purchased from retailers of goods or services which have extended credit to their customers.  The majority of the consumer loan portfolio is comprised of home equity lines of credit. In order to minimize risk of loss, home equity loans that are greater than 80% of the value of the property at the time of origination, when combined with the first mortgage, require PMI.

The underwriting standards for consumer loans include a determination of the applicant’s payment history on other debts and an assessment of their ability to meet existing obligations and payments on the proposed loan.  Although creditworthiness of the applicant is a primary consideration, the underwriting process also includes a comparison of the value of the security in relation to the proposed loan amount.

Credit quality indicators Based on the Bank’s lending emphasis and underwriting standards, management has segmented the loan portfolio into three segments:  one- to four-family loans, consumer loans, and multi-family and commercial loans.  The one- to four-family and consumer segments are further grouped into classes for purposes of providing disaggregated information about the credit quality of the loan portfolio.  The classes are:  one- to four-family loans – originated, one- to four-family loans – purchased, consumer loans – home equity, and consumer loans – other.  The Bank’s primary credit quality indicators for the one- to four-family loan and consumer - home equity loan portfolios are delinquency status, asset classifications in accordance with applicable regulations, LTV ratios and borrower credit scores.  The Bank’s primary credit quality indicators for the multi-family and commercial loan and consumer – other loan portfolios are delinquency status and asset classifications in accordance with applicable regulations.

 
19

 
The following table presents the recorded investment of loans, defined as the unpaid loan principal balance (net of unadvanced funds related to loans in process) inclusive of unearned loan fees and deferred costs, of the Company's 30 to 89 day delinquent loans, 90 or more day delinquent loans, total delinquent loans, total current loans, and the total loans receivable balance at March 31, 2011 by class.  In the general valuation allowance model, loans in the 30 to 89 day delinquent category are assigned a higher loss factor than corresponding performing loans.  Loans 90 or more days delinquent are considered impaired loans and are individually evaluated for impairment.  At March 31, 2011, all loans in the 90 or more days delinquent category were on nonaccrual status and represented the entire balance of nonaccrual loans.  At March 31, 2011, there were no loans 90 or more days delinquent that were still accruing interest.  

               
Total
         
Total
 
   
30 to 89 Days
   
90 or More Days
   
Delinquent
   
Current
   
Recorded
 
   
Delinquent
   
Delinquent
   
Loans
   
Loans
   
Investment
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
One- to four-family loans - originated
  $ 16,768     $ 13,885     $ 30,653     $ 4,341,566     $ 4,372,219  
One- to four-family loans - purchased
    5,616       15,220       20,836       479,617       500,453  
Multi-family and commercial loans
    --       --       --       61,675       61,675  
Consumer - home equity
    456       428       884       168,266       169,150  
Consumer - other
    180       59       239       6,693       6,932  
    $ 23,020     $ 29,592     $ 52,612     $ 5,057,817     $ 5,110,429  

In connection with the filing of the Bank’s periodic reports with the OTS and in accordance with the Bank’s asset classification policy, management regularly reviews the problem loans in the Bank's portfolio to determine whether any assets require classification in accordance with applicable regulations.  Loan classifications, other than pass loans, are defined as follows:

·  
Special mention - These loans are performing loans on which known information about the collateral pledged or the possible credit problems of the borrowers have caused management to have doubts as to the ability of the borrowers to comply with present loan repayment terms and which may result in the future inclusion of such loans in the non-performing loan categories.
·  
Substandard - A loan is considered substandard if it is inadequately protected by the current net worth and paying capacity of the obligor or of the collateral pledged, if any.  Substandard loans include those characterized by the distinct possibility the Bank will sustain some loss if the deficiencies are not corrected.
·  
Doubtful - Loans classified as doubtful have all the weaknesses inherent as those classified as substandard, with the added characteristic that the weaknesses present make collection or liquidation in full on the basis of currently existing facts and conditions and values highly questionable and improbable.
·  
Loss - Loans classified as loss are considered uncollectible and of such little value that their continuance as loans without the establishment of specific loss allowance is not warranted.

Special mention loans are included with loans 30 to 89 days delinquent in the general valuation allowance model, if the loan is not considered impaired.  Loans classified as substandard, doubtful, or loss are considered impaired loans and are individually evaluated for impairment.

 
20

 



The following table sets forth the recorded investment in loans, less SVAs, classified at March 31, 2011 by class.  At March 31, 2011, there were no loans classified as doubtful or loss that were not fully reserved.  In addition to the classified loans below, the Bank has $10.6 million of other assets also classified per its asset classification policy and applicable regulations.

   
Special Mention
   
Substandard
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
One- to four-family - originated
  $ 19,254     $ 19,512  
One- to four-family - purchased
    565       17,348  
Multi-family and commercial
    8,223       --  
Consumer - home equity
    26       654  
Consumer - other
    --       63  
    $ 28,068     $ 37,577  

 
21

 


The following tables show the LTV and credit score information for originated and purchased one- to four-family loans and originated consumer home equity loans at March 31, 2011.  Borrower credit scores provide an indication as to the likelihood that a borrower will repay their debts.  Credit scores were most recently updated in March 2011 and were obtained from a nationally recognized consumer rating agency.  The LTV ratios provide an estimate of the extent to which the Bank may incur a loss on any given loan that may go into foreclosure.  The LTV ratios were based on the current loan balance and either the lesser of the purchase price or original appraisal, or the most recent bank appraisal, BPO or AVM, if available.  In most cases, the most recent appraisal was obtained at the time of origination.
 
 
One- to Four-Family - Originated
 
Credit Score
 
   
Less than 660
   
661 to 700
 
701 to 750
 
751 and above
 
Total
 
   
Recorded
 
% of       
   
Recorded
   
% of
   
Recorded
   
% of
   
Recorded
   
% of
   
Recorded
   
% of
 
LTV ratio                                                     
 
Investment
 
total
   
Investment
   
total
   
Investment
   
total
   
Investment
   
total
   
Investment
   
total
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
Less than 70%
  $ 95,943   2.2
%
  $ 111,967       2.6 %   $ 310,571       7.1 %   $ 1,723,087       39.4 %   $ 2,241,568       51.3 %
70% to 80%
    76,269   1.7       89,475       2.0       287,152       6.6       1,004,609       23.0       1,457,505       33.3  
More than 80%
    61,662   1.4       58,905       1.3       173,748       4.0       378,831       8.7       673,146       15.4  
    $ 233,874   5.3
%
  $ 260,347       5.9 %   $ 771,471       17.7 %   $ 3,106,527       71.1 %   $ 4,372,219       100.0 %
                                                                             
Weighted average LTV ratio
    66%  
 
                                                                 
Weighted average credit score
    762                                                                         
                                                                             
 
One- to Four-Family - Purchased
 
Credit Score
 
   
Less than 660
   
661 to 700
 
701 to 750
 
751 and above
 
Total
 
   
Recorded
   
% of
     
Recorded
   
% of
   
Recorded
   
% of
   
Recorded
   
% of
   
Recorded
   
% of
 
LTV ratio                                                          
 
Investment
   
total
     
Investment
   
total
   
Investment
   
total
   
Investment
   
total
   
Investment
   
total
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
Less than 70%
  $ 22,912       4.6  
%
  $ 27,550       5.5 %   $ 77,159       15.4 %   $ 223,502       44.7 %   $ 351,123       70.2 %
70% to 80%
    17,489       3.5         17,235       3.4       28,404       5.7       67,351       13.5       130,479       26.1  
More than 80%
    16,554       3.3         888       0.2       1,175       0.2       234       0.0       18,851       3.7  
    $ 56,955       11.4  
%
  $ 45,673       9.1 %   $ 106,738       21.3 %   $ 291,087       58.2 %   $ 500,453       100.0 %
                                                                                   
Weighted average LTV ratio
    59%    
 
                                                                   
Weighted average credit score
    741                                                                                

 
22

 
                                                               
                                                               
Consumer - Home Equity
 
Credit Score
 
   
Less than 660
   
661 to 700
 
701 to 750
 
751 and above
 
Total
 
   
Recorded
   
% of
     
Recorded
   
% of
   
Recorded
   
% of
   
Recorded
   
% of
   
Recorded
   
% of
 
LTV ratio                                                          
 
Investment
   
total
     
Investment
   
total
   
Investment
   
total
   
Investment
   
total
   
Investment
   
total
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
Less than 70%
  $ 15,575       9.2  
%
  $ 13,549       8.0 %   $ 32,256       19.1 %   $ 105,871       62.6 %   $ 167,251       98.9 %
70% to 80%
    163       0.1         122       0.1       124       0.1       665       0.4       1,074       0.7  
More than 80%
    195       0.1         17       0.0       241       0.1       372       0.2       825       0.4  
    $ 15,933       9.4  
%
  $ 13,688       8.1 %   $ 32,621       19.3 %   $ 106,908       63.2 %   $ 169,150       100.0 %
                                                                                   
Weighted average LTV ratio
    19%    
 
                                                                   
Weighted average credit score
    743                                                                                




 
23

 


Impaired loans - Impaired loans are defined as non-accrual loans, loans classified as substandard, loans with SVAs, and TDRs that have not yet performed under the restructured terms for 12 consecutive months or are required by the accounting literature to be classified as such for the life of the loan.  Substantially all of the impaired loans at March 31, 2011 were secured by residential real estate.  Impaired loans related to residential real estate are individually evaluated to ensure that the carrying value of the loan is not in excess of the fair value of the collateral, less estimated selling costs.  Fair values of residential real estate are estimated through such methods as current appraisals, AVMs, BPOs, or listing prices.  Fair values may be adjusted by management to reflect current economic and market conditions.  If the outstanding loan balance is in excess of the estimated fair value determined by management, less estimated costs to sell, then a specific valuation allowance is recorded for the difference.  The following is a summary of information pertaining to impaired loans by class at March 31, 2011.
 
 
                       
Current
   
Fiscal
   
Current
   
Fiscal
 
                       
Quarter
   
Year-to-Date
   
Quarter
   
Year-to-Date
 
           
Unpaid
         
Average
   
Average
   
Interest
   
Interest
 
     
Recorded
   
Principal
   
Related
   
Recorded
   
Recorded
   
Income
   
Income
 
     
Investment
   
Balance
   
ACL
   
Investment
   
Investment
   
Recognized
   
Recognized
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
With no related allowance recorded
     
 
One- to four-family - originated                                           
  $ 35,602     $ 35,674     $ --     $ 35,049     $ 33,351     $ 318     $ 632  
 
One- to four-family - purchased
    7,866       7,843       --       8,073       8,041       18       45  
 
Multi-family and commercial
    581       583       --       584       585       9       18  
 
Consumer - home equity
    654       654       --       728       782       6       11  
 
Consumer - other
    63       63       --       63       56       --       1  
        44,766       44,817       --       44,497       42,815       351       707  
                                                           
With an allowance recorded
                                                       
 
One- to four-family - originated
    2,474       2,474       212       1,991       1,813       11       31  
 
One- to four-family - purchased
    12,943       12,853       2,894       14,053       14,778       48       94  
 
Multi-family and commercial
    --       --       --       --       --       --       --  
 
Consumer - home equity
    71       71       71       42       35       --       1  
 
Consumer - other
    --       --       --       --       --       --       --  
        15,488       15,398       3,177       16,086       16,626       59       126  
                                                           
Total
                                                         
 
One- to four-family - originated
    38,076       38,148       212       37,040       35,164       329       663  
 
One- to four-family - purchased
    20,809       20,696       2,894       22,126       22,819       66       139  
 
Multi-family and commercial
    581       583       --       584       585       9       18  
 
Consumer - home equity
    725       725       71       770       817       6       12  
 
Consumer - other
    63       63       --       63       56       --       1  
      $ 60,254     $ 60,215     $ 3,177     $ 60,583     $ 59,441     $ 410     $ 833  
 
 
24

 
 
Allowance for credit losses - The following is a summary of the activity in the ACL by segment for the three and six months ended March 31, 2011 and the ending balance of the ACL at March 31, 2011, based on the Company’s impairment methodology.


   
One- to Four-
   
One- to Four-
   
One- to Four-
   
Multi-family
             
   
Family -
   
Family -
   
Family -
   
and
             
   
Originated
   
Purchased
   
Total
   
Commercial
   
Consumer
   
Total
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
Year-to-Date
                                   
Beginning balance
  $ 3,813     $ 10,425     $ 14,238     $ 275     $ 379     $ 14,892  
   Charge-offs
    (167 )     (1,980 )     (2,147 )     --       (101 )     (2,248 )
   Recoveries
    --       --       --       --       --       --  
   Provision (recovery) for credit losses
    570       592       1,162       (7 )     15       1,170  
Ending balance
  $ 4,216     $ 9,037     $ 13,253     $ 268     $ 293     $ 13,814  
                                                 
Ratio of net charge-offs to average loans
                                               
      outstanding year-to-date
                                            0.04 %
                                                 
Ratio of net charge-offs year-to-date
                                               
      to average non-performing assets
                                            5.44 %


 
25

 



   
One- to Four-
   
One- to Four-
   
One- to Four-
   
Multi-family
             
   
Family -
   
Family -
   
Family -
   
and
             
   
Originated
   
Purchased
   
Total
   
Commercial
   
Consumer
   
Total
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
Quarter-to-Date
                                   
Beginning balance
  $ 3,610     $ 10,438     $ 14,048     $ 269     $ 406     $ 14,723  
   Charge-offs
    (94 )     (1,322 )     (1,416 )     --       (13 )     (1,429 )
   Recoveries
    --       --       --       --       --       --  
   Provision (recovery) for credit losses
    700       (79 )     621       (1 )     (100 )     520  
Ending balance
  $ 4,216     $ 9,037     $ 13,253     $ 268     $ 293     $ 13,814  
                                                 
Ratio of net charge-offs to average loans
                                               
      outstanding during the quarter
                                            0.03 %
                                                 
Ratio of net charge-offs during the quarter
                                               
      to average non-performing assets
                                            3.45 %
                                                 
                                                 
ACL for loans collectively
                                               
   evaluated for impairment
  $ 4,004     $ 6,143     $ 10,147     $ 268     $ 222     $ 10,637  
ACL for loans individually
                                               
   evaluated for impairment
  $ 212     $ 2,894     $ 3,106     $ --     $ 71     $ 3,177  

 
26

 


The following is a summary of the loan portfolio at March 31, 2011 by loan portfolio segment disaggregated by the Company’s impairment method.

   
One- to Four-
   
One- to Four-
   
One- to Four-
   
Multi-family
             
   
Family -
   
Family -
   
Family -
   
and
             
   
Originated
   
Purchased
   
Total
   
Commercial
   
Consumer
   
Total
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
       
Recorded investment of loans
                                   
     collectively evaluated for impairment         
  $ 4,334,143     $ 479,644     $ 4,813,787     $ 61,094     $ 175,294     $ 5,050,175  
                                                 
Recorded investment of loans
                                               
     individually evaluated for impairment
    38,076       20,809       58,885       581       788       60,254  
                                                 
    $ 4,372,219     $ 500,453     $ 4,872,672     $ 61,675     $ 176,082     $ 5,110,429  


As noted above, the Bank has a loan concentration in residential first mortgage loans.  Continued declines in residential real estate values could adversely impact the property used as collateral for the Bank’s loans.  Adverse changes in the economic conditions and increasing unemployment rates may have a negative effect on the ability of the Bank’s borrowers to make timely loan payments, which would likely increase delinquencies and have an adverse impact on the Bank’s earnings.  Further increases in delinquencies will decrease interest income on loans receivable and will likely adversely impact the Bank’s loan loss experience, resulting in an increase in the Bank’s ACL and provision for credit losses.  Although management believes the ACL was at an adequate level to absorb known and inherent losses in the loan portfolio at March 31, 2011, the level of the ACL remains an estimate that is subject to significant judgment and short-term changes.  Additions to the ACL may be necessary if future economic and other conditions differ substantially from the current environment.


 
27

 


5.  Fair Value of Financial Instruments

Fair Value Measurements - ASC 820, Fair Value Measurements and Disclosures , defines fair value, establishes a framework for measuring fair value, and expands disclosures about fair value measurements.  ASC 820 applies only to fair value measurements already required or permitted by other accounting standards and does not impose requirements for additional fair value measures.  ASC 820 was issued to increase consistency and comparability in reporting fair values.
 
The Company uses fair value measurements to record fair value adjustments to certain assets and to determine fair value disclosures.  The Company did not have any liabilities that were measured at fair value at March 31, 2011 and September 30, 2010.  The Company’s AFS securities are recorded at fair value on a recurring basis.  Additionally, from time to time, the Company may be required to record at fair value other assets or liabilities on a non-recurring basis, such as REO, LHFS, and impaired loans.  These non-recurring fair value adjustments involve the application of lower-of-cost-or-fair value accounting or write-downs of individual assets.
 
In accordance with ASC 820, the Company groups its assets at fair value in three levels, based on the markets in which the assets are traded and the reliability of the assumptions used to determine fair value. These levels are:

 
Level 1 — Valuation is based upon quoted prices for identical instruments traded in active markets.
 
   
 
Level 2 — Valuation is based upon quoted prices for similar instruments in active markets, quoted prices for identical or similar instruments in markets that are not active, and model-based valuation techniques for which all significant assumptions are observable in the market.
 
   
 
Level 3 — Valuation is generated from model-based techniques that use significant assumptions not observable in the market. These unobservable assumptions reflect the Company’s own estimates of assumptions that market participants would use in pricing the asset or liability. Valuation techniques include the use of option pricing models, discounted cash flow models, and similar techniques. The results cannot be determined with precision and may not be realized in an actual sale or immediate settlement of the asset or liability.
 
The Company bases its fair values on the price that would be received to sell an asset in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date.  As required by ASC 820, the Company maximizes the use of observable inputs and minimizes the use of unobservable inputs when measuring fair value.

The following is a description of valuation methodologies used for assets measured at fair value on a recurring basis.

AFS Securities - The Company’s AFS securities portfolio is carried at estimated fair value, with any unrealized gains and losses, net of taxes, reported as accumulated other comprehensive income/loss in stockholders' equity.  The Company’s major security types based on the nature and risks of the securities are included in the table below.  The majority of the securities within the AFS portfolio are issued by U.S. government sponsored enterprises.  The fair values for all AFS securities are based on quoted prices for similar securities.  Various modeling techniques are used to determine pricing for the Company’s securities, including option pricing and discounted cash flow models. The inputs to these models may include benchmark yields, reported trades, broker/dealer quotes, issuer spreads, benchmark securities, bids, offers and reference data.  There are some AFS securities in the AFS portfolio that have significant unobservable inputs requiring the independent pricing services to use some judgment in pricing the related securities.  These AFS securities are classified as Level 3.  All other AFS securities are classified as Level 2.

 
28

 
The following table provides the level of valuation assumption used to determine the carrying value of the Company’s assets measured at fair value on a recurring basis, which consists of AFS securities, at March 31, 2011 and September 30, 2010.

   
March 31, 2011
 
         
Quoted Prices
   
Significant
   
Significant
 
         
in Active Markets
   
Other Observable
   
Unobservable
 
   
Carrying
   
for Identical Assets
   
Inputs
   
Inputs
 
   
Value
   
(Level 1)
   
(Level 2)
   
(Level 3) (1)
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
                         
  GSE debentures
  $ 404,959     $ --     $ 404,959     $ --  
  Municipal bonds
    2,753       --       2,753       --  
  Trust preferred securities
    2,779       --       --       2,779  
  MBS
    839,662       --       839,662       --  
  
  $ 1,250,153     $ --     $ 1,247,374     $ 2,779  
                                 
                                 
                                 
   
September 30, 2010
 
           
Quoted Prices
   
Significant
   
Significant
 
           
in Active Markets
   
Other Observable
   
Unobservable
 
   
Carrying
   
for Identical Assets
   
Inputs
   
Inputs
 
   
Value
   
(Level 1)
   
(Level 2)
   
(Level 3) (2)
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
                                 
  GSE debentures
  $ 50,255     $ --     $ 50,255     $ --  
  Municipal bonds
    2,819       --       2,819       --  
  Trust preferred securities
    2,796       --       --       2,796  
  MBS
    1,004,496       --       1,004,496       --  
  
  $ 1,060,366     $ --     $ 1,057,570     $ 2,796  


(1)  
The Company’s Level 3 AFS security has had no activity since September 30, 2010, except for principal repayments and changes in net unrealized losses recognized in other comprehensive income.  Principal repayments and increases in net unrealized losses included in other comprehensive income for the three months ended March 31, 2011 were $18 thousand and $3 thousand, respectively.  Principal repayments and decreases in net unrealized losses included in other comprehensive income for the six months ended March 31, 2011 were $35 thousand and $3 thousand, respectively. 
(2)  
The Company’s Level 3 AFS security had no activity during fiscal year 2010, except for principal repayments of $93 thousand and reductions in net unrealized losses recognized in other comprehensive income.  Reductions of net unrealized losses included in other comprehensive income for the year ended September 30, 2010 were $460 thousand.

The following is a description of valuation methodologies used for significant assets measured at fair value on a non-recurring basis.

Loans Receivable - Loans which meet certain criteria are evaluated individually for impairment. A loan is considered impaired when, based upon current information and events, it is probable the Bank will be unable to collect all amounts due, including principal and interest, according to the contractual terms of the loan agreement.  Impaired loans at March 31, 2011 and September 30, 2010 were $60.2 million and $57.1 million, respectively. Substantially all of the Bank’s impaired loans at March 31, 2011 and September 30, 2010 were secured by residential real estate.  These impaired loans are individually assessed to ensure that the carrying value of the loan is not in excess of the fair value of the collateral, less estimated selling costs. Fair value is estimated through current appraisals, AVMs, BPOs, or listing prices.  Fair values may be adjusted by management to reflect current economic and market conditions and, as such, are classified as Level 3. Based on this evaluation, the Company maintained an ACL of $3.2 million and $4.3 million at March 31, 2011 and September 30, 2010, respectively, for such impaired loans.

REO , net - REO represents real estate acquired as a result of foreclosure or by deed in lieu of foreclosure and is carried at lower-of-cost or fair value.  Fair value is estimated through current appraisals, AVMs, BPOs, or listing prices.  As these properties are actively marketed, estimated fair values may be adjusted by management to reflect current economic and market conditions and, as such, are classified as Level 3.  The fair value of REO at March 31, 2011 and September 30, 2010 was $11.3 million and $9.9 million, respectively.

 
29

 
The following table provides the level of valuation assumption used to determine the carrying value of the Company’s assets measured at fair value on a non-recurring basis at March 31, 2011 and September 30, 2010.

   
March 31, 2011
 
         
Quoted Prices
   
Significant
   
Significant
 
         
in Active Markets
   
Other Observable
   
Unobservable
 
   
Carrying
   
for Identical Assets
   
Inputs
   
Inputs
 
   
Value
   
(Level 1)
   
(Level 2)
   
(Level 3)
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
                         
Impaired loans
  $ 60,215     $ --     $ --     $ 60,215  
REO, net
    11,337       --       --       11,337  
  
  $ 71,552     $ --     $ --     $ 71,552  
                                 
   
September 30, 2010
 
           
Quoted Prices
   
Significant
   
Significant
 
           
in Active Markets
   
Other Observable
   
Unobservable
 
 
 
Carrying
   
for Identical Assets
   
Inputs
   
Inputs
 
   
Value
   
(Level 1)
   
(Level 2)
   
(Level 3)
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
                                 
Impaired loans
  $ 57,118     $ --     $ --     $ 57,118  
REO, net
    9,920       --       --       9,920  
  
  $ 67,038     $ --     $ --     $ 67,038  


Fair Value Disclosures - The Company determined estimated fair value amounts using available market information and a selection from a variety of valuation methodologies. However, considerable judgment is required to interpret market data to develop the estimates of fair value. Accordingly, the estimates presented are not necessarily indicative of the amount the Company could realize in a current market exchange. The use of different market assumptions and estimation methodologies may have a material effect on the estimated fair value amounts.  The fair value estimates presented herein are based on pertinent information available to management as of March 31, 2011 and September 30, 2010. Although management is not aware of any factors that would significantly affect the estimated fair value amounts, such amounts have not been comprehensively revalued for purposes of these financial statements since those dates.

 
30

 
The estimated fair values of the Company’s financial instruments as of March 31, 2011 and September 30, 2010 were as follows.
   
March 31, 2011
   
September 30, 2010
 
         
Estimated
         
Estimated
 
   
Carrying
   
Fair
   
Carrying
   
Fair
 
   
Amount
   
Value
   
Amount
   
Value
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
Assets:
                       
  Cash and cash equivalents
  $ 122,002     $ 122,002     $ 65,217     $ 65,217  
  AFS securities
    1,250,153       1,250,153       1,060,366       1,060,366  
  HTM securities
    2,953,661       2,966,745       1,880,154       1,913,454  
  Loans receivable
    5,096,615       5,288,079       5,168,202       5,392,550  
  BOLI
    55,546       55,546       54,710       54,710  
  Capital stock of FHLB
    122,651       122,651       120,866       120,866  
Liabilities:
                               
  Deposits
    4,711,189       4,757,480       4,386,310       4,459,052  
  Advances from FHLB
    2,351,863       2,487,737       2,348,371       2,557,064  
  Other borrowings
    643,609       667,264       668,609       701,099  

The following methods and assumptions were used to estimate the fair value of the financial instruments:

Cash and Cash Equivalents - The carrying amounts of cash and cash equivalents are considered to approximate their fair value due to the nature of the financial asset.

AFS and HTM Securities - Estimated fair values of securities are based on one of three methods:  1) quoted market prices where available, 2) quoted market prices for similar instruments if quoted market prices are not available, 3) unobservable data that represents the Bank’s assumptions about items that market participants would consider in determining fair value where no market data is available.  AFS securities are carried at estimated fair value.  HTM securities are carried at amortized cost.

Loans Receivable - Fair values are estimated for portfolios with similar financial characteristics.  Loans are segregated by type, such as one- to four-family residential mortgages, multi-family residential mortgages, nonresidential, and installment loans.  Each loan category is further segmented into fixed- and adjustable interest rate categories.  Market pricing sources are used to approximate the estimated fair value of fixed- and adjustable-rate one- to four-family residential mortgages.  For all other loan categories, future cash flows are discounted using the LIBOR curve plus a margin at which similar loans would be made to borrowers with similar credit ratings and for the same remaining maturity.

BOLI   -   The carrying value of BOLI is considered to approximate its fair value due to the nature of the financial asset.

Capital Stock of FHLB - The carrying value of FHLB stock equals cost.  The fair value is based on redemption at par value.

Deposits - The estimated fair value of demand deposits, savings and money market accounts is the amount payable on demand at the reporting date. The estimated fair value of fixed-maturity certificates of deposit is estimated by discounting the future cash flows using a margin to the LIBOR curve.

Advances from FHLB - The estimated fair value of advances from FHLB is determined by discounting the future cash flows of each advance using a margin to the LIBOR curve.

Other Borrowings - Other borrowings consists of repurchase agreements and Junior Subordinated Deferrable Interest Debentures (“the Debentures”).   The estimated fair value of the repurchase agreements is determined by discounting the future cash flows of each agreement using a margin to the LIBOR curve.  The Debentures have a variable rate structure, with the ability to redeem at par; therefore, the carrying value of the Debentures approximates their estimated fair value.

 
31

 
6.   Employee Stock Ownership Plan

The ESOP Trust acquired 4,726,000 shares of common stock in the Company’s corporate reorganization, with proceeds from a loan from the Company.  The Bank has agreed to make contributions to the ESOP on an annual basis sufficient to enable the ESOP to make the required annual loan payments to the Company on September 30 of each year.

The loan referenced above bears interest at a fixed-rate of 3.25% and has a 30 year term.  The first three years of the loan are interest-only, with the first interest payment of $1.2 million payable on September 30, 2011 and the next two interest payments of $1.5 million each being payable on September 30, 2012 and 2013.  Beginning in fiscal year 2014, principal and interest payments of $2.7 million will be payable annually.  The loan is secured by the shares of Company stock purchased during the stock offering in December 2010.

As the annual loan payments are made, shares will be released from collateral annually at September 30 and allocated to qualified employees based on the proportion of their qualifying compensation to total qualifying compensation.  74,574 shares will be released from collateral on September 30, 2011, and 95,540 shares will be released from collateral on September 30, 2012 and 2013.  These shares will be allocated to qualified employees based on the proportion of their qualifying compensation to total qualifying compensation.  As ESOP shares are committed to be released from collateral, the Company records compensation expense.  Dividends on unallocated ESOP shares are applied to the ESOP’s current year debt service payment.  Dividends on unallocated ESOP shares in excess of the debt service payment are recorded as compensation expense and distributed to participants or participants' ESOP accounts.

The loan for the existing ESOP shares acquired in the initial public offering in 1999 bears interest at a fixed-rate of 5.80%, with future principal and interest payable annually in three remaining fixed installments of $3.0 million, as of March 31, 2011.  This loan is also secured by the shares of Company stock originally purchased in the initial public offering.  This loan matures on September 30, 2013.

  7.   Subsequent Events

In preparing these financial statements, management has evaluated events occurring subsequent to March 31, 2011, for potential recognition and disclosure.  There have been no material events or transactions which would require adjustments to the consolidated financial statements at March 31, 2011.  In April 2011, the Company repaid the outstanding Debentures of $53.6 million using a portion of the offering proceeds from the corporate reorganization.





 
32

 


Item 2.   Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations

The Company and its wholly-owned subsidiary may from time to time make written or oral “forward-looking statements,” including statements contained in documents filed or furnished by the Company with the SEC.  These forward-looking statements may be included in this Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q and the exhibits attached to it, in the Company’s reports to stockholders, in the Company’s press releases, and in other communications by the Company, which are made in good faith by us pursuant to the “safe harbor” provisions of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995.

These forward-looking statements include statements about our beliefs, plans, objectives, goals, expectations, anticipations, estimates and intentions, that are subject to significant risks and uncertainties, and are subject to change based on various factors, some of which are beyond our control.  The words “may,” “could,” “should,” “would,” “believe,” “anticipate,” “estimate,” “expect,” “intend,” “plan” and similar expressions are intended to identify forward-looking statements. The following factors, among others, could cause our future results to differ materially from the plans, objectives, goals, expectations, anticipations, estimates and intentions expressed in the forward-looking statements:

·  
our ability to continue to maintain overhead costs at reasonable levels;
·  
our ability to continue to originate a significant volume of one- to four-family mortgage loans in our market areas;
·  
our ability to acquire funds from or invest funds in wholesale or secondary markets;
·  
the future earnings and capital levels of the Bank and the continued non-objection by our primary federal banking regulator, to the extent required, to distribute capital from the Bank to the Company, which could affect the ability of the Company to pay dividends in accordance with its dividend policies;
·  
fluctuations in deposit flows, loan demand, and/or real estate values, as well as unemployment levels, which may adversely affect our business;
·  
the credit risks of lending and investing activities, including changes in the level and direction of loan delinquencies and write-offs, changes in property values, and changes in estimates of the adequacy of the ACL;
·  
results of examinations of the Bank by its primary federal banking regulator, including the possibility that the regulator may, among other things, require the Bank to increase its ACL;
·  
the strength of the U.S. economy in general and the strength of the local economies in which we conduct operations;
·  
the effects of, and changes in, trade, monetary and fiscal policies and laws, including interest rate policies of the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System;
·  
the effects of, and changes in, foreign and military policies of the United States government;
·  
inflation, interest rate, market and monetary fluctuations;
·  
our ability to access cost-effective funding;
·  
the timely development and acceptance of our new products and services and the perceived overall value of these products and services by users, including the features, pricing and quality compared to competitors’ products and services;
·  
the willingness of users to substitute competitors’ products and services for our products and services;
·  
our success in gaining regulatory approval of our products and services and branching locations, when required;
·  
the impact of changes in financial services laws and regulations, including laws concerning taxes, banking securities and insurance and the impact of other governmental initiatives affecting the financial services industry;
·  
implementing business initiatives may be more difficult or expensive than anticipated;
·  
technological changes;
·  
acquisitions and dispositions;
·  
changes in consumer spending and saving habits; and
·  
our success at managing the risks involved in our business.
 

This list of important factors is not all inclusive.  We do not undertake to update any forward-looking statement, whether written or oral, that may be made from time to time by or on behalf of the Company or the Bank.

As used in this Form 10-Q, unless we specify otherwise, “the Company,” “we,” “us,” and “our” refer to Capitol Federal Financial, Inc., a Maryland corporation, and its predecessor, Capitol Federal Financial, a United States corporation. “Capitol Federal Savings,” and “the Bank,” refer to Capitol Federal Savings Bank, a federal savings bank and the wholly-owned subsidiary of Capitol Federal Financial, Inc.

 
33

 
The following discussion and analysis is intended to assist in understanding the financial condition and results of operations of the Company.  It should be read in conjunction with the consolidated financial statements and notes presented in this report.  The discussion includes comments relating to the Bank, since the Bank is wholly-owned by the Company and comprises the majority of its assets and is the principal source of income for the Company.  This discussion and analysis should be read in conjunction with management’s discussion and analysis included in the Company’s 2010 Annual Report on Form 10-K filed with the SEC.


Executive Summary

The following summary should be read in conjunction with our Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations in its entirety.

In December 2010, Capitol Federal Financial completed its conversion from a mutual holding company form of organization to a stock form of organization.  Capitol Federal Financial, which owned 100% of the Bank, was succeeded by Capitol Federal Financial, Inc, a new Maryland corporation.  As part of the corporate reorganization, MHC’s ownership interest of Capitol Federal Financial was sold in a public stock offering.  Capitol Federal Financial, Inc. sold 118,150,000 shares of common stock at $10.00 per share in the stock offering.  The publicly held shares of Capitol Federal Financial were exchanged for new shares of common stock of Capitol Federal Financial, Inc.  The exchange ratio was 2.2637 and ensured that immediately after the corporate reorganization the public stockholders of Capitol Federal Financial owned the same aggregate percentage of Capitol Federal Financial, Inc. common stock that they owned of Capitol Federal Financial common stock immediately prior to that time.  In lieu of fractional shares, Capitol Federal Financial stockholders were paid in cash.  The net proceeds from the stock offering were $1.13 billion, of which 50%, or $567.4 million, was contributed to the Bank as a capital contribution, as required by OTS regulations.  The other 50%, or $567.4 million, remained at Capitol Federal Financial, Inc., of which $40.0 million was contributed to the Bank’s charitable foundation, Capitol Federal Foundation, and $47.3 million was loaned to the Bank’s ESOP for its purchase of Capitol Federal Financial, Inc. shares in the stock offering.

We have been, and intend to continue to be, a community-oriented financial institution offering a variety of financial services to meet the needs of the communities we serve.  We attract retail deposits from the general public and invest those funds primarily in permanent loans secured by first mortgages on owner-occupied, one- to four-family residences.  To a much lesser extent, we also originate consumer loans, loans secured by first mortgages on non-owner-occupied one- to four-family residences, multi-family and commercial real estate loans, and construction loans.  While our primary business is the origination of one- to four-family mortgage loans funded through retail deposits, we also purchase whole one- to four-family mortgage loans from correspondent lenders located within our market areas and select market areas in Missouri and from nationwide lenders, and invest in certain investment and MBS funded through retail deposits, advances from FHLB, and repurchase agreements.  The Company is significantly affected by prevailing economic conditions including federal monetary and fiscal policies and federal regulation of financial institutions.  Deposit balances are influenced by a number of factors including interest rates paid on competing personal investment products, the level of personal income, and the personal rate of savings within our market areas.  Lending activities are influenced by the demand for housing and other loans, changing loan underwriting guidelines, as well as interest rate pricing competition from other lending institutions.  The primary sources of funds for lending activities include deposits, loan repayments, investment income, borrowings, and funds provided from operations.
 
The Company’s results of operations are primarily dependent on net interest income, which is the difference between the interest earned on loans, MBS, investment securities and cash, and the interest paid on deposits and borrowings.  On a weekly basis, management reviews deposit flows, loan demand, cash levels, and changes in several market rates to assess all pricing strategies.  We generally price our loan and deposit products based upon an analysis of our competition and changes in market rates.  The Bank generally prices its first mortgage loan products based on secondary market and competitor pricing.  Generally, deposit pricing is based upon a survey of competitors in the Bank’s market areas, and the need to attract funding and retain maturing deposits.  The majority of our loans are fixed-rate products with maturities up to 30 years, while the majority of our deposits have maturity or repricing dates of less than two years.
 
The Federal Open Market Committee of the Federal Reserve (the “FOMC”) noted in their March 2011 meeting that the economic recovery is on firmer footing and the overall conditions in the labor market appear to be improving.  Household spending and business investment continue to expand; however, the housing sector continues to be depressed.  The FOMC continued to maintain the target range for federal funds rate at zero and 25 basis points.  This has been the range since December 2008.  Additionally, to promote a stronger pace of economic recovery and to help ensure that inflation, over time, is at levels consistent with the FOMC’s mandate to foster maximum employment and price stability, the FOMC continued to expand its holdings of securities per the quantitative easing plan first announced in November 2010.  As of March 31, 2011, the Federal Reserve had purchased $488 billion of the $600 billion of treasury securities committed to in November 2010.  By doing this, the Federal Reserve has effectively increased the amount of excess reserves in the banking system, which is intended to reduce long-term interest rates and increase liquidity in an effort to stimulate borrowing and investment.
 
34

 
 
The historically low interest rate environment during the past two fiscal years and through the first two quarters of fiscal year 2011 has spurred an increased demand for our loan modification program and mortgage refinances.  Modification and refinance activity in fiscal year 2011 has already exceeded that of fiscal year 2010, with the majority of the activity occurring in the first quarter of fiscal year 2011 when mortgage rates were lower than current rates.  Our loan modification program allows existing loan customers, whose loans have not been sold to third parties and who have been current on their contractual loan payments for the previous 12 months, the opportunity to modify, for a fee, their original loan terms to current loan terms being offered.  During the first six months of fiscal year 2011, the Bank modified $584.1 million of originated loans, with a weighted average rate decrease of 98 basis points, compared to $545.1 million for fiscal year 2010 in its entirety, with a weighted average rate decrease of 87 basis points.  Additionally, the Bank refinanced $220.0 million of its customers’ loans during the first six months of fiscal year 2011, compared to $153.6 million for fiscal year 2010 in its entirety.
 
Total assets increased $1.24 billion, from $8.49 billion at September 30, 2010 to $9.73 billion at March 31, 2011, due primarily to the proceeds from the corporate reorganization completed in December 2010.  The increase in assets was primarily a result of an increase in securities, the majority of which were purchased with proceeds from the stock offering.  Capitol Federal Financial, Inc., at the holding company level, used the net stock offering proceeds to purchase short-term securities during the current quarter.  The securities have laddered maturities in order to provide cash flows that can be used to repurchase stock, when allowed by federal banking regulations, or that can be reinvested into higher yielding assets if interest rates rise.  The yields on these securities are less than the yields on the Bank’s current investment portfolio due to the lower interest rate environment and the short-term nature of the securities.  The net stock offering proceeds received by the Bank were primarily used to purchase securities according to the Bank’s current investment strategy.  The intent of the Bank’s investment portfolio is to create a steady stream of cash flows that can be redeployed into other assets as the Bank grows the loan portfolio or reinvested into higher yielding assets should interest rates rise.  These securities have a lower interest rate risk profile than the Bank’s long-term fixed-rate mortgage portfolio and were purchased to help shorten the overall duration of the Bank’s total assets.  

The balance of loans 30 to 89 days delinquent decreased $1.7 million from $24.7 million at September 30, 2010 to $23.0 million at March 31, 2011.  Non-performing loans decreased $2.5 million from $32.0 million at September 30, 2010 to $29.5 million at March 31, 2011.  The balance of 30 to 89 days delinquent loans and non-performing loans continues to remain at historically high levels due to the continued elevated level of unemployment coupled with the decline in real estate activity and values, particularly in some of the states in which we have purchased loans.  Our ratio of non-performing loans to total loans decreased from 0.62% at September 30, 2010 to 0.58% at March 31, 2011.  Our ratio of non-performing assets to total assets decreased from 0.49% at September 30, 2010 to 0.42% at March 31, 2011. 

Total liabilities increased $281.5 million from $7.53 billion at September 30, 2010 to $7.81 billion at March 31, 2011, due primarily to an increase in deposits of $324.9 million.  The increase in deposits was primarily in the certificate of deposit and money market portfolios. 

The Company reported net income of $15.6 million for the quarter ended March 31, 2011, compared to net income of $14.7 million for the quarter ended March 31, 2010.  The $981 thousand increase in net income was due primarily to a decrease in the provision for credit losses of $2.7 million, partially offset by a $2.1 million decrease in net interest income.  The Bank recorded a provision for credit losses of $520 thousand during the current quarter primarily due to the increase/establishment of SVAs on primarily purchased loans, compared to a $3.2 million provision for credit losses for the quarter ended March 31, 2010.  Net interest income for the quarter ended March 31, 2011 was $40.6 million compared to $42.7 million in the same quarter of the prior fiscal year.  The $2.1 million decrease was primarily a result of an $8.8 million decrease in loans receivable interest income, partially offset by a $3.7 million decrease in deposit interest expense and a $2.3 million decrease in interest expense on FHLB advances.

 
35

 
Net income for the six months ended March 31, 2011 was $4.4 million, compared to $35.6 million for the same period in the prior fiscal year.  The $31.2 million decrease in the current period was due primarily to the $40.0 million ($26.0 million, net of income tax benefit) contribution to the Foundation in connection with the corporate reorganization.  Additionally, other income decreased $7.2 million and net interest income decreased $6.9 million between periods.  These decreases were partially offset by an $18.1 million decrease in income tax expense and a $5.1 million decrease in provision for credit losses between periods.  The decrease in other income was primarily a result of a $6.5 million gain on the sale of trading MBS in conjunction with a loan swap transaction during the prior fiscal year.  Net interest income for the six months ended March 31, 2011 was $80.6 million compared to $87.5 million for the six months ended March 31, 2010.  The $6.9 million decrease was primarily a result of a $17.3 million decrease in loans receivable interest income and a $6.6 million decrease in MBS interest income, partially offset by an $8.4 million decrease in deposit interest expense and a $4.0 million decrease in FHLB advance interest expense.  The $5.1 million decrease in the provision is related primarily to the increase in certain loss factors in the general valuation allowance model in the prior year with no similar adjustments in the current fiscal year. 

Currently, the Bank has no plans to open any branches in our market areas during fiscal year 2011.  We have a branch scheduled to open in early fiscal year 2012 in our Kansas City market area.  Management continues to consider expansion opportunities in all of our market areas.
 
Available Information

Financial and other Company information, including press releases, Annual Reports on Form 10-K, Quarterly Reports on Form 10-Q, Current Reports on Form 8-K, and all amendments to those reports can be obtained free of charge from our investor relations website, http://ir.capfed.com.  SEC filings are available on our website immediately after they are electronically filed with or furnished to the SEC, and are also available on the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov.


Critical Accounting Policies

Our most critical accounting policies are the methodologies used to determine the ACL, other-than-temporary declines in the value of securities, and fair value measurements.  These policies are important to the presentation of our financial condition and results of operations, involve a high degree of complexity, and require management to make difficult and subjective judgments that may require assumptions or estimates about highly uncertain matters.  The use of different judgments, assumptions, and estimates could cause reported results to differ materially.  These critical accounting policies and their application are reviewed at least annually by our audit committee.  For a full discussion of our critical accounting policies, see Item 7 - “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations – Critical Accounting Policies” in the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended September 30, 2010.
 
 


 
36

 


Financial Condition

Total assets increased $1.24 billion, from $8.49 billion at September 30, 2010 to $9.73 billion at March 31, 2011, due primarily to proceeds received from the Company’s stock offering in December 2010, which were used to purchase securities.

Total liabilities increased $281.5 million from $7.53 billion at September 30, 2010 to $7.81 billion at March 31, 2011, due primarily to an increase in deposits of $324.9 million.  The increase in deposits was primarily in the certificate of deposit and money market portfolios. 

   
Balance at
 
   
March 31,
   
December 31,
   
September 30,
   
June 30,
   
March 31,
 
   
2011
   
2010
   
2010
   
2010
   
2010
 
   
(Dollars in thousands, except per share amounts)
 
                               
Total assets
  $ 9,733,111     $ 9,798,294     $ 8,487,130     $ 8,543,357     $ 8,485,465  
Cash and cash equivalents
    122,002       1,329,861       65,217       75,886       60,735  
AFS securities
    1,250,153       923,125       1,060,366       1,163,416       1,354,884  
HTM securities
    2,953,661       2,119,826       1,880,154       1,660,271       1,372,857  
Loans receivable, net
    5,096,615       5,121,018       5,168,202       5,316,172       5,380,852  
Capital stock of FHLB
    122,651       121,768       120,866       136,055       135,050  
Deposits
    4,711,189       4,682,101       4,386,310       4,373,844       4,319,066  
Advances from FHLB
    2,351,863       2,350,126       2,348,371       2,396,637       2,395,842  
Other borrowings
    643,609       668,609       668,609       713,609       713,609  
Stockholders' equity
    1,926,409       2,018,973       961,950       960,000       946,073  
Equity to total assets at end of period
    19.8 %     20.6 %     11.3 %     11.2 %     11.1 %
Bank tangible equity ratio (1)
    14.7 %     13.9 %     9.8 %     9.7 %     10.0 %
Book value per share (2)
  $ 11.92     $ 12.50     $ 13.11     $ 13.09     $ 12.91  

(1)  
See tangible equity to GAAP equity reconciliation in “Liquidity and Capital Resources – Regulatory Capital.”
(2)  
Book value per share is calculated using end of period shares outstanding, less unallocated ESOP shares and unvested RRP shares.

 
Loans Receivable.   The loans receivable portfolio decreased $71.6 million from $5.17 billion at September 30, 2010 to $5.10 billion at March 31, 2011.  The portfolio decreased $24.4 million from December 31, 2010 to March 31, 2011.  The decrease in the loan portfolio reflects the elevated levels of loan repayments as a result of refinancing activity due to low market interest rates, and strong competition for high quality loans, as well as weak loan demand due to the slow economic recovery, and increased REO inventory.  The balance of our originated, nationwide purchased, and correspondent one- to four-family loan portfolios at March 31, 2011 was $3.99 billion, $499.5 million and $373.4 million, respectively, compared to $3.95 billion, $564.9 million and $397.2 million, respectively, at September 30, 2010.  As of March 31, 2011, the average balance of a one-to four-family originated loan was approximately $120 thousand, the average balance of a one- to four-family purchased nationwide loan was approximately $330 thousand, and the average balance of a one- to four-family correspondent loan was approximately $280 thousand.
 
Loan origination volume, excluding Bank customer refinances of $220.0 million, was $272.9 million during the first six months of fiscal year 2011, compared to originations of $265.9 million, excluding Bank customer refinances of $75.0 million, during the same period in the prior fiscal year.  The Bank purchased $31.4 million of loans from correspondent lenders during the first six months of fiscal year 2011, compared to $47.4 million during the same period in the prior fiscal year.  The volume of purchases was less than repayments due to high levels of refinance activity, strong competition for high quality loans, and weak loan demand.  The Bank did not purchase any one- to four-family loans from nationwide lenders during the first six months of fiscal year 2011, compared to purchases of $44.1 million during the first six months of fiscal year 2010, as nationwide lenders who previously sold loans to the Bank retained those higher yielding and higher quality assets in their own portfolios.  Additionally, the loan packages nationwide lenders presented to the Bank for purchase consideration during the first six months of fiscal year 2011 generally did not meet the Bank’s asset quality standards.  Management continues efforts to expand our network of lending relationships related to our nationwide purchase program that would provide mortgage loans in selective geographical locations that adhere to the Bank’s underwriting standards.
 

 
 
37

 
During the current quarter, the Bank entered into a correspondent lending relationship with one lender that would provide mortgage loan volume in our current local market areas.  As of March 31, 2011, the Bank had four new correspondent lender agreements pending, and had completed due diligence on an additional three correspondent lenders with the intention of offering those lenders correspondent lending agreements.  In April 2011, the Bank expanded the geographic location of an existing correspondent lender and added a new correspondent lender to generate mortgage volume in Midwestern states outside our current local market area.  Several prospective correspondent lenders have been impacted by a pending recent regulatory change regarding compensation of loan agents.  These lenders are revising their business models before committing to a correspondent lending agreement with the Bank.  As a result, we will likely not purchase a substantial volume of correspondent loans until these agreements are executed and overall loan demand increases.  The geographic locations for the mortgage lending volume provided by these new correspondent lenders would be in our local market areas and neighboring Midwestern states.

As a result of entering into lending agreements that would generate loan volume outside of the Bank’s current local market areas, the Bank executed a subservicing agreement with a reputable subservicer during the second quarter of fiscal year 2011.  The subservicer has experience servicing loans in the market areas in which we intend to purchase loans.  The subservicer will service the loans according to the Bank’s servicing standards, which allows the Bank greater control over servicing and helps maintain a standard of loan performance.  It is the Bank’s intention to have bulk loan packages purchased from other lenders serviced by the new subservicer.

Included in the loan portfolio at March 31, 2011 were $178.3 million of adjustable-rate mortgage (“ARM”) loans that were originated as interest-only. Of these interest-only loans, $141.6 million were purchased from nationwide lenders, primarily during fiscal year 2005.  Interest-only ARM loans do not typically require principal payments during their initial term, and have initial interest-only terms of either five or ten years.  The $141.6 million of purchased interest-only ARM loans had a weighted average credit score of 722 and a weighted average LTV ratio of 75% at March 31, 2011.  The credit scores were updated in March 2011.  The LTV ratios are based on the current loan balance and either the lesser of the purchase price or original appraisal, or the most recent bank appraisal, BPO, or AVM, if available.  The Bank has not purchased any interest-only ARM loans since 2006 and discontinued offering the product in its local markets during 2008 to reduce future credit risk.  At March 31, 2011, $99.1 million, or 56%, of interest-only loans were still in their interest-only payment term.  At March 31, 2011, $10.6 million, or 37% of non-performing loans, were interest-only ARMs and $1.8 million was reserved in the ACL for these loans.  Of the $10.6 million non-performing interest-only ARM loans, $5.6 million, or 53%, were still in the interest-only payment term.  Non-performing interest-only ARM loans represented approximately 6% of the total interest-only ARM loan portfolio at March 31, 2011.

Historically, the Bank’s underwriting guidelines have provided the Bank with loans of low delinquencies, and low levels of non-performing assets compared to national levels.  Of particular importance is the complete documentation required for each loan the Bank originates and purchases.  This allows the Bank to make a well informed credit decision based upon a thorough assessment of the borrower’s ability to repay the loan, compared to underwriting methodologies that do not require full documentation.

 
38

 


The following table presents loan origination, refinance and purchase activity for the periods indicated.  Loan originations, purchases and refinances are reported together.  The fixed-rate one- to four-family loans less than or equal to 15 years have an original maturity at origination of less than or equal to 15 years, while fixed-rate one- to four-family loans greater than 15 years have an original maturity at origination of greater than 15 years.  The adjustable-rate one- to four-family loans less than or equal to 36 months have a term to first reset of less than or equal to 36 months at origination and adjustable-rate one- to four-family loans greater than 36 months have a term to first reset of greater than 36 months at origination. Of the $456.6 million of one- to four-family loan originations and refinances in the table for the six months ended March 31, 2011, 77% had loan values of $417 thousand or less and 23% had loan values in excess of $417 thousand.  Of the $31.4 million of correspondent loan purchases, 12% had loan values of $417 thousand or less and 88% had loan values in excess of $417 thousand.
 
 
   
For the Three Months Ended
 
   
March 31, 2011
   
March 31, 2010
 
   
Amount
   
Rate
   
% of Total
   
Amount
   
Rate
   
% of Total
 
Fixed-Rate:
 
(Dollars in thousands)
 
   One- to four-family
                                   
      <= 15 years
  $ 62,372       3.96 %     28.5 %   $ 39,482       4.50 %     22.8 %
      > 15 years
    106,243       4.54       48.5       78,794       5.09       45.6  
   Home equity
    866       6.83       0.4       1,448       7.51       0.8  
   Other consumer
    259       8.39       0.1       387       8.16       0.2  
    Total fixed-rate
    169,740       4.35       77.5       120,111       4.94       69.4  
                                                 
Adjustable-Rate:
                                               
   One- to four-family
                                               
      <= 36 months
    2,816       3.22       1.3       5,819       3.22       3.4  
      > 36 months
    31,985       3.51       14.6       27,629       4.22       16.0  
   Home equity
    14,327       4.80       6.5       18,723       4.84       10.8  
   Other consumer
    285       3.81       0.1       619       4.59       0.4  
    Total adjustable-rate
    49,413       3.87       22.5       52,790       4.33       30.6  
                                                 
Total originations, refinances and purchases
  $ 219,153       4.24 %     100.0 %   $ 172,901       4.75 %     100.0 %
                                                 
Purchased/participation loans included above:
                                         
Fixed-Rate:
                                               
    Correspondent
  $ 16,468       4.47 %           $ 12,417       5.03 %        
    Nationwide
    --       --               --       --          
Adjustable-Rate:
                                               
    Correspondent
    5,979       3.57               7,494       4.42          
    Nationwide
    --       ---               6,517       3.59          
Total purchased loans
  $ 22,447       4.23 %           $ 26,428       4.50 %        

 
 
39

 
   
For the Six Months Ended
 
   
March 31, 2011
   
March 31, 2010
 
   
Amount
   
Rate
   
% of Total
   
Amount
   
Rate
   
% of Total
 
Fixed-Rate:
 
(Dollars in thousands)
 
   One- to four-family
                                   
      <= 15 years
  $ 168,323       3.83 %     32.1 %   $ 96,437       4.56 %     22.3 %
      > 15 years
    248,776       4.41       47.4       196,577       5.09       45.5  
   Other real estate
    892       6.00       0.2       --       --       --  
   Home equity
    1,451       6.85       0.3       2,948       7.48       0.7  
   Other consumer
    526       8.32       0.1       805       8.52       0.1  
    Total fixed-rate
    419,968       4.19       80.1       296,767       4.95       68.6  
                                                 
Adjustable-Rate:
                                               
   One- to four-family
                                               
      <= 36 months
    4,119       3.14       0.8       38,764       3.32       9.0  
      > 36 months
    66,788       3.51       12.7       54,499       4.29       12.6  
   Home equity
    32,608       4.80       6.2       40,533       4.85       9.4  
   Other consumer
    849       4.08       0.2       1,809       4.68       0.4  
    Total adjustable-rate
    104,364       3.90       19.9       135,605       4.18       31.4  
                                                 
Total originations, refinances and purchases
  $ 524,332       4.13 %     100.0 %   $ 432,372       4.71 %     100.0 %
                                                 
Purchased/participation loans included above:
                                         
Fixed-Rate:
                                               
    Correspondent
  $ 21,445       4.45 %           $ 30,228       5.07 %        
    Nationwide
    --       --               2,338       5.05          
Adjustable-Rate:
                                               
    Correspondent
    9,933       3.72               17,191       4.46          
    Nationwide
    --       --               41,750       3.49          
Total purchased loans
  $ 31,378       4.22 %           $ 91,507       4.23 %        

 
In an effort to offset the impact of repayments and to retain our customers, the Bank offers existing one- to four-family loan customers whose loans have not been sold to third parties who have been current on their contractual loan payments for the previous 12 months the opportunity, for a fee, to modify their original loan terms to current loan terms being offered.  During the six months ended March 31, 2011, the Bank modified $584.1 million of loans, with a weighted average rate decrease of 98 basis points.  Loan modification activity is not included in the table above because a new loan is not generated at the time of modification.
 
The Bank generally prices its first mortgage loan products based on secondary market and competitor pricing.   During the six months ended March 31, 2011, the average rate offered on the Bank’s 30-year fixed-rate one- to four-family loans, with no points paid by the borrower, was approximately 150 basis points above the average 10-year Treasury rate, while the average rate offered on the Bank’s 15-year fixed-rate one- to four-family loans was approximately 90 basis points above the average 10-year Treasury rate.
 

 
40

 


The following table summarizes our one- to four-family loan commitments for originations, refinances, and purchases for the dates noted.  Commitments to originate and refinance one- to four-family loans are agreements to lend to a customer as long as there is no violation of any condition established in the contract.  Commitments generally have fixed expiration dates or other termination clauses and may require the payment of a rate lock fee.  Some of the commitments are expected to expire without being fully drawn upon; therefore, the amount of total commitments disclosed below does not necessarily represent future cash requirements.

   
March 31,
   
December 31,
   
March 31,
 
   
2011
   
2010
   
2010
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
                   
Originate/refinance fixed-rate
  $ 61,859     $ 116,267     $ 85,858  
Originate/refinance adjustable-rate
    9,506       24,789       7,942  
Purchase fixed-rate
    6,201       11,504       10,534  
Purchase adjustable-rate
    7,791       8,888       4,478  
    $ 85,357     $ 161,448     $ 108,812  

The following table presents annualized prepayment speeds for the quarter ended March 31, 2011 by interest rate tier of our fixed-rate one- to four-family loan portfolio, including our fixed-rate one- to four-family construction loans.  Loan refinances are considered a prepayment and are included in the prepayment speeds presented below.  The annualized prepayment speeds are presented with and without modifications.  During the three months ended March 31, 2011, $28.1 million of fixed-rate one- to four-family loans were modified.

     
Original Term
 
     
15 years or less
   
More than 15 years
 
           
Prepayment Speed (annualized)
         
Prepayment Speed (annualized)
 
Rate
   
Principal
   
Includes
   
Excludes
   
Principal
   
Includes
   
Excludes
 
Range
   
Balance
   
Modifications
   
Modifications
   
Balance
   
Modifications
   
Modifications
 
     
(Dollars in thousands)
 
                                       
< =4.50%
    $ 434,687       6.18 %     6.18 %   $ 716,043       2.35 %     2.29 %
  4.51 - 4.99 %     265,434       18.61       15.85       312,479       7.55       7.55  
  5.00 - 5.50 %     230,807       25.22       23.43       1,372,921       15.96       13.09  
  5.51 - 5.99 %     51,257       23.18       21.65       317,515       21.81       16.36  
  6.00 - 6.50 %     23,544       27.44       25.20       248,691       28.18       14.28  
  6.51 - 6.99 %     7,138       6.80       6.80       42,500       17.96       10.33  
>=7.00%
      3,908       12.18       9.52       33,060       13.92       12.64  
Total
    $ 1,016,775       15.56 %     14.24 %   $ 3,043,209       13.84 %     10.58 %

 
 
We attempt to mitigate the repricing risk of our fixed-rate one- to four-family loan portfolio by the interest rates we offer and through the terms of our modification program.  Management closely monitors competitors’ rates and also considers interest rate risk and net interest income when setting offered rates.  Through our modification program a borrower can modify the rate and/or term of their loan in less time than it takes to process a refinance, and for a cost that is less than a refinance, if they have been current on their payments for the previous 12 months and the loan has not been sold to a third party.  At March 31, 2011, the fixed rates offered through our modification program were at least 12 basis points higher than a similar new origination or refinance.  This allows the Bank to retain the modified loan and achieve a rate slightly above current market rate.
 
We manage the reinvestment risk of loan prepayments through our interest rate risk and asset management strategies.  In recent periods, principal repayments in excess of loan originations and purchases have been reinvested in shorter-term MBS and investment securities at lower market rates than our loan portfolio, which reduces our interest rate spread.  If, however, market rates were to rise, the short-term nature of the securities may allow management the opportunity to reinvest the maturing funds at a higher rate.

 
41

 

The following table summarizes the activity in the loan portfolio for the periods indicated, excluding changes in undisbursed loan funds, unearned loan fees and deferred costs, and ACL.  Bank customer refinances are included in “repayments.”  Purchased loans include purchases from correspondent and nationwide lenders.  Loan modification activity is not included in the activity in the following table because a new loan is not generated at the time of modification.  The modified balance and rate are, however, included in the ending loan portfolio balance and rate.
   
For the Three Months Ended
 
   
March 31, 2011
 
December 31, 2010
 
September 30, 2010
   
June 30, 2010
 
   
Amount
   
Rate
   
Amount
   
Rate
   
Amount
   
Rate
   
Amount
   
Rate
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
                                                 
Beginning balance
  $ 5,163,319       4.87 %   $ 5,209,313       5.07 %   $ 5,361,472       5.14 %   $ 5,425,458       5.19 %
Originations and refinances:
                                                               
  Fixed
    153,272       4.33       245,251       4.08       94,048       4.64       137,012       4.96  
  Adjustable
    43,434       3.91       50,997       3.93       39,170       4.33       34,033       4.62  
Purchases:
                                                               
  Fixed
    16,468       4.47       4,977       4.38       6,850       5.05       8,590       5.15  
  Adjustable
    5,979       3.57       3,954       3.96       1,417       4.40       10,737       5.58  
Repayments
    (233,473  )             (348,545  )             (288,626  )             (250,098  )        
Other (1)
    (4,949  )             (2,628  )             (5,018  )             (4,260  )        
Ending balance
  $ 5,144,050       4.81 %   $ 5,163,319       4.87 %   $ 5,209,313       5.07 %   $ 5,361,472       5.14 %
                                                                 
   
For the Six Months Ended
                               
   
March 31, 2011
 
March 31, 2010
                               
   
Amount
   
Rate
   
Amount
   
Rate
                                 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
                               
                                                                 
Beginning balance
  $ 5,209,313       5.07 %   $ 5,646,950       5.29 %                                
Originations and refinances:
                                                               
  Fixed
    398,523       4.18       264,201       4.94                                  
  Adjustable
    94,431       3.92       76,664       4.50                                  
Purchases:
                                                               
  Fixed
    21,445       4.45       32,566       5.07                                  
  Adjustable
    9,933       3.72       58,941       3.77                                  
Repayments
    (582,018  )             (451,102  )                                        
Transfer of-loans to LHFS, net (2)
    --               (194,759  )                                        
Other (1)
    (7,577 )             (8,003  )                                        
Ending balance
  $ 5,144,050       4.81 %   $ 5,425,458       5.19 %                                

(1)   “Other” consists of transfers to REO, modification fees advanced, and reductions in commitments.
(2)   “Transfer of loans to LHFS, net” in the six months ended March 31, 2010 includes loans with a principal balance of $194.8 million related to the loan swap transaction.

 
42

 


The following table presents information concerning the composition of our loan portfolio in dollar amounts and in percentages (before deductions for undisbursed loan funds, unearned loan fees and deferred costs, and the ACL) as of the dates indicated.  The weighted average portfolio rate decreased 26 basis points from 5.07% at September 30, 2010 to 4.81% at March 31, 2011, primarily due to modifications, refinances, and ARM loans repricing down.  Within the one- to four-family loan portfolio at March 31, 2011, 79% of the loans had a balance of less than $417 thousand.
 
   
March 31, 2011
   
December 31, 2010
   
September 30, 2010
 
         
Average
   
% of
         
Average
   
% of
         
Average
   
% of
 
   
Amount
   
Rate
   
Total
   
Amount
   
Rate
   
Total
   
Amount
   
Rate
   
Total
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
Real Estate Loans:
                                                     
     One- to four-family
  $ 4,867,405       4.77 %     94.6 %   $ 4,876,547       4.83 %     94.5 %   $ 4,915,651       5.03 %     94.4 %
     Multi-family and commercial
    60,869       6.15       1.2       64,280       6.18       1.3       66,476       6.24       1.3  
     Construction
    39,694       4.40       0.8       37,487       4.64       0.7       33,168       4.90       0.6  
          Total real estate loans
    4,967,968       4.78       96.6       4,978,314       4.85       96.5       5,015,295       5.05       96.3  
                                                                         
Consumer Loans:
                                                                       
     Home equity
    169,150       5.52       3.3       177,577       5.53       3.4       186,347       5.55       3.6  
     Other
    6,932       5.41       0.1       7,428       5.57       0.1       7,671       5.66       0.1  
          Total consumer loans
    176,082       5.52       3.4       185,005       5.53       3.5       194,018       5.55       3.7  
Total loans receivable
    5,144,050       4.81 %     100.0 %     5,163,319       4.87 %     100.0 %     5,209,313       5.07 %     100.0 %
                                                                         
Less:
                                                                       
     Undisbursed loan funds
    21,004                       17,258                       15,489                  
     Unearned loan fees and deferred costs
    12,617                       10,320                       10,730                  
     ACL
    13,814                       14,723                       14,892                  
Total loans receivable, net
  $ 5,096,615                     $ 5,121,018                     $ 5,168,202                  


 
43

 

Asset Quality – Loans and REO
 
The Bank’s traditional underwriting guidelines have provided the Bank with generally low delinquencies and low levels of non-performing assets compared to national levels.  Of particular importance is the complete and full documentation required for each loan the Bank originates and purchases.  This allows the Bank to make an informed credit decision based upon a thorough assessment of the borrower’s ability to repay the loan compared to underwriting methodologies that do not require full documentation.  See additional discussion regarding underwriting standards in “Lending Practices and Underwriting Standards” in the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended September 30, 2010.  In the following asset quality discussion, loans purchased from correspondent lenders are included with originated loans, and loans purchased from nationwide lenders are reported as purchased loans. 

For one- to four-family loans and home equity loans, when a borrower fails to make a loan payment 15 days after the due date, a late charge is assessed and a notice is mailed.  Collection personnel review all delinquent loan balances more than 16 days past due.  Attempts to contact the borrower occur by personal letter and, if no response is received, by telephone, with the purpose of establishing repayment arrangements for the borrower to bring the loan current.  Repayment arrangements must be approved by a designated bank officer.  Once a loan becomes 90 days delinquent, a demand letter is issued requiring the loan to be brought current or foreclosure procedures will be implemented.  Generally, when a loan becomes 120 days delinquent, and an acceptable repayment plan has not been established, the loan is forwarded to legal counsel to initiate foreclosure.  We also monitor whether mortgagors who filed for bankruptcy are meeting their obligation to pay the mortgage debt in accordance with the terms of the bankruptcy petition. 

We monitor delinquencies on our purchased loan portfolio with reports we receive from the servicers.  We monitor these servicer reports to ensure that the servicer is upholding the terms of the servicing agreement.  The reports generally provide total principal and interest due and length of delinquency, and are used to prepare monthly management reports and perform delinquent loan trend analysis.  Management also utilizes information from the servicers to monitor property valuations and identify the need to record SVAs.  The servicers handle collection efforts per the terms of the servicing agreement.

In April 2011, banking regulators reported enforcement actions against 14 banking organizations to address a pattern of misconduct and negligence in mortgage loan servicing and foreclosure processing.  The Bank was not one of the 14 banking organizations noted in the enforcement actions; however, management will be reviewing the enforcement actions to determine if any changes to the Bank’s foreclosure process need to be made.  Although no monetary sanctions were announced, the banking regulators indicated penalties could be assessed in addition to the corrective actions required.  As a result of the enforcement actions, significant modifications in residential mortgage loan servicing and foreclosure processes will be required at the 14 banking organizations.  Each organization will be required to submit plans that address certain deficiencies.  Additionally, to ensure the corrections are completed, the organizations must retain independent consultants to manage the process or conduct confirming look-back reviews for the years 2009 and 2010.  Of the 14 banking organizations, there are 3 organizations that service loans we purchased from nationwide lenders.  During the time period under review, the Bank had 93 loans go into foreclosure with the servicers noted in the enforcement actions.  Management cannot currently estimate the cost, if any, to the Bank if deficiencies are detected in any of those loans. 

Delinquent and non-performing loans and REO
The following tables present the Company’s 30 to 89 day delinquent loans, non-performing loans, and REO at the dates indicated.  Non-performing loans are non-accrual loans that are 90 or more days delinquent or are in the process of foreclosure.  At all dates presented, there were no loans 90 or more days delinquent that were still accruing interest.  Loans classified as TDRs are not included in delinquent or non-performing loans unless the restructured loans are 30 to 89 days or 90 or more days delinquent.  TDR’s 30 to 89 days delinquent were $3.9 million and non-performing TDR’s were $3.3 million at March 31, 2011.  REO includes assets acquired in settlement of loans.  Non-performing assets include non-performing loans and REO .

 
44

 


   
Loans Delinquent for 30 to 89 Days
 
   
March 31,
   
December 31,
   
September 30,
   
June 30,
   
March 31,
 
   
2011
   
2010
   
2010
   
2010
   
2010
 
   
Number
   
Amount
   
Number
   
Amount
   
Number
   
Amount
   
Number
   
Amount
   
Number
   
Amount
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
   One- to four-family:
                                                           
     Originated
    141     $ 16,797       181     $ 20,009       175     $ 17,613       154     $ 15,581       143     $ 14,574  
     Purchased
    30       5,600       35       7,573       34       6,047       31       6,629       39       9,846  
   Multi-family and commercial
    --       --       --       --       --       --       --       --       --       --  
   Construction
    --       --       --       --       --       --       --       --       --       --  
   Consumer Loans:
                                                                               
     Home equity
    35       456       47       767       50       874       44       806       35       670  
     Other
    12       180       24       313       16       183       17       96       13       62  
      218     $ 23,033       287     $ 28,662       275     $ 24,717       246     $ 23,112       230     $ 25,152  
30 to 89 days delinquent loans
                                                                               
     to total loans receivable, net
            0.45 %             0.56 %             0.48 %             0.43 %             0.47 %



 
45

 


   
March 31,
   
December 31,
   
September 30,
   
June 30,
   
March 31,
 
   
2011
   
2010
   
2010
   
2010
   
2010
 
   
Number
   
Amount
   
Number
   
Amount
   
Number
   
Amount
   
Number
   
Amount
   
Number
   
Amount
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
Non-performing loans:
                                                           
   One- to four-family:
                               
 
                         
     Originated
    126     $ 13,899       125     $ 13,248       109     $ 12,884       105     $ 10,538       107     $ 9,892  
     Purchased
    49       15,131       53       17,176       60       18,375       73       22,090       76       23,407  
   Multi-family and commercial
    --       --       --       --       --       --       --       --       --       --  
   Construction
    --       --       --       --       --       --       --       --       --       --  
   Consumer Loans:
                                                                               
     Home equity
    22       428       29       530       31       685       31       516       41       720  
     Other
    8       59       8       33       6       12       9       36       6       18  
      205       29,517       215       30,987       206       31,956       218       33,180       230       34,037  
                                                                                 
Non-performing loans as a percentage
                                                                         
     of total loans receivable, net
            0.58 %             0.61 %             0.62 %             0.62 %             0.63 %
                                                                                 
REO:
                                                                               
   One- to four-family:
                                                                               
     Originated (1)
    73       7,161       71       7,307       73       6,172       59       4,738       59       5,450  
     Purchased
    19       4,176       19       3,672       17       3,748       11       2,412       8       1,411  
   Multi-family and commercial
    --       --       --       --       --       --       --       --       --       --  
   Construction
    --       --       --       --       --       --       --       --       --       --  
   Consumer Loans:
                                                                               
     Home equity
    --       --       --       --       --       --       --       --       --       --  
     Other
    --       --       --       --       --       --       --       --       --       --  
      92       11,337       90       10,979       90       9,920       70       7,150       67       6,861  
                                                                                 
Total non-performing assets
    297     $ 40,854       305     $ 41,966       296     $ 41,876       288     $ 40,330       297     $ 40,898  
                                                                                 
Non-performing assets
                                                                               
     as a percentage of total assets
            0.42 %             0.43 %             0.49 %             0.47 %             0.48 %
    (1)   Real estate related consumer loans where we also hold the first mortgage are included in the one- to four-family category as the underlying collateral is one- to four-family property.

 
46

 

The following table presents the weighted average percentage of one- to four-family loans, by principal balance, that entered the 30 to 89 days delinquent category during the 12 months ended March 31, 2011 that paid off, returned to non-delinquent status, stayed 30 to 89 days delinquent, or progressed to the non-performing or REO categories.

   
30 to 89 Day Delinquent Loan Trend Analysis
 
               
30 to 89 Days
 
Non-
           
   
Paid Off
 
Performing
 
Delinquent
 
Performing
 
REO
 
Total
 
Originated
    3.3 %     40.5 %     35.8 %     16.5 %     3.9 %     100.0 %
Purchased
    0.9       37.0       33.2       27.2       1.7       100.0  
Total Portfolio Average
    2.4 %     39.3 %     35.3 %     19.8 %     3.2 %     100.0 %

Loans 30 to 89 days delinquent decreased $1.7 million from $24.7 million at September 30, 2010 to $23.0 million at March 31, 2011.  The $1.7 million decrease was primarily composed of an $816 thousand decrease in originated one- to four-family loans and a $447 thousand decrease in purchased one- to four-family loans. 

Non-performing loans decreased $2.5 million from $32.0 million at September 30, 2010 to $29.5 million at March 31, 2011.  The $2.5 million decrease was primarily composed of a $3.2 million decrease in purchased one- to four-family loans, partially offset by a $1.0 million increase in originated one- to four-family loans.  The decrease in purchased one- to four-family loans was due to the loans moving to REO, short sales and loans paying off, and fewer loans moving into the non-performing loan category.  Our local market areas did not feel the impact of the negative economic conditions felt by a large portion of the U.S. until recently, thereby resulting in a lag in delinquencies on our originated loan portfolio compared to our purchased loan portfolio.

For LTV and credit score information for the Bank’s one- to four-family loan portfolio, see “Note 4 – Loans Receivable and Allowance for Credit Losses.”


 
47

 


The following table presents the calendar year of origination for originated and purchased one- to four-family loans, excluding construction loans, and the origination year for non-performing originated and purchased one- to four-family loans at March 31, 2011.  The origination date for modified loans is based on when the loan was originated, not the modification date.
                                 
Total
 
Origination
                   
Originated
   
Purchased
   
Non-
 
Calendar
 
Originated
   
Purchased
         
Non-Performing
   
Non-Performing
   
Performing
 
Year
 
Loans
   
Loans
   
Total Loans
   
Loans
   
Loans
   
Total
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
                                     
2002 and prior
  $ 563,351     $ 12,771     $ 576,122     $ 3,083     $ 550     $ 3,633  
2003
    317,476       20,985       338,461       1,696       363       2,059  
2004
    243,688       167,054       410,742       1,726       5,699       7,425  
2005
    317,906       162,758       480,664       1,738       8,036       9,774  
2006
    334,192       13,458       347,650       2,424       483       2,907  
2007
    458,792       173       458,965       1,387       --       1,387  
2008
    508,686       54,565       563,251       1,688       --       1,688  
2009
    803,565       62,664       866,229       157       --       157  
2010
    628,235       5,063       633,298       --       --       --  
2011
    192,023       --       192,023       --       --       --  
    $ 4,367,914     $ 499,491     $ 4,867,405     $ 13,899     $ 15,131     $ 29,030  


 
48

 


The following table presents the top 12 states where the properties securing our one- to four-family loans, excluding construction loans, are located and the corresponding balance of 30 to 89 day delinquent loans, non-performing loans and the weighted average LTV ratios for non-performing loans at March 31, 2011.  The LTV ratios were based on the current loan balance and either the lesser of the purchase price or original appraisal or the most recent bank appraisal, BPO or AVM, if available.  As a result of updated estimated fair values, the LTV of various non-performing loans are now in excess of 100%, as reflected in the table below.  We have recorded SVAs on these loans, after taking into consideration potential PMI proceeds.

               
Loans 30 to 89
                   
   
One- to Four-Family
   
Days Delinquent
   
Non-Performing Loans
 
State
 
Balance
   
% of Total
   
Balance
   
% of Total
   
Balance
   
% of Total
   
Average LTV
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
                                           
Kansas
  $ 3,655,676       75.1 %   $ 12,229       54.6 %   $ 12,282       42.3 %     79 %
Missouri
    727,932       15.0       4,585       20.5       1,934       6.7       92  
Illinois
    57,565       1.2       --       --       1,712       5.9       93  
Florida
    38,770       0.8       957       4.3       3,459       11.9       106  
New York
    34,704       0.7       --       --       1,642       5.7       100  
Texas
    34,165       0.7       742       3.3       --       --       --  
Colorado
    26,373       0.5       315       1.4       640       2.2       105  
Arizona
    24,863       0.5       725       3.2       1,536       5.3       143  
Minnesota
    24,700       0.5       400       1.8       95       0.3       85  
Connecticut
    23,777       0.5       --       --       146       0.5       104  
Virginia
    23,205       0.5       --       --       581       2.0       93  
New Jersey
    20,637       0.4       --       --       652       2.2       62  
Other states
    175,038       3.6       2,444       10.9       4,351       15.0       108  
    $ 4,867,405       100.0 %   $ 22,397       100.0 %   $ 29,030       100.0 %     94 %

Impaired loans
A loan is considered impaired when, based on current information and events, it is probable that the Bank will be unable to collect all amounts due, including principal and interest, according to the contractual terms of the loan agreement.  Management considers the following loans to be impaired loans: all non-accrual loans, loans classified as substandard or doubtful, loans with SVAs, and TDRs that have not been performing under the new terms for 12 consecutive months or are required by the accounting literature to be classified as a TDR for the life of the loan.  Impaired loans totaled $60.2 million at March 31, 2011, of which $33.0 million were classified as TDRs.

Allowance for credit losses and provision for credit losses
Management maintains an ACL to absorb known and inherent losses in the loan portfolio based on ongoing quarterly assessments of the loan portfolio.  Our allowance for credit loss methodology considers a number of quantitative and qualitative factors, including the trend and composition of our delinquent and non-performing loans, results of foreclosed property transactions, and the status and trends of the local and national economies and housing markets.  Our local market areas did not experience significant fluctuations in home values over the past 10 years as did other areas of the U.S. so the loss per property in our originated portfolio has generally not been as large as the loss per property in our purchased loan portfolio.

The ACL is maintained through provisions for credit losses which are charged to income.  The provision for credit losses is established after considering the results of management’s quarterly assessment of the ACL.  For the first six months of fiscal year 2011, the Company recorded a provision for credit losses of $1.2 million, primarily related to establishing or increasing SVAs on purchased loans.  See Item 7 - “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations - Critical Accounting Policies” in the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended September 30, 2010 and “Note 1 – Summary of Significant Accounting Policies” for a full discussion of our ACL methodology.  For additional information regarding our ACL activity during fiscal year 2011, see “Note 4 – Loans Receivable and Allowance for Credit Losses.”


 
49

 


The following table presents the Company’s allocation of the ACL to each respective loan category at March 31, 2011 and September 30, 2010.  At March 31, 2011 and September 30, 2010, our ratio of ACL to non-performing loans was 46.8% and 46.6%, respectively, and our ratio of ACL to loans receivable, net was 0.27% and 0.29%, respectively.

   
At
     
At
 
   
March 31, 2011
 
  
 
September 30, 2010
 
         
% of
                       
% of
             
         
ACL to
                       
ACL to
             
   
Amount of
   
Total
   
Total
   
% of Loans
     
Amount of
   
Total
   
Total
   
% of Loans
 
   
ACL
   
ACL
   
Loans
   
to Total Loans
     
ACL
   
ACL
   
Loans
   
to Total Loans
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
One- to four-family:
                                                 
Originated
  $ 4,205       30.4 %   $ 4,367,914       84.9  
%
  $ 3,801       25.5 %   $ 4,350,772       83.5 %
Purchased
    9,037       65.4       499,491       9.7         10,425       70.0       564,879       10.8  
Multi-family and commercial
    268       1.9       60,869       1.2         275       1.9       66,476       1.3  
Construction
    11       0.1       39,694       0.8         12       0.1       33,168       0.6  
Consumer:
                                                                 
Home equity
    244       1.8       169,150       3.3         319       2.1       186,347       3.6  
Other consumer
    49       0.4       6,932       0.1         60       0.4       7,671       0.2  
    $ 13,814       100.0 %   $ 5,144,050       100.0 %     $ 14,892       100.0 %   $ 5,209,313       100.0 %





 
50

 

Securities.   The following table presents the distribution of our MBS and investment securities portfolios, at amortized cost, at the dates indicated.  Overall, fixed-rate securities comprised 77% of these portfolios at March 31, 2011.  The weighted average life (“WAL”) is the estimated remaining maturity after projected prepayment speeds and projected call option assumptions have been applied.  The increase in the WAL between September 30, 2010 and March 31, 2011 was due primarily to the increase in interest rates between time periods.  This increase in interest rates resulted in a reduction in the prepayment expectations for the MBS and fewer callable bonds expected to be called.  The decrease in the yield between September 30, 2010 and March 31, 2011 was primarily a result of the purchase of securities with yields lower than that of the portfolios, and prepayments of MBS and early repayment of callable agency debentures with yields higher than that of the existing portfolio. Yields on tax-exempt securities are not calculated on a taxable equivalent basis.

   
March 31, 2011
   
September 30, 2010
   
March 31, 2010
 
   
Balance
   
WAL
   
Yield
   
Balance
   
WAL
   
Yield
   
Balance
   
WAL
   
Yield
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
Fixed-rate securities:
                                                     
  MBS
  $ 1,370,970       3.95       3.71 %   $ 860,798       3.02       4.47 %   $ 858,308       3.09       4.80 %
  GSE debentures
    1,781,628       1.45       1.11       1,258,980       0.64       1.39       894,985       0.99       1.67  
  Municipal bonds
    63,321       2.70       2.96       70,605       2.76       2.95       71,807       3.36       2.99  
   Total fixed-rate securities
    3,215,919       2.54       2.25       2,190,383       1.64       2.64       1,825,100       2.07       3.20  
                                                                         
Adjustable-rate securities:
                                                                       
  MBS
    941,279       5.18       3.05       695,192       4.26       3.43       849,431       5.08       3.61  
  Trust preferred securities
    3,708       26.23       1.57       3,721       26.73       1.96       3,748       27.23       1.92  
   Total adjustable-rate securities
    944,987       5.26       3.04       698,913       4.41       3.42       853,179       5.20       3.60  
     Total investment portfolio,
        at amortized cost
  $ 4,160,906       3.16       2.43 %   $ 2,889,296       2.31       2.83 %   $ 2,678,279       3.07       3.33 %

During the current quarter Capitol Federal Financial, Inc. at the holding company level, purchased $405.8 million of securities with a WAL of 1.13 years and a yield of 0.42% at the time of purchase.  All of the securities were classified as AFS.  The securities have laddered maturities in order to provide cash flows that can be used to repurchase stock, when allowed by federal banking regulations, or that can be reinvested into higher yielding assets if interest rates rise.  The yields on these securities are less than the yields on the Bank’s current investment portfolio due to the lower interest rate environment and the short-term nature of the securities. 


Mortgage-Backed Securities .  The MBS portfolio, which primarily consists of securities issued by U.S. GSEs, increased $748.0 million from $1.61 billion at September 30, 2010 to $2.36 billion at March 31, 2011.  At March 31, 2011, the MBS held within our portfolio were issued by FHLMC, FNMA and GNMA, with the exception of $2.2 million, which were issued by a private issuer.  Unlike MBS issued by GSEs, the principal and interest payments of privately issued MBS are not guaranteed, although we generally receive a higher interest rate as compensation for the relative increase in credit risk.  Should the underlying mortgages in a privately issued MBS security default on their mortgage payment above the level of credit enhancement, losses could be realized.

 
51

 
The following table provides a summary of the activity in our portfolio of MBS for the periods presented.  The yields and WAL for purchases are presented as recorded at the time of purchase.  The yields for the beginning balances are as of the last day of the period previous to the period presented and the yield for the ending balances are as of the last day of the period presented and are generally derived from recent prepayment activity on the securities in the portfolio as of the dates presented.  The weighted average yield of the MBS portfolio decreased from September 30, 2010 to March 31, 2011 as a result of purchases of securities with yields lower than the existing portfolio, adjustable-rate MBS resetting to lower coupons due to a decline in related indices, which are generally based upon short-term interest rates, and the maturity and repayment of securities with higher yields than the overall portfolio. The beginning and ending WAL is the estimated remaining maturity after projected prepayment speeds have been applied.  The increase in the WAL at March 31, 2011 compared to September 30, 2010 was due to the increase in long-term interest rates at the end of the quarter which resulted in a reduction in prepayment expectations, thereby lengthening the WAL of the related securities. The increase in the WAL was also due to purchases during the current quarter with a WAL of 4.8 years.

   
For the Three Months Ended
 
   
March 31, 2011
   
December 31, 2010
   
September 30, 2010
   
June 30, 2010
 
   
Amount
   
Yield
   
WAL
   
Amount
   
Yield
   
WAL
   
Amount
   
Yield
   
WAL
   
Amount
   
Yield
   
WAL
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
Beginning balance - carrying value
  $ 1,695,294       3.73 %     4.21     $ 1,607,864       4.00 %     3.58     $ 1,620,623       4.15 %     3.99     $ 1,757,310       4.21 %     4.07  
Maturities and repayments
    (121,283 )                     (123,577 )                     (131,861 )                     (145,432 )                
Net amortization of premiums/(discounts)
    (689 )                     (632 )                     (457 )                     (393 )                
Purchases:
                                                                                               
  Fixed
    501,748       3.17       4.64       168,300       2.16       3.74       126,394       2.54       3.71       --       --       --  
  Adjustable
    282,957       2.59       4.98       49,436       2.24       5.08       --       --       --       --       --       --  
Change in valuation on AFS securities
    (2,128 )                     (6,097 )                     (6,835 )                     9,138                  
Ending balance - carrying value
  $ 2,355,899       3.44 %     4.45     $ 1,695,294       3.73 %     4.21     $ 1,607,864       4.00 %     3.58     $ 1,620,623       4.15 %     3.99  
                                                                                                 
   
For the Six Months Ended
                                                 
   
March 31, 2011
   
March 31, 2010
                                                 
   
Amount
   
Yield
   
WAL
   
Amount
   
Yield
   
WAL
                                                 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
                                                 
Beginning balance - carrying value
  $ 1,607,864       4.00 %     3.58     $ 1,992,467       4.42 %     4.67                                                  
Maturities and repayments
    (244,860 )                     (234,015 )                                                                
Sale of securities, net of gains
    --                       (192,690 )                                                                
Net amortization of premiums/(discounts)
    (1,321 )                     (891 )                                                                
Purchases:
                                                                                               
  Fixed
    670,048       2.92       4.41       5,032       4.13       7.32                                                  
  Adjustable
    332,393       2.54       4.99       --       --       --                                                  
Amortized cost of securities received in
                                                                                               
  loan swap transaction
    --                       192,690                                                                  
Change in valuation on AFS securities
    (8,225 )                     (5,283 )                                                                
Ending balance - carrying value
  $ 2,355,899       3.44 %     4.45     $ 1,757,310       4.21 %     4.07                                                  

 
52

 


The following table presents the annualized prepayment speeds for the quarter ended March 31, 2011, which represents prepayments during January, February, March 2011, and net premiums/discounts by interest rate tier of our fixed-rate MBS portfolio, at amortized cost, based on the underlying weighted average loan rate.  Our fixed-rate MBS portfolio is somewhat less sensitive than our fixed-rate one- to four-family loan portfolio to repricing risk due to external refinancing barriers such as unemployment, income changes, and decreases in property values, causing barriers to refinancing to be generally more pronounced outside of our local market areas.  However, we are unable to control the interest rates and/or governmental programs that could impact the loans in our fixed-rate MBS portfolio, and are therefore more likely to experience reinvestment risk due to principal prepayments as any effort by the government to reduce or eliminate these barriers could result in an increase in the prepayment of these assets.  Additionally, prepayments impact the amortization/accretion of premiums/discounts on our MBS portfolio.  As prepayments increase, the related premiums/discounts are amortized/accreted at a faster rate.  The amortization of premiums decreases interest income while the accretion of discounts increases interest income.  As noted in the table below, the fixed-rate MBS portfolio had a net premium of $8.2 million as of March 31, 2011.  Given that the weighted average coupon on the underlying loans in this portfolio are above market rates at March 31, 2011, the Bank could experience an increase in the premium amortization should prepayment speeds increase significantly, potentially reducing future interest income.

     
Original Term
             
     
15 years or less
   
More than 15 years
             
           
Prepayment
         
Prepayment
         
Net
 
     
Amortized
   
Speed
   
Amortized
   
Speed
         
Premium/
 
Rate Range
   
Cost
   
(annualized)
   
Cost
   
(annualized)
   
Total
   
(Discount)
 
     
(Dollars in thousands)
       
                                       
< =3.99%
    $ 559,981       1.71 %   $ 28,406       0.70 %   $ 588,387     $ 3,877  
  4.00 - 4.50 %     206,092       12.09       1,603       0.21       207,695       4,460  
  4.51 - 4.99 %     221,790       23.17       4,862       8.76       226,652       (351 )
  5.00 - 5.50 %     137,644       27.82       9,744       20.02       147,388       (83 )
  5.51 - 5.99 %     89,324       24.36       53,628       32.54       142,952       84  
  6.00 - 6.50 %     15,422       32.97       23,318       9.45       38,740       46  
  6.51 - 6.99 %     2,896       23.96       11,115       24.29       14,011       132  
>=7.00%
      --       --       5,145       17.55       5,145       9  
Total
    $ 1,233,149       12.30 %   $ 137,821       18.74 %   $ 1,370,970     $ 8,174  
                                                     
Average Rate
      4.36  
%
      5.50 %             4.47 %        
Average Remaining
                                                 
Term (months)
      131               215               139          

 
53

 

Investment Securities .  Investment securities, which consist of U.S. GSE debentures (primarily issued by FNMA, FHLMC, or FHLB) and municipal investments, increased $515.3 million, from $1.33 billion at September 30, 2010 to $1.85 billion at March 31, 2011.  The following tables provide a summary of the activity of investment securities for the periods presented.  The yields for the beginning balances are as of the last day of the period previous to the period presented and the yield for the ending balances are as of the last day of the period presented.  The decrease in the yield at March 31, 2011 compared to September 30, 2010 was a result of purchases of securities with yields lower than the overall portfolio yield and maturities and calls of securities with yields higher than the overall portfolio yield.  The beginning and ending WAL’s represent the estimated remaining maturity of the securities after projected call dates have been considered, based upon market rates at each date presented.  The WAL at March 31, 2011 increased from September 30, 2010 primarily due to purchases of securities with a WAL longer than the remaining portfolio.

   
For the Three Months Ended
 
   
March 31, 2011
   
December 31, 2010
   
September 30, 2010
   
June 30, 2010
 
   
Amount
   
Yield
   
WAL
   
Amount
   
Yield
   
WAL
   
Amount
   
Yield
   
WAL
   
Amount
   
Yield
   
WAL
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
Beginning balance - carrying value
  $ 1,347,657       1.32 %     1.61     $ 1,332,656       1.47 %     0.84     $ 1,203,064       1.67 %     0.82     $ 970,431       1.76 %     1.29  
Maturities and calls
    (291,693 )                     (252,728 )                     (343,999 )                     (210,048 )                
Net amortization of premiums/(discounts)
    (1,255 )                     (799 )                     (1,034 )                     (1,051 )                
Purchases:
                                                                                               
  Fixed
    793,136       0.99       1.20       268,689       1.21       1.89       475,141       1.08       1.19       443,757       1.38       1.11  
  Adjustable
    --       --       --       --       --       --       --       --       --       --       --       --  
Change in valuation of AFS securities
    70                       (161 )                     (516 )                     (25 )                
Ending balance - carrying value
  $ 1,847,915       1.17 %     1.55     $ 1,347,657       1.32 %     1.61     $ 1,332,656       1.47 %     0.84     $ 1,203,064       1.67 %     0.82  
                                                                                                 
   
For the Six Months Ended
                                                 
   
March 31, 2011
   
March 31, 2010
                                                 
   
Amount
   
Yield
   
WAL
   
Amount
   
Yield
   
WAL
                                                 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
                                                 
Beginning balance - carrying value
  $ 1,332,656       1.47 %     0.84     $ 480,704       1.93 %     1.53                                                  
Maturities and calls
    (544,421 )                     (120,136 )                                                                
Net amortization of premiums/(discounts)
    (2,054 )                     (2,114 )                                                                
Purchases:
                                                                                               
  Fixed
    1,061,825       1.05       1.37       611,685       1.65       1.09                                                  
  Adjustable
    --       --       --       --       --       --                                                  
Change in valuation of AFS securities
    (91 )                     292                                                                  
Ending balance - carrying value
  $ 1,847,915       1.17 %     1.55     $ 970,431       1.76 %     1.29                                                  


 
54

 

Liabilities.   Total liabilities increased $281.5 million from $7.53 billion at September 30, 2010 to $7.81 billion at March 31, 2011, due primarily to an increase in deposits of $324.9 million.  The increase in deposits was primarily in the certificate of deposit and money market portfolios, which increased $154.0 million and $96.3 million, respectively, from September 30, 2010 to March 31, 2011.

Deposits - As noted above, the certificate of deposit portfolio increased $154.0 million between September 30, 2010 and March 31, 2011.  The increase was due primarily to one retail certificate of deposit for $199.0 million related to a legal settlement to which the Bank was not a party.  The presiding judge required the funds to be held in a local financial institution pending distribution.  The deposit is scheduled to mature in September 2011; however, management expects between $183.5 million and $188.5 million will be disbursed in May 2011.  The interest rate is fixed and tiered between 0.05% and 0.25%, depending on the length of time the funds remain on deposit, and is comparable to U.S. treasury obligations of less than one year.  The pricing on these funds also takes into consideration Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (“FDIC”) insurance premiums.

The money market portfolio increased $96.3 million from $942.4 million at September 30, 2010 to $1.04 billion at March 31, 2011.  Of the $96.3 million increase, $39.3 million relates to the contribution to the Foundation as a result of the corporate reorganization in late December 2010.  It is not anticipated that the Foundation will keep the funds in the money market account for an extended period of time.  The remaining increase in the money market portfolio was due to customers reinvesting funds from maturing certificates of deposit into the money market portfolio and some customers maintaining higher cash balances due to the current economic uncertainty and in anticipation of market rates increasing, which would allow them to reinvest at higher rates.  The checking portfolio increased $58.6 million from $482.4 million at September 30, 2010 to $541.1 million at March 31, 2011.  The increase in our checking portfolio was also due to customers keeping more cash readily available, as reflected by a 14% increase in the average customer checking account balance between period ends.  If interest rates were to rise, it is possible our money market and checking account customers may move those funds to higher-yielding deposit products inside of the Bank or withdraw their funds to invest in higher yielding investments outside of the Bank.
 
The following table presents the amount, average rate and percentage of total deposits for checking, savings, money market and certificates for the periods presented.  The $199.0 million retail deposit noted above is included in the table below at 0.05%.
 
   
March 31, 2011
 
December 31, 2010
 
September 30, 2010
 
March 31, 2010
         
Average
 
% of
       
Average
 
% of
       
Average
 
% of
       
Average
 
% of
   
Amount
   
Rate
 
Total
 
Amount
   
Rate
 
Total
 
Amount
   
Rate
 
Total
 
Amount
   
Rate
 
Total
   
(Dollars in thousands)
                                                                         
Checking
  $ 541,061       0.08 %     11.5 %   $ 524,208       0.08 %     11.2 %   $ 482,428       0.13 %     11.0 %   $ 493,929       0.13 %     11.4 %
Savings
    250,296       0.52       5.3       234,810       0.53       5.0       234,285       0.54       5.3       239,651       0.54       5.6  
Money market
    1,038,706       0.54       22.0       1,014,451       0.58       21.7       942,428       0.65       21.5       934,071       0.72       21.6  
Certificates
    2,881,126       1.96       61.2       2,908,632       2.08       62.1       2,727,169       2.29       62.2       2,651,415       2.66       61.4  
    $ 4,711,189       1.36 %     100.0 %   $ 4,682,101       1.45 %     100.0 %   $ 4,386,310       1.61 %     100.0 %   $ 4,319,066       1.83 %     100.0 %

At March 31, 2011, $83.7 million in certificates were brokered deposits, unchanged from September 30, 2010.  The $83.7 million of brokered deposits at March 31, 2011 had a weighted average rate of 2.58% and a remaining term to maturity of 3.4 years.  The Bank regularly considers brokered deposits as a source of funding, provided that investment opportunities are balanced with the funding cost. As of March 31, 2011, $100.0 million in certificates were public unit deposits, compared to $109.9 million in public unit deposits at September 30, 2010.  The $100.0 million of public unit deposits at March 31, 2011 had a weighted average rate of 0.38% and a remaining term to maturity of six months.  Management will continue to monitor the wholesale deposit market for attractive opportunities relative to the use of proceeds for investments.

 
55

 


The following tables set forth maturity information for our certificate of deposit portfolio at March 31, 2011.

     
Amount Due
       
           
More than
   
More than
         
 
 
     
1 year
   
1 year to
   
2 to 3
   
More than
       
     
or less
   
2 years
   
years
   
3 years
   
Total
 
     
(Dollars in thousands)
 
                                 
  0.00 – 0.99 %   $ 403,761     $ 13,042     $ --     $ --     $ 416,803  
  1.00 – 1.99 %     809,382       216,224       63,730       498       1,089,834  
  2.00 – 2.99 %     166,245       82,258       212,245       352,485       813,233  
  3.00 – 3.99 %     275,299       122,357       44,384       22,342       464,382  
  4.00 – 4.99 %     78,017       17,294       529       572       96,412  
  5.00 – 5.99 %     462       --       --       --       462  
        $ 1,733,166     $ 451,175     $ 320,888     $ 375,897     $ 2,881,126  
                                             
Weighted Average Maturity (in years)
                      1.26  
                                             
Weighted Average Maturity for the Retail Certificate of Deposit Portfolio (in years)
    1.22  


   
Maturity
 
         
Over
   
Over
             
   
3 months
   
3 to 6
   
6 to 12
   
Over
       
   
or less
   
months
   
months
   
12 months
   
Total
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
                               
Certificates of deposit less than $100,000
  $ 260,262     $ 301,410     $ 495,181     $ 755,554     $ 1,812,407  
Certificates of deposit of $100,000 or more
    145,625       336,024       194,664       392,406       1,068,719  
Total certificates of deposit
  $ 405,887     $ 637,434     $ 689,845     $ 1,147,960     $ 2,881,126  


 
56

 

Borrowings - During the quarter ended December 31, 2010, $200.0 million of fixed-rate FHLB advances with a weighted average contractual rate of 4.71% matured and were replaced with $200.0 million of fixed-rate FHLB advances with a weighted average contractual interest rate of 2.83% for a weighted average term of 83 months.  Also during the quarter ended December 31, 2010, a maturing $100.0 million repurchase agreement with a contractual rate of 4.23% was replaced with another $100.0 million repurchase agreement with a contractual rate of 3.35% for a term of 84 months.  During the current quarter, a repurchase agreement of $25.0 million matured and was not replaced.

The following table presents the maturity of FHLB advances, at par, and repurchase agreements as of March 31, 2011.  The balance of FHLB advances excludes the deferred gain on the terminated interest rate swaps and the deferred prepayment penalty.  Management will continue to monitor the Bank’s investment opportunities and balance those opportunities with the cost of FHLB advances or other funding sources.
 
 
               
Weighted
   
Weighted
 
   
FHLB
   
Repurchase
   
Average
   
Average
 
Maturity by
 
Advances
   
Agreements
   
Contractual
   
Effective
 
Fiscal year
 
Amount
   
Amount
   
Rate
   
Rate (1)
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
             
2011
  $ 76,000     $ 75,000       4.41 %     4.41 %
2012
    350,000       150,000       3.67       3.67  
2013
    525,000       145,000       3.74       4.00  
2014
    450,000       100,000       3.33       3.96  
2015
    200,000       20,000       3.50       4.16  
2016
    275,000       --       3.86       4.39  
2017
    400,000       --       3.17       3.21  
2018
    100,000       100,000       2.94       2.94  
    $ 2,376,000     $ 590,000       3.55 %     3.83 %

(1)    The effective rate includes the net impact of the amortization of deferred prepayment penalties related to the prepayment of certain FHLB advances and deferred gains related to the termination of interest rate swaps during fiscal year 2008.

The following table presents the maturity of FHLB advances and repurchase agreements for the next four quarters as of March 31, 2011.

         
Weighted
 
         
Average
 
Maturity by
       
Contractual
 
Quarter End
 
Amount
   
Rate
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
June 30, 2011
  $ 25,000       2.79 %
September 30, 2011
    126,000       4.73  
December 31, 2011
    250,000       4.22  
March 31, 2012
    150,000       2.35  
    $ 551,000       3.76 %




 
57

 


Stockholders’ Equity.   Stockholders’ equity increased $964.4 million, from $962.0 million at September 30, 2010 to $1.93 billion at March 31, 2011.  The increase was due primarily to the net stock offering proceeds of $1.13 billion from the corporate reorganization in December 2010, partially offset by dividends paid of $125.9 million.  The $125.9 million consisted of cash dividends of $17.0 million paid prior to the corporate reorganization, and $108.9 million paid since the corporate reorganization.  The $17.0 million consisted of a quarterly dividend of $10.6 million and a special dividend of $6.4 million related to fiscal year 2010 earnings, per the Company’s prior dividend policy.  The $108.9 million consisted of a quarterly dividend of $12.1 million and the one-time special cash dividend (welcome dividend) of $96.8 million.  In April 2011, the Company declared a quarterly cash dividend of $0.075 per share, which will equate to $12.1 million, payable in May 2011.

The following table presents quarterly dividends paid in calendar years 2011, 2010, and 2009.  For the quarter ended June 30, 2011, the amount represents dividends to be paid on May 20, 2011, as approved by the Board of Directors on April 18, 2011, based upon the number of shares outstanding on the record date of May 6, 2011.

   
Calendar Year
 
   
2011
   
2010
   
2009
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
Quarter ended March 31
                 
Total dividends paid
  $ 12,105     $ 10,739     $ 10,437  
Quarter ended June 30
                       
Total dividends paid
    12,105       10,496       10,446  
Quarter ended September 30
                       
Total dividends paid
            10,496       10,448  
Quarter ended December 31
                       
Total dividends paid
            10,597       10,550  
Special year end/welcome dividend
                       
Total dividends paid
    96,838       6,359       6,119  
                         
Calendar year-to-date dividends paid
  $ 121,048     $ 48,687     $ 48,000  


 
58

 

Operating Results

The following table presents selected income statement and other information for the quarters indicated.
 
   
For the Three Months Ended
 
   
March 31,
   
December 31,
   
September 30,
   
June 30,
   
March 31,
 
   
2011
   
2010
   
2010
   
2010
   
2010
 
   
(Dollars in thousands, except per share amounts)
 
Interest and dividend income:
                             
  Loans receivable
  $ 61,554     $ 65,943     $ 68,476     $ 68,990     $ 70,315  
  MBS
    17,320       15,440       15,614       16,864       18,627  
  Investment securities
    4,743       4,775       4,832       4,565       3,726  
  Other interest and dividend income
    1,324       1,089       1,050       1,066       1,039  
    Total interest and dividend income
    84,941       87,247       89,972       91,485       93,707  
                                         
Interest expense:
                                       
  FHLB advances
    21,968       23,131       23,677       24,417       24,299  
  Deposits
    16,069       17,381       18,186       19,149       19,776  
  Other borrowings
    6,348       6,730       6,968       7,032       6,949  
     Total interest expense
    44,385       47,242       48,831       50,598       51,024  
                                         
Provision for credit losses
    520       650       750       1,816       3,200  
                                         
Net interest income
                                       
     (after provision for credit losses)
    40,036       39,355       40,391       39,071       39,483  
                                         
Other income
    6,144       6,317       6,990       7,754       6,536  
Other expenses
    22,855       63,338       23,257       20,624       23,100  
Income tax expense (benefit)
    7,689       (6,408 )     8,677       9,443       8,264  
     Net income (loss)
  $ 15,636     $ (11,258 )   $ 15,447     $ 16,758     $ 14,655  
                                         
Efficiency ratio
    48.94 %     136.73 %     48.32 %     42.40 %     46.93 %
                                         
Basic earnings (loss) per share (1)
  $ 0.10     $ (0.07 )   $ 0.09     $ 0.10     $ 0.09  
Diluted earnings (loss) per share (1)
    0.10       (0.07 )     0.09       0.10       0.09  

 

 
(1)  
 All earnings per share information prior to the corporate reorganization in December 2010 have been revised to reflect the 2.2637 exchange ratio.
 

 
59

 

Comparison of Operating Results for the Six Months Ended March 31, 2011 and 2010

Net income for the six months ended March 31, 2011 was $4.4 million, compared to $35.6 million for the same period in the prior fiscal year.  The $31.2 million decrease in the current period was due primarily to the $40.0 million ($26.0 million, net of income tax benefit) contribution to the Foundation in connection with the corporate reorganization.  Additionally, other income decreased $7.2 million and net interest income decreased $6.9 million between periods. These decreases were partially offset by an $18.1 million decrease in income tax expense and a $5.1 million decrease in provision for credit losses between periods. 

The net interest margin decreased 36 basis points, from 2.14% for the six months ended March 31, 2010 to 1.78% for the six months ended March 31, 2011.  The decrease in the net interest margin was due to an increase in the average balance of interest-earning assets at lower yields compared to the six months ended March 31, 2010. The increase in the average balance of interest-earning assets was primarily a result of the proceeds from the corporate reorganization in December 2010.  The proceeds from the corporate reorganization were initially invested in cash, earning 25 basis points.  The cash was deployed during the current quarter into higher yielding investment securities and MBS.

Interest and Dividend Income
Total interest and dividend income for the six months ended March 31, 2011 was $172.2 million compared to $192.6 million for the six months ended March 31, 2010.  The $20.4 million decrease was primarily a result of decreases in interest income on loans receivable of $17.3 million and MBS of $6.6 million, partially offset by an increase in interest income on investment securities of $3.2 million.

Interest income on loans receivable for the current six month period was $127.5 million compared to $144.8 million for the prior year period.  The $17.3 million decrease in interest income was the result of a $345.3 million decrease in the average balance of the portfolio and a decrease of 32 basis points in the weighted average yield to 4.97% for the period.  The decrease in the average balance was due to principal repayments outpacing originations and purchases between the two periods and a loan swap transaction during the first quarter of fiscal year 2010, where $194.8 million of originated fixed-rate mortgage loans were swapped for MBS.  See additional discussion regarding loan portfolio activity in “Financial Condition – Loans Receivable.”  The decrease in the weighted average yield was due primarily to a significant amount of loan modifications, refinances, and ARM loans repricing between periods.  The decrease in the weighted average yield was also due to principal repayments of loans with higher yields than the remaining portfolio, and originations at market rates which were lower than the existing portfolio.

Interest income on MBS for the current six month period was $32.8 million compared to $39.4 million for the prior year period.  The $6.6 million decrease was a result of a decrease of 60 basis points in the weighted average yield to 3.70% for the current six months and a $58.6 million decrease in the average balance of the portfolio.  The weighted average yield decreased between the two periods due to purchases of MBS at a lower average yield than the existing portfolio between the two periods, adjustable-rate securities repricing to lower market rates, and prepayments on MBS with yields higher than the existing portfolio.  The decrease in the average balance of the portfolio was due to principal repayments which were not replaced in their entirety. 

Interest income on investment securities for the current six month period was $9.5 million compared to $6.3 million for the prior year period.  The $3.2 million increase was primarily a result of an $847.2 million increase in the average balance, partially offset by a decrease in the average yield of 67 basis points to 1.28% for the current six month period.  The increase in the average balance was a result of purchases funded with proceeds from the stock offering, principal repayments from the MBS and loan portfolios, and retail deposits.  The average yield decreased due to purchases at yields lower than the overall portfolio yield, and to calls and maturities of higher yielding securities.

Interest Expense
Interest expense decreased $13.5 million to $91.6 million for the current six month period from $105.1 million for the prior year period.  The decrease in interest expense was due primarily to a decrease in interest expense on the certificate of deposit portfolio and FHLB advances.

Interest expense on deposits for the current six month period was $33.5 million compared to $41.9 million for the prior year period.  The $8.4 million decrease in interest expense on deposits primarily was due to a decrease in the weighted average rate paid on the certificate of deposit portfolio, as the portfolio continued to reprice to lower market rates.  The weighted average rate paid on the certificate of deposit portfolio decreased 74 basis points between the two periods, from 2.84% for the prior year period to 2.10% for the current six month period.  The decrease in interest expense was partially offset by a $343.3 million increase in the average balance of the deposit portfolio, primarily the certificate of deposit and money market portfolios.

 
60

 
Interest expense on FHLB advances for the current six month period was $45.1 million compared to $49.1 million for the prior year period.  The $4.0 million decrease in interest expense on FHLB advances was a result of the refinance and renewal of maturing FHLB advances between the two periods and, to a lesser extent, a decrease in the average balance of $44.1 million primarily due to an advance that matured between periods that was not renewed. 

Provision for Credit Losses
The Bank recorded a provision for credit losses of $1.2 million during the current six month period, compared to a provision of $6.3 million for the six months ended March 31, 2010.   The provision recorded in the current six month period was a result of the increase in and establishment of SVAs, primarily on purchased loans.  The $5.1 million decrease in the provision was related primarily to the increase in certain loss factors in the general valuation allowance model in the prior year with no similar adjustments in the current fiscal year. 

Other Income and Expense
Total other income was $12.5 million for the current six month period compared to $19.7 million for the prior year period.  The $7.2 million decrease was due primarily to no gains on the sale of securities in the current six month period compared to $6.5 million of gains in the prior six month period.  To a lesser extent, there was a decrease in retail fees of $1.4 million related to a decrease in overdraft charges as a result of Regulation E. 

In response to amendments to Regulation E by the Federal Reserve Board, which prohibit a financial institution from charging consumers fees for paying overdrafts on ATM and one-time debit card transactions unless the consumer consents or opts-in to this service, the Bank informed eligible accountholders of their options for handling these overdrafts and made related changes to its overdraft fee schedule during the fourth quarter of fiscal year 2010.  As a result of the new fee schedule and the number of customers who elected to opt-in or opt-out, the Bank estimates, from the level of fees collected in the June 30, 2010 quarter, that its overdraft fee income will be reduced by approximately $3.3 million annually.  Management is analyzing the Bank’s deposit account fee structure and plans to make adjustments to the structure during fiscal year 2011 to mitigate the reduction in fee income.  It is unlikely, however, that all of the lost revenue will be recovered.

Total other expenses for the six months ended March 31, 2011 were $86.2 million, compared to $45.9 million in the prior year period.  The $40.3 million increase was due to a $40.0 million cash contribution to the Foundation in connection with the corporate reorganization.  Other expenses, net increased $2.9 million related to REO operations and an impairment and valuation allowance taken on the mortgage-servicing rights asset. 

Effective October 31, 2010, the Bank discontinued its debit card rewards program.  The discontinuation of the program is estimated to result in a $1.5 million decrease in advertising and promotional expense for fiscal year 2011 compared to the prior fiscal year. 

In February 2011, the FDIC adopted a new assessment structure for insured institutions.  One of the significant changes includes using average total consolidated assets minus average tangible equity for the assessment base instead of average deposits and secured liabilities for the period.  It is estimated the Bank will realize a reduction in its deposit insurance assessment of $2.9 million annually, beginning April 1, 2011.  Pursuant to the Dodd-Frank Act, the FDIC has established 2.0% as the designated reserve ratio (“DRR”), that is, the ratio of the Deposit Insurance Fund to the insured deposit base.  The FDIC has adopted a plan under which it will meet the statutory minimum DRR of 1.35% by September 30, 2020, the deadline imposed by the Dodd-Frank Act.  The Dodd-Frank Act requires that institutions with assets of more than $10 billion bear the effect of the increase in the statutory minimum DRR to 1.35%, from the former statutory minimum of 1.15%.  Although the Bank had less than $10 billion in assets as of March 31, 2011, in the event the Bank’s asset size grows to at least $10 billion for four consecutive quarters, the effect of this provision of the Dodd-Frank Act may be to increase the Bank’s cost of deposit insurance relative to institutions with less than $10 billion in assets. 

A provision of the Dodd-Frank Act, commonly referred to as the “Durbin Amendment,” directed the Federal Reserve Board to analyze the debit card payments system and fix the interchange rates based upon actual costs.  The Federal Reserve Board has issued for comment its proposal to establish the interchange rate for all debit transactions at $0.12 each.  The final rule, if adopted, will take effect on July 21, 2011.  As a result of the high volume of comments received on the proposal, the Federal Reserve was unable to meet the April 21 deadline for issuing a final debit card interchange rule, but the provision’s effective date remains July 21, 2011.  The amount proposed by the Federal Reserve Board reflects only their estimate of the actual processing costs for the transactions, and does not include any margins for technology investments or credit losses in the system.  The Durbin Amendment also has been challenged in Federal District Court on the grounds of being unconstitutional, and a hearing is pending.  Based upon the Federal Reserve Board’s proposed interchange rate and the Bank’s transaction volume in fiscal year 2010, it is estimated that the Bank’s related fee income will be reduced by $4.0 million annually from current levels, if the final rule is adopted as proposed.

 
61

 
Income Tax Expense
Income tax expense for the current six month period was $1.3 million compared to $19.4 million for the prior year six month period.  The decrease in income tax expense between the periods was primarily a result of the $40.0 million contribution to the Foundation, which resulted in $14.0 million of income tax benefit.  The income tax benefit was recorded on the pretax loss due to the fact that the Company believes it will more than likely be able to utilize the $40.0 million contribution to the Foundation through current federal income tax deductions and those available within the five-year carryforward period.  The Company files a consolidated Kansas corporate income tax return, which includes the Company and Capitol Funds, Inc., but not the Bank.  The Bank files a Kansas privilege tax return.  The Company concluded at March 31, 2011 that it is not more likely than not that the contribution will be utilized on the Kansas corporate income tax return because the Bank’s earnings are not included in the Kansas corporate income tax return; therefore a valuation allowance has been established for the entire state income tax benefit.  The effective income tax rate for the current six month period was 22.6% compared to 35.3% for the prior year six month period.  The decrease in the effective tax rate between periods was due primarily to a $686 thousand tax return to tax provision adjustment related to income tax expense recognized in the prior years.  Excluding that adjustment, the effective income tax rate would have been 34.8% for the current six month period.  The remaining difference between the effective income tax rates was due primarily to an increase in deductible expenses associated with the ESOP in the current fiscal year as a result of the new ESOP loan and the $0.60 per share welcome dividend paid in March 2011.  Due to pre-tax income being lower than the prior year, all of the items impacting the income tax rate had a larger impact to the overall effective tax rate than in the prior year.  Management anticipates the effective tax rate for the current fiscal year and fiscal year 2012 to be approximately 33% and 36%, respectively.


 
62

 

Average Balance Sheet
The following table presents the average balances of our assets, liabilities and stockholders’ equity and the related annualized yields and rates on our interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities for the periods indicated and the weighted average yield/rate on our interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities at March 31, 2011.  Average yields are derived by dividing annualized income by the average balance of the related assets and average rates are derived by dividing annualized expense by the average balance of the related liabilities, for the periods shown.  Average outstanding balances are derived from average daily balances.  The yields and rates include amortization of fees, costs, premiums and discounts which are considered adjustments to yields/rates. Yields on tax-exempt securities were not calculated on a tax-equivalent basis.
 
 
   
At
   
For the Six Months Ended
 
   
March 31, 2011
   
March 31, 2011
   
March 31, 2010
 
         
Average
   
Interest
         
Average
   
Interest
       
   
Yield/
   
Outstanding
   
Earned/
   
Yield/
   
Outstanding
   
Earned/
   
Yield/
 
   
Rate
   
Balance
   
Paid
   
Rate
   
Balance
   
Paid
   
Rate
 
Assets:
       
(Dollars in thousands)
 
  Interest-earning assets:
                                         
     Loans receivable (1)
    4.99 %   $ 5,134,193     $ 127,497       4.97 %   $ 5,479,475     $ 144,841       5.29 %
     MBS (2)
    3.44       1,771,375       32,760       3.70       1,829,990       39,381       4.30  
     Investment securities (2)(3)
    1.17       1,492,469       9,518       1.28       645,267       6,285       1.95  
     Capital stock of FHLB
    2.94       121,322       1,785       2.95       133,570       1,986       2.98  
     Cash and cash equivalents
    0.24       509,407       628       0.25       86,297       101       0.23  
  Total interest-earning assets (1) (2)
    3.80       9,028,766       172,188       3.81       8,174,599       192,594       4.71  
  Other noninterest-earning assets
            237,487                       230,111                  
Total assets
          $ 9,266,253                     $ 8,404,710                  
                                                         
Liabilities and stockholders' equity:
                                                       
  Interest-bearing liabilities:
                                                       
    Checking
    0.08 %   $ 501,810     $ 219       0.09 %   $ 457,439     $ 319       0.14 %
    Savings
    0.52       238,056       631       0.53       228,352       678       0.60  
    Money market
    0.54       993,382       2,858       0.58       886,205       3,336       0.75  
    Certificates
    1.96       2,834,225       29,742       2.10       2,652,159       37,548       2.84  
      Total deposits
    1.36       4,567,473       33,450       1.47       4,224,155       41,881       1.99  
    FHLB advances (4)
    3.80       2,349,838       45,099       3.85       2,393,945       49,118       4.11  
    Repurchase agreements
    3.93       612,115       12,250       3.96       660,000       13,238       3.97  
    Other borrowings
    3.05       53,609       828       3.05       53,609       820       3.03  
     Total borrowings
    3.81       3,015,562       58,177       3.86       3,107,554       63,176       4.06  
  Total interest-bearing liabilities
    2.31       7,583,035       91,627       2.42       7,331,709       105,057       2.87  
  Other noninterest-bearing liabilities
            135,540                       121,166                  
  Stockholders' equity
            1,547,678                       951,835                  
Total liabilities and stockholders' equity
          $ 9,266,253                     $ 8,404,710                  
                                                         
                                                   
(Continued)
 

 
63

 
                                           
                                           
   
At
   
For the Six Months Ended
 
   
March 31, 2011
   
March 31, 2011
   
March 31, 2010
 
         
Average
   
Interest
         
Average
   
Interest
       
   
Yield/
   
Outstanding
   
Earned/
   
Yield/
   
Outstanding
   
Earned/
   
Yield/
 
   
Rate
   
Balance
   
Paid
   
Rate
   
Balance
   
Paid
   
Rate
 
         
(Dollars in thousands)
 
                                           
Net interest income (5)
              $ 80,561                 $ 87,537        
Net interest rate spread (6)
    1.49 %                   1.39 %                   1.84 %
Net interest-earning assets
          $ 1,445,731                     $ 842,890                  
Net interest margin (7)
                            1.78                       2.14  
Ratio of interest-earning assets
                                                       
      to interest-bearing liabilities
                            1.19                       1.11  
                                                         
Selected Performance Ratios:
                                                       
  Return on average assets (annualized)
                            0.09 %                     0.85 %
  Return on average equity (annualized)
                            0.57                       7.49  
  Average equity to average assets
                            16.70                       11.33  
                                                   
(Concluded)
 

 
(1)   Calculated net of unearned loan fees and deferred costs, and undisbursed loan funds.  Non-accruing loans are included in the loans receivable average balance with a yield of zero percent. Balances include LHFS.
 
(2)   MBS and investment securities classified as AFS are stated at amortized cost, adjusted for unamortized purchase premiums or discounts.
 
(3)   The average balance of investment securities includes an average balance of nontaxable securities of $66.5 million and $71.9 million for the period ended March 31, 2011 and March 31, 2010, respectively.
 
(4)   FHLB advances are stated net of deferred gains and deferred prepayment penalties.
 
(5) Net interest income represents the difference between interest income earned on interest-earning assets, such as mortgage loans, investment securities, and MBS, and interest paid on interest-bearing liabilities, such as deposits, FHLB advances, and other borrowings.  Net interest income depends on the balance of interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities, and the interest rates earned or paid on them.
 
(6) Net interest rate spread represents the difference between the average yield on interest-earning assets and the average cost of interest-bearing liabilities.
 
(7)   Net interest margin represents net interest income as a percentage of average interest-earning assets.
 


 
64

 


Rate/Volume Analysis
The table below presents the dollar amount of changes in interest income and interest expense for major components of interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities, comparing the six months ended March 31, 2011 to the six months ended March 31, 2010.  For each category of interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities, information is provided on changes attributable to (1) changes in volume, which are changes in the average balance multiplied by the previous year’s average rate and (2) changes in rate, which are changes in the average rate multiplied by the average balance from the previous year.  The net changes attributable to the combined impact of both rate and volume have been allocated proportionately to the changes due to volume and the changes due to rate.
   
For the Six Months Ended
 
   
March 31, 2011 vs. March 31, 2010
 
   
Increase (Decrease) Due to
 
                   
   
Volume
   
Rate
   
Total
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
Interest-earning assets:
                 
Loans receivable
  $ (8,959 )   $ (8,385 )   $ (17,344 )
MBS
    (1,236 )     (5,385 )     (6,621 )
Investment securities
    5,989       (2,756 )     3,233  
Capital stock of FHLB
    (181 )     (20 )     (201 )
Cash and cash equivalents
    518       9       527  
Total interest-earning assets
    (3,869 )     (16,537 )     (20,406 )
                         
Interest-bearing liabilities:
                       
Checking
    29       (123 )     (94 )
Savings
    28       (82 )     (54 )
Money market
    371       (810 )     (439 )
Certificates
    2,457       (10,301 )     (7,844 )
FHLB advances
    (945 )     (3,074 )     (4,019 )
Other borrowings
    (952 )     (28 )     (980 )
Total interest-bearing liabilities
    988       (14,418 )     (13,430 )
                         
Net change in net interest income
  $ (4,857 )   $ (2,119 )   $ (6,976 )


Comparison of Operating Results for the Three Months Ended March 31, 2011 and 2010

For the quarter ended March 31, 2011, the Company recognized net income of $15.6 million, compared to net income of $14.7 million for the same period in the prior fiscal year.  The $981 thousand increase in net income was due primarily to a decrease in the provision for credit losses of $2.7 million, partially offset by a $2.1 million decrease in net interest income. 

The net interest margin for the current quarter was 1.70% compared to 2.09% for the same period in the prior fiscal year.  The 39 basis point decrease in the net interest margin was due primarily to an increase in the average balance of interest-earning assets at lower yields compared to the prior year quarter.   The increase in the average balance of interest-earning assets was primarily a result of the proceeds from the corporate reorganization in December 2010, which were initially invested in cash, earning 25 basis points.   The cash was deployed during the current quarter into higher yielding investment securities and MBS.  The full impact of the investment securities and MBS purchases will be reflected in the net interest margin for the quarter ending June 30, 2011.  Additionally, the net interest margin was reduced by approximately five basis points in the current quarter as a result of net deferred premium recognition related to loan modifications.  Management anticipates the net interest margin will improve during the June 30, 2011 quarter as compared to the March 31, 2011 quarter due to the investment of the stock offering proceeds into securities during the current quarter, fewer loan modifications and refinances in the current quarter, and a reduced level of net deferred fee/premium recognition.


 
65

 
Interest and Dividend Income
Total interest and dividend income for the current quarter was $84.9 million compared to $93.7 million for the quarter ended March 31, 2010.  The $8.8 million decrease was primarily a result of a decrease in interest income on loans receivable.

Interest income on loans receivable for the current quarter was $61.5 million compared to $70.3 million for the prior year quarter.  The $8.8 million decrease in interest income was due to a $275.6 million decrease in the average balance of the portfolio, and a 41 basis point decrease in the weighted average yield to 4.80% for the current quarter.  The decrease in the average balance was due to principal repayments outpacing originations and purchases between the two periods.  See additional discussion regarding loan portfolio activity in “Financial Condition – Loans Receivable.”  The decrease in the weighted average yield was due primarily to a significant amount of loan modifications, refinances, and ARM loans repricing between periods, and, to a lesser extent, principal repayments of loans with higher yields than the remaining portfolio, and originations at market rates which were lower than the existing portfolio.  Additionally, net deferred premium recognition related to modifications resulted in a one-time eight basis point decrease in the weighted average yield of the loan portfolio during the current quarter.

Interest income on MBS for the current quarter was $17.3 million compared to $18.6 million for the prior year quarter.  The $1.3 million decrease was a result of a 64 basis point decrease in the weighted average yield to 3.57% for the current quarter, partially offset by a $172.7 million increase in the average balance of the portfolio.  The decrease in the weighted average yield between the two periods was due primarily to purchases of MBS at a lower average yield than the existing portfolio between the two periods and repayments on MBS with yields higher than the remaining portfolio.

Interest income on investment securities for the current quarter was $4.7 million compared to $3.7 million for the prior year quarter.  The $1.0 million increase was due to an $870.1 million increase in the average balance of the portfolio, partially offset by a 78 basis point decrease in the weighted average yield to 1.16% for the current quarter.  The increase in the average balance was a result of purchases funded with proceeds from the stock offering, principal repayments from the MBS and loan portfolios, and retail deposits.  The decrease in the weighted average yield of the portfolio was attributed to purchases made at lower market yields than the overall portfolio yield and to maturities and calls of securities with yields greater than the remaining portfolio.

Interest income on cash and cash equivalents was $441 thousand for the current quarter compared to $54 thousand for the prior year quarter.  The $387 thousand increase was a result of an increase in the average balance due to the proceeds from the stock offering remaining in cash until they were invested in investment securities and MBS during the current quarter.  As of March 31, 2011, all proceeds from the stock offering had been invested in securities.

Interest Expense
Total interest expense decreased $6.6 million to $44.4 million for the current quarter from $51.0 million for the prior year quarter.  The decrease in interest expense was due primarily to a $3.7 million decrease in interest expense on deposits and a $2.3 million decrease in interest expense on FHLB advances.

Interest expense on deposits for the current quarter was $16.1 million compared to $19.8 million for the prior year quarter.  The $3.7 million decrease in interest expense on deposits was due primarily to a decrease in the weighted average rate paid on the certificate of deposit portfolio, as the portfolio continued to reprice to lower market rates.  The weighted average rate paid on the certificate of deposit portfolio decreased 73 basis points between the two periods, from 2.73% for the prior year quarter to 2.00% for the current quarter.  The decrease in interest expense was partially offset by a $422.4 million increase in the average balance of the deposit portfolio, primarily the certificate of deposit portfolio.

Interest expense on FHLB advances for the current quarter was $22.0 million compared to $24.3 million for the prior year quarter.  The $2.3 million decrease in interest expense on FHLB advances was due primarily to a 32 basis point decrease in the weighted average rate, due to the refinance and renewal of maturing FHLB advances between the two periods, at rates lower than the existing advances.  To a lesser extent, the decrease in interest expense on FHLB advances was due to a $44.1 million decrease in the average balance due to maturing advances that were not renewed.

Provision for Credit Losses
The Company recorded a provision for credit losses of $520 thousand during the current quarter, compared to a provision of $3.2 million for the prior year quarter.  The provision recorded in the current quarter was due primarily to the increase in and establishment of SVAs, primarily on purchased loans.


 
66

 


Other Income and Expense
Total other income was $6.1 million for the current quarter compared to $6.5 million for the prior year quarter.  The $392 thousand decrease was due primarily to a decrease in retail fees partially offset by an increase in income from BOLI.  The decrease in retail fees was due primarily to a decrease in overdraft fees due to Regulation E.

Other Income and Expense
Total other expense was $22.9 million for the current quarter compared to $23.1 million for the prior year quarter.  The slight decrease was due primarily to a reduction in the FDIC insurance premium of $717 thousand and a decrease in advertising and promotional expense of $644 thousand, partially offset by an increase in other expense, net of $630 thousand.  The decrease in the FDIC insurance premium was due primarily to a reduction in the total base assessment rate as a result of the proceeds received from the stock conversion.  The proceeds received resulted in an increase in capital and intercompany deposits at the Bank, which favorably impacted both the unsecured debt adjustment and secured liability adjustment, which are components of the total base assessment rate.  The decrease in advertising and promotional expense was due largely to the discontinuation of the debit card rewards program.  Other expenses, net increased $630 thousand primarily due to REO operations.

Income Tax Expense
Income tax expense was $7.7 million for the current quarter, compared to $8.3 million for the prior year quarter.  The decrease in income tax expense was due primarily to a $686 thousand tax provision to tax return adjustment that reduced income tax expense.  The adjustment related to income tax expense recognized in prior years.  The effective tax rate for the current quarter was 33.0% compared to 36.1% for the prior year quarter.  The decrease in the effective income tax rate between quarters was due primarily to an increase in deductible expenses associated with the ESOP in the current fiscal year as a result of the new ESOP loan and the $0.60 per share welcome dividend paid in March 2011 and a decrease in income tax expense due to a tax return to tax provision adjustment related to income tax expense recognized in prior years.



 
67

 
Average Balance Sheet
As mentioned above, average yields are derived by dividing annualized income by the average balance of the related assets and average rates are derived by dividing annualized expense by the average balance of the related liabilities, for the periods shown.  Average outstanding balances are derived from average daily balances.  The yields and rates include amortization of fees, costs, premiums and discounts which are considered adjustments to yields/rates. Yields on tax-exempt securities were not calculated on a tax-equivalent basis.

   
For the Three Months Ended
 
   
March 31, 2011
   
March 31, 2010
 
   
Average
   
Interest
         
Average
   
Interest
       
   
Outstanding
   
Earned/
   
Yield/
   
Outstanding
   
Earned/
   
Yield/
 
   
Balance
   
Paid
   
Rate
   
Balance
   
Paid
   
Rate
 
Assets:
 
(Dollars in thousands)
 
  Interest-earning assets:
                                   
     Loans receivable (1)
  $ 5,130,904     $ 61,554       4.80 %   $ 5,406,480     $ 70,315       5.21 %
     MBS (2)
    1,943,172       17,320       3.57       1,770,456       18,627       4.21  
     Investment securities (2)(3)
    1,638,448       4,743       1.16       768,355       3,726       1.94  
     Capital stock of FHLB
    121,778       883       2.94       134,075       985       2.98  
     Cash and cash equivalents
    721,407       441       0.25       92,335       54       0.23  
  Total interest-earning assets
    9,555,709       84,941       3.56       8,171,701       93,707       4.59  
  Other noninterest-earning assets
    234,608                       235,009                  
Total assets
  $ 9,790,317                     $ 8,406,710                  
                                                 
Liabilities and stockholders' equity:
                                               
  Interest-bearing liabilities:
                                               
    Checking
  $ 512,707     $ 105       0.08 %   $ 468,054     $ 143       0.12 %
    Savings
    240,843       312       0.53       230,922       317       0.55  
    Money market
    1,021,935       1,413       0.56       905,599       1,596       0.71  
    Certificates
    2,888,322       14,239       2.00       2,636,843       17,720       2.73  
      Total deposits
    4,663,807       16,069       1.40       4,241,418       19,776       1.89  
    FHLB advances (4)
    2,350,722       21,968       3.79       2,394,774       24,299       4.11  
    Repurchase agreements
    609,167       5,939       3.90       660,000       6,546       3.97  
    Other borrowings
    53,609       409       3.05       53,609       403       3.00  
     Total borrowings
    3,013,498       28,316       3.80       3,108,383       31,248       4.06  
  Total interest-bearing liabilities
    7,677,305       44,385       2.34       7,349,801       51,024       2.81  
  Other noninterest-bearing liabilities
    96,596                       104,923                  
  Stockholders' equity
    2,016,416                       951,986                  
Total liabilities and stockholders' equity
  $ 9,790,317                     $ 8,406,710                  
                                   
 
      (Continued)   

 
68

 
 
   
For the Three Months Ended
 
   
March 31, 2011
   
March 31, 2010
 
   
Average
   
Interest
         
Average
   
Interest
       
   
Outstanding
   
Earned/
   
Yield/
   
Outstanding
   
Earned/
   
Yield/
 
   
Balance
   
Paid
   
Rate
   
Balance
   
Paid
   
Rate
 
                                                     (Dollars in thousands)    
                                     
Net interest income (5)
        $ 40,556                 $ 42,683        
Net interest rate spread (6)
                  1.22 %                   1.78 %
Net interest-earning assets
  $ 1,878,404                     $ 821,900                  
Net interest margin (7)
                    1.70                       2.09  
Ratio of interest-earning assets
                                               
      to interest-bearing liabilities
                    1.24                       1.11  
                                                 
Selected performance ratios:
                                               
  Return on average assets (annualized)
                    0.64 %                     0.70 %
  Return on average equity (annualized)
                    3.10                       6.16  
  Average equity to average assets
                    20.60                       11.32  
 
(Concluded)

(1)   Calculated net of unearned loan fees and deferred costs, and undisbursed loan funds.  Non-accruing loans are included in the loans receivable average balance with a yield of zero percent. Balances include LHFS.
 
(2)   MBS and investment securities classified as AFS are stated at amortized cost, adjusted for unamortized purchase premiums or discounts.
 
(3)   The average balance of investment securities includes an average balance of nontaxable securities of $64.5 million and $72.2 million for the quarters ended March 31, 2011 and March 31, 2010, respectively.
 
(4)   FHLB advances are stated net of deferred gains and deferred prepayment penalties.
 
(5) Net interest income represents the difference between interest income earned on interest-earning assets, such as mortgage loans, investment securities, and MBS, and interest paid on interest-bearing liabilities, such as deposits, FHLB advances, and other borrowings.  Net interest income depends on the balance of interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities, and the interest rates earned or paid on them.
 
(6) Net interest rate spread represents the difference between the average yield on interest-earning assets and the average cost of interest-bearing liabilities.
 
(7)   Net interest margin represents net interest income as a percentage of average interest-earning assets.
 

 

 



 
69

 

Rate/Volume Analysis
The table below presents the dollar amount of changes in interest income and interest expense for major components of interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities, comparing the quarter ended March 31, 2011 to the quarter ended March 31, 2010.  For each category of interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities, information is provided on changes attributable to (1) changes in volume, which are changes in the average balance multiplied by the previous year’s average rate and (2) changes in rate, which are changes in the average rate multiplied by the average balance from the previous year.  The net changes attributable to the combined impact of both rate and volume have been allocated proportionately to the changes due to volume and the changes due to rate.

   
Quarter Ended March 31,
 
   
2011 vs. 2010
 
   
Increase (Decrease) Due to
 
                   
   
Volume
   
Rate
   
Total
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
Interest-earning assets:
                 
Loans receivable
  $ (3,509 )   $ (5,252 )   $ (8,761 )
MBS
    1,704       (3,011 )     (1,307 )
Investment securities
    2,962       (1,945 )     1,017  
Capital stock of FHLB
    (89 )     (13 )     (102 )
Cash equivalents
    382       5       387  
Total interest-earning assets
    1,450       (10,216 )     (8,766 )
                         
Interest-bearing liabilities:
                       
Checking
    13       (50 )     (37 )
Savings
    13       (12 )     1  
Money market
    191       (365 )     (174 )
Certificates
    1,611       (5,108 )     (3,497 )
FHLB advances
    (465 )     (1,866 )     (2,331 )
Other borrowings
    (494 )     (107 )     (601 )
Total interest-bearing liabilities
    869       (7,508 )     (6,639 )
                         
Net change in net interest income
  $ 581     $ (2,708 )   $ (2,127 )



Comparison of Operating Results for the Three Months Ended March 31, 2011 and December 31, 2010

For the quarter ended March 31, 2011, the Company recognized net income of $15.6 million, compared to a net loss of $11.3 million for the quarter ended December 31, 2010.  The $26.9 million increase between periods was due primarily to a $40.0 million ($26.0 million, net of related income tax benefit) contribution made to the Foundation during the prior quarter.

The net interest margin for the current quarter was 1.70% compared to 1.88% for the quarter ended December 31, 2010.  The 18 basis point decrease in the net interest margin was due primarily to an increase in the average balance of interest-earning assets at lower yields compared to the prior quarter.   The proceeds from the corporate reorganization in late December 2010 were initially invested in cash, which earned 25 basis points.  The cash was deployed during the current quarter into higher yielding investment securities and MBS.  The full impact of the investment securities and MBS purchases will be reflected in the net interest margin for the quarter ending June 30, 2011.  Additionally, the net interest margin was reduced by approximately five basis points in the current quarter as a result of net deferred premium recognition related to loan modifications.  Management anticipates the net interest margin will improve during the June 30, 2011 quarter as compared to the March 31, 2011 quarter due to the investment of the stock offering proceeds into securities during the current quarter, fewer loan modifications and refinances in the current quarter, and a reduced level of net deferred fee/premium recognition.

 
70

 
Interest and Dividend Income
Total interest and dividend income for the current quarter was $84.9 million compared to $87.2 million for the quarter ended December 31, 2010.  The $2.3 million decrease was primarily a result of a $4.3 million decrease in interest income on loans receivable, partially offset by a $1.9 million increase in interest income on MBS.

Interest income on loans receivable for the current quarter was $61.5 million compared to $65.9 million for the quarter ended December 31, 2010.  The $4.4 million decrease in interest income was due primarily to a 33 basis point decrease in the weighted average yield to 4.80% for the current quarter and, to a lesser extent, a $6.5 million decrease in the average balance of the portfolio.  The decrease in the weighted average yield was largely due to modifications and refinances and the related net deferred fee recognition, along with ARMs repricing to lower market rates.  The rate change impact of loans that modified or refinanced in the prior quarter was primarily reflected in the yield in the current quarter.  The net deferred fee recognition in the prior quarter was related to net discounts, which caused the yield to increase for the quarter ended December 31, 2010.  The net deferred premium recognition in the current quarter resulted in a one-time eight basis point decrease in the weighted average yield.

Interest income on MBS for the current quarter was $17.3 million compared to $15.4 million for the quarter ended December 31, 2010.  The $1.9 million increase was a result of a $340.0 million increase in the average balance of the portfolio as a portion of the proceeds received from the stock offering were used to purchase MBS, partially offset by a 28 basis point decrease in the weighted average yield due to purchases of MBS at a lower average yield than the existing portfolio.

Interest income on cash and cash equivalents was $441 thousand for the current quarter compared to $187 thousand for the December 31, 2010 quarter.  The $254 thousand increase was a result of an increase in the average balance due to the proceeds from the stock offering remaining in cash until they were invested in investment securities and MBS during the current quarter.  As of March 31, 2011, all proceeds from the stock offering had been invested in securities.

Interest Expense
Total interest expense decreased $2.8 million to $44.4 million for the current quarter from $47.2 million for the quarter ended December 31, 2010.  The decrease was due primarily to a $1.3 million decrease in interest expense on deposits as well as to a $1.2 million decrease in interest expense on FHLB advances.  The decrease in interest expense on deposits was due primarily to a decrease in the weighted average rate on the certificate of deposit portfolio, as well as two fewer days of interest expense in the current quarter compared to the prior quarter.  The decrease in the weighted average rate on the certificate of deposit portfolio was due to a $199.0 million retail certificate of deposit earning 0.05% and due to continued portfolio repricing.  The decrease in interest expense on FHLB advances was primarily a result of the renewal of $200.0 million of maturing FHLB advances during the December 31, 2010 quarter at rates lower than the maturing advances.

Provision for Credit Losses
The Company recorded a provision for credit losses of $520 thousand for the current quarter, compared to a provision of $650 thousand for the quarter ended December 31, 2010.  The provision recorded in the current quarter was due primarily to the increase in and establishment of SVAs, primarily on purchased loans.

Other Income and Expense
Total other income was $6.1 million for the current quarter compared to $6.3 million for the quarter ended December 31, 2010.  The $173 thousand decrease was due primarily to a $382 thousand decrease in retail fees and charges due to a decline in debit card activity and customer overdraft charges, partially offset by a $172 increase in income from BOLI due to an increase in the net crediting rate of the underlying investments.

Total other expense was $22.9 million for the current quarter compared to $63.3 million for the quarter ended December 31, 2010.  The $40.4 million decrease in other expenses is relative to the prior quarter inclusion of a $40.0 million contribution made to the Foundation.  Additionally, salaries and employee benefits increased $1.1 million, federal insurance premium decreased $730 thousand, and other expenses, net, decreased $664 thousand for the current quarter compared to the quarter ended December 31, 2010.  The increase in salaries and employee benefits was due primarily to an increase in ESOP compensation expense associated with dividends paid on unallocated ESOP shares in excess of the required ESOP annual loan payment as a result of the new ESOP loan and the $0.60 per share welcome dividend paid in March 2011.  The decrease in the FDIC insurance premium was due primarily to a reduction in the total base assessment rate as a result of the proceeds received from the stock conversion.  The proceeds received resulted in an increase in capital and intercompany deposits at the Bank, which favorably impacted both the unsecured debt adjustment and secured liability adjustment, which are components of the total base assessment rate.  The decrease in other expenses, net, was due primarily to mortgage servicing asset impairments and valuation allowances recorded during the quarter ended December 31, 2010 due to an increase in prepayment speeds.

 
71

 
Income Tax (Benefit) Expense
Income tax expense was $7.7 million for the current quarter, compared to a $6.4 million income tax benefit for the quarter ended December 31, 2010.  The income tax benefit for the quarter ended December 31, 2010 was due primarily to the $40.0 million contribution to the Foundation which resulted in a $14.0 million income tax benefit.  The effective tax rate for the current quarter was 33.0% compared to 36.3% for the quarter ended December 31, 2010.  The decrease in the effective tax rate between periods was due primarily to an increase in deductible expenses in the current quarter associated with the ESOP as a result the $0.60 per share welcome dividend paid in March 2011 and a decrease in income tax expense in the current quarter due to a tax return to tax provision adjustment related to income tax expense recognized in prior years.

 
72

 


Average Balance Sheet
As mentioned above, average yields are derived by dividing annualized income by the average balance of the related assets and average rates are derived by dividing annualized expense by the average balance of the related liabilities, for the periods shown.  Average outstanding balances are derived from average daily balances.  The yields and rates include amortization of fees, costs, premiums and discounts which are considered adjustments to yields/rates. Yields on tax-exempt securities were not calculated on a tax-equivalent basis.
   
For the Three Months Ended
 
   
March 31, 2011
   
December 31, 2010
 
   
Average
   
Interest
         
Average
   
Interest
       
   
Outstanding
   
Earned/
   
Yield/
   
Outstanding
   
Earned/
   
Yield/
 
   
Balance
   
Paid
   
Rate
   
Balance
   
Paid
   
Rate
 
Assets:
 
(Dollars in thousands)
 
  Interest-earning assets:
                                   
     Loans receivable (1)
  $ 5,130,904     $ 61,554       4.80 %   $ 5,137,410     $ 65,943       5.13 %
     MBS (2)
    1,943,172       17,320       3.57       1,603,313       15,440       3.85  
     Investment securities (2)(3)
    1,638,448       4,743       1.16       1,349,664       4,775       1.42  
     Capital stock of FHLB
    121,778       883       2.94       120,876       902       2.96  
     Cash and cash equivalents
    721,407       441       0.25       302,015       187       0.25  
  Total interest-earning assets
    9,555,709       84,941       3.56       8,513,278       87,247       4.10  
  Other noninterest-earning assets
    234,608                       240,303                  
Total assets
  $ 9,790,317                     $ 8,753,581                  
                                                 
Liabilities and stockholders' equity:
                                               
  Interest-bearing liabilities:
                                               
    Checking
  $ 512,707     $ 105       0.08 %   $ 491,149     $ 115       0.09 %
    Savings
    240,843       312       0.53       235,329       319       0.54  
    Money market
    1,021,935       1,413       0.56       965,449       1,445       0.59  
    Certificates
    2,888,322       14,239       2.00       2,781,305       15,502       2.21  
      Total deposits
    4,663,807       16,069       1.40       4,473,232       17,381       1.54  
    FHLB advances (4)
    2,350,722       21,968       3.79       2,348,973       23,131       3.91  
    Repurchase agreements
    609,167       5,939       3.90       615,000       6,311       4.02  
    Other borrowings
    53,609       409       3.05       53,609       419       3.05  
     Total borrowings
    3,013,498       28,316       3.80       3,017,582       29,861       3.92  
  Total interest-bearing liabilities
    7,677,305       44,385       2.34       7,490,814       47,242       2.50  
  Other noninterest-bearing liabilities
    96,596                       173,636                  
  Stockholders' equity
    2,016,416                       1,089,131                  
Total liabilities and stockholders' equity
  $ 9,790,317                     $ 8,753,581                  
                                                 
Net interest income (5)
          $ 40,556                     $ 40,005          
Net interest rate spread (6)
                    1.22 %                     1.60 %
Net interest-earning assets
  $ 1,878,404                     $ 1,022,464                  
Net interest margin (7)
                    1.70                       1.88  
Ratio of interest-earning assets
                                               
      to interest-bearing liabilities
                    1.24                       1.14  
                                                 
Selected performance ratios:
                                               
  Return on average assets (annualized)
                    0.64 %                     (0.51 ) %
  Return on average equity (annualized)
                    3.10                       (4.13 )
  Average equity to average assets
                    20.60                       12.44  

 

 
73

 


(1) Calculated net of unearned loan fees and deferred costs, and undisbursed loan funds.  Non-accruing loans are included in the loans receivable average balance with a yield of zero percent. Balance includes mortgage LHFS.
 
(2) MBS and investment securities classified as AFS are stated at amortized cost, adjusted for unamortized purchase premiums or discounts.
 
(3) The average balance of investment securities includes an average balance of nontaxable securities of $64.5 million and $68.4 million for the quarters ended March 31, 2011 and December 31, 2010, respectively.
 
(4) FHLB advances are stated net of deferred gains and deferred prepayment penalties.
 
(5) Net interest income represents the difference between interest income earned on interest-earning assets, such as mortgage loans, investment securities, and MBS, and interest paid on interest-bearing liabilities, such as deposits, FHLB advances, and other borrowings.  Net interest income depends on the balance of interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities, and the interest rates earned or paid on them.
 
(6) Net interest rate spread represents the difference between the average yield on interest-earning assets and the average cost of interest-bearing liabilities.
 
(7) Net interest margin represents net interest income as a percentage of average interest-earning assets.
 

 

 
Rate/Volume Analysis
 
The table below presents the dollar amount of changes in interest income and interest expense for major components of interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities, comparing the quarter ended March 31, 2011 to the quarter ended December 31, 2010.  For each category of interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities, information is provided on changes attributable to (1) changes in volume, which are changes in the average balance multiplied by the previous year’s average rate and (2) changes in rate, which are changes in the average rate multiplied by the average balance from the previous year.  The net changes attributable to the combined impact of both rate and volume have been allocated proportionately to the changes due to volume and the changes due to rate.

   
Quarter Ended
 
   
March 31, 2011 vs. December 31, 2010
 
   
Increase (Decrease) Due to
 
                   
   
Volume
   
Rate
   
Total
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
Interest-earning assets:
                 
Loans receivable
  $ (95 )   $ (4,294 )   $ (4,389 )
MBS
    3,071       (1,191 )     1,880  
Investment securities
    928       (960 )     (32 )
Capital stock of FHLB
    (3 )     (16 )     (19 )
Cash and cash equivalents
    254       --       254  
Total interest-earning assets
    4,155       (6,461 )     (2,306 )
                         
Interest-bearing liabilities:
                       
Checking
    4       (15 )     (11 )
Savings
    8       (6 )     2  
Money market
    83       (73 )     10  
Certificates
    463       (1,776 )     (1,313 )
FHLB advances
    --       (1,163 )     (1,163 )
Other borrowings
    (93 )     (289 )     (382 )
Total interest-bearing liabilities
    465       (3,322 )     (2,857 )
                         
Net change in net interest income
  $ 3,690     $ (3,139 )   $ 551  


 
74

 



Liquidity and Capital Resources

Liquidity refers to our ability to generate sufficient cash to fund ongoing operations, to pay maturing certificates of deposit and other deposit withdrawals, and to fund loan commitments.  Liquidity management is both a daily and long-term function of our business management.  The Company’s most available liquid assets are represented by cash and cash equivalents, AFS MBS and investment securities, and short-term investment securities.  The Bank’s primary sources of funds are deposits, FHLB advances, other borrowings, repayments and maturities of outstanding loans and MBS and other short-term investments, and funds provided by operations.  The Bank’s borrowings primarily have been used to invest in U.S. GSE debentures and MBS securities in an effort to manage the Bank’s interest rate risk with the intent to improve the earnings of the Bank while maintaining capital ratios in excess of regulatory standards for well-capitalized financial institutions.  In addition, the Bank’s focus on managing risk has provided additional liquidity capacity by remaining below FHLB borrowing limits and by increasing the balance of MBS and investment securities available as collateral for borrowings.

We generally intend to maintain cash reserves sufficient to meet short-term liquidity needs, which are routinely forecasted for 10, 30, and 365 days.  Additionally, on a monthly basis, we perform a liquidity stress test in accordance with the Interagency Policy Statement on Funding and Liquidity Risk Management.  The liquidity stress test incorporates both a short-term and long-term liquidity scenarios in order to quantify liquidity risk. In the event short-term liquidity needs exceed available cash, the Bank has access to lines of credit at the FHLB and the Federal Reserve Bank.  The FHLB line of credit, when combined with FHLB advances, may generally not exceed 40% of total assets.  Our excess capacity at the FHLB as of March 31, 2011 was $1.26 billion. The Federal Reserve Bank line of credit is based upon the fair values of the securities pledged as collateral and certain other characteristics of those securities, and is used only when other sources of short-term liquidity are unavailable.  At March 31, 2011, the Bank had $2.27 billion of securities that were eligible but unused as collateral for borrowing or other liquidity needs.  This collateral amount is comprised of AFS and HTM securities with individual fair values greater than $10.0 million, which is then reduced by a collateralization ratio of 10% to account for potential market value fluctuations.  Borrowings on the lines of credit are outstanding until replaced by cash flows from long-term sources of liquidity, and are generally outstanding no longer than 30 days. 

If management observes a trend in the amount and frequency of lines of credit utilization, the Bank will likely utilize long-term wholesale borrowing sources, such as FHLB advances and/or repurchase agreements, to provide permanent fixed-rate funding.  The maturity of these borrowings is generally structured in such a way as to stagger maturities in order to reduce the risk of a highly negative cash flow position at maturity.  Additionally, the Bank could utilize the repayment and maturity of outstanding loans, MBS and other investments for liquidity needs rather than reinvesting such funds into the related portfolios. 

While scheduled payments from the amortization of loans and MBS and payments on short-term investments are relatively predictable sources of funds, deposit flows, prepayments on loans and MBS, and calls of investment securities are greatly influenced by general interest rates, economic conditions and competition, and are less predictable sources of funds.  To the extent possible, the Bank manages the cash flows of its loan and deposit portfolios by the rates it offers customers. 

At March 31, 2011, cash and cash equivalents totaled $122.0 million, an increase of $56.8 million from September 30, 2010.  The increase is due to normal cash fluctuations.

During the first six months of fiscal year 2011, loan originations and purchases, net of principal repayments and related loan activity, provided a cash inflow of $62.5 million, as principal repayments exceeded loan originations and purchases, compared to a cash inflow of $17.7 million in the same period in the prior year.  See additional discussion regarding loan activity in “Financial Condition – Loans Receivable.”

During the first six months of fiscal year 2011, the Bank received principal payments on MBS of $244.9 million and proceeds from called or matured investment securities of $544.4 million.  These funds were largely reinvested into investment securities and MBS.  During the six months ended March 31, 2011, the Company purchased $656.0 million of investment securities and $1.00 billion of MBS.  The purchases were also funded by proceeds from the stock offering in connection with the corporate reorganization. 

 
75

 
The following table presents the contractual maturity of our loan, MBS and investment securities portfolios at March 31, 2011.  Loans and securities which have adjustable interest rates are shown as maturing in the period during which the contract is due.  The table does not reflect the effects of possible prepayments or enforcement of due on sale clauses.
 
   
Loans (1)
   
MBS
   
Investment Securities
   
Total
 
         
Weighted
         
Weighted
         
Weighted
         
Weighted
 
         
Average
         
Average
         
Average
         
Average
 
   
Amount
   
Rate
   
Amount
   
Rate
   
Amount
   
Rate
   
Amount
   
Rate
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
Amounts due:
                                               
Within one year
  $ 27,366       5.16 %   $ --       -- %   $ 225,925       1.77 %   $ 253,291       2.14 %
 
                                                               
After one year:
                                                               
  Over one to two
    32,907       4.66       --       --       231,781       1.75       264,688       2.11  
  Over two to three
    16,562       5.22       --       --       495,910       1.25       512,472       1.38  
  Over three to five
    35,790       5.46       --       --       834,463       1.34       870,253       1.51  
  Over five to ten
    432,646       5.07       635,027       3.99       48,201       3.28       1,115,874       4.38  
  Over 10 to 15
    1,115,974       4.52       676,634       3.73       3,638       5.26       1,796,246       4.23  
  After 15 years
    3,482,805       4.86       1,044,238       3.37       7,997       3.35       4,535,040       4.51  
Total due after one year
    5,116,684       4.81       2,355,899       3.64       1,621,990       1.44       9,094,573       3.91  
 
                                                               
    $ 5,144,050       4.81 %   $ 2,355,899       3.64 %   $ 1,847,915       1.48 %   $ 9,347,864       3.86 %
 
 
(1)  
Demand loan, loans having no stated maturity, and overdraft loans are included in the amounts due within one year.  Construction loans are reported based on the term to complete construction.  The maturity date for home equity loans assumes the customer always makes the required minimum payment.

The Bank utilizes FHLB advances to provide funds for lending and investment activities.  The Bank’s policies allow advances up to 40% of total Bank assets.  At March 31, 2011, the Bank’s ratio of the face amount of advances to total assets, as reported to the OTS, was 25%.  The advances are secured by a blanket pledge of our loan portfolio, as collateral, supported by quarterly reporting to FHLB.  Currently, the blanket pledge is sufficient collateral for the FHLB advances.  It is possible that increases in our borrowings or decreases in our loan portfolio could require the Bank to pledge securities as collateral on the FHLB advances.  The Bank relies on FHLB advances as a primary source of borrowings.  There was no increase in FHLB advances during the first six months of fiscal year 2011; however, $200.0 million of maturing FHLB advances with a weighted average fixed-rate of 4.71% were renewed and replaced with advances with a weighted average fixed-rate of 2.83% and a weighted average term of 83 months.

The Bank has access to and utilizes other sources for liquidity, such as secondary market repurchase agreements, brokered deposits, and public unit deposits.  The Bank’s policy limits total borrowings to 55% of total assets.  At March 31, 2011, the Bank had repurchase agreements of $590.0 million.  The Bank may enter into additional repurchase agreements as management deems appropriate.   During the first quarter of fiscal year 2011, a $100.0 million repurchase agreement with a fixed-rate of 4.23% matured and was replaced with a repurchase agreement with a fixed-rate of 3.35% and a term of 84 months.  During the second quarter of fiscal year 2011, a $25.0 million repurchase agreement with a fixed-rate of 2.94% matured and was not replaced.  The Bank has pledged securities with an estimated fair value of $685.9 million as collateral for repurchase agreements.  The securities pledged for the repurchase agreements will be delivered back to the Bank when the repurchase agreements mature.

  As of March 31, 2011, the Bank’s policy allows for brokered deposits up to 10% of total deposits and public unit deposits up to 5% of total deposits.  At March 31, 2011, the Bank had brokered deposits of $83.7 million, or approximately 2% of total deposits and public unit deposits of $100.0 million, or approximately 2% of total deposits.  Management continuously monitors the wholesale deposit market for opportunities to obtain brokered and public unit deposits at attractive rates.  The Bank has pledged securities with an estimated fair value of $126.9 million as collateral for public unit deposits.  The securities pledged as collateral for public unit deposits are held under joint custody receipt by the FHLB and generally will be released upon deposit maturity. 

 
76

 
At March 31, 2011, $1.73 billion of the $2.88 billion in certificates of deposit were scheduled to mature within one year.  Included in the $1.73 billion are $81.9 million in public unit deposits and $199.0 million related to a large retail certificate of deposit that was originally scheduled to mature in September 2011; however, due to the terms of a legal settlement to which the Bank was not a party, between $183.5 million and $188.5 million of this deposit will likely be disbursed in May 2011.  We may need to utilize the FHLB line of credit in order to meet liquidity needs around the time of this disbursement.  We will utilize incoming cash flows from the securities and loan portfolios to repay any funds advanced on the line of credit.  Based on our deposit retention experience and our current pricing strategy, we anticipate the majority of the maturing retail certificates of deposit, excluding the $199.0 million certificate of deposit noted above, will renew or transfer to other deposit products at the prevailing rate, although no assurance can be given in this regard. 

In 2004, the Company issued $53.6 million in Debentures in connection with a trust preferred securities offering.  The Company received, net, $52.0 million from the issuance of the Debentures and an investment of $1.6 million in Capitol Federal Financial Trust I (the “Trust”).  The Company did not down-stream the proceeds to be used by the Bank for Tier 1 capital because the Bank already exceeded all regulatory requirements to be a well-capitalized institution.  Instead, the Company deposited the proceeds into certificate accounts at the Bank to be used to further the Company’s general corporate and capital management strategies which could include the payment of dividends.  Subsequent to March 31, 2011, the Company exercised its option to call and repay the Debentures using a portion of the offering proceeds received in conjunction with the corporate reorganization.

As of March 31, 2011, the Bank had entered into $6.3 million of agreements with a third party in connection with the remodeling of the Bank’s home office.  Cash outflows associated with the project were $1.8 million through March 31, 2011.  The existing home office building was constructed in 1961 and has been fully depreciated since 1997.  The project scope includes replacement of all mechanical and electrical systems, interior finishes, and exterior building components.  The completed project will result in an energy efficient building which will lower our utility and maintenance expenses.  There will be additional agreements and expenses related to the project through fiscal year 2013, which is when the project is expected to be completed.  Costs related to the project will be capitalized and depreciated according to the estimated useful life of the assets as they are placed in service. 


 
77

 


Limitations on Dividends and Other Capital Distributions   

Although savings and loan holding companies are not currently subject to regulatory capital requirements or specific restrictions on the payment of dividends or other capital distributions, the OTS does prescribe such restrictions on subsidiary savings associations. The OTS regulations impose restrictions on savings institutions with respect to their ability to make distributions of capital, which include dividends, stock redemptions or repurchases, cash-out mergers and other transactions charged to the capital account.  In addition, the financial impact of a holding company on its subsidiary institution is a matter that is evaluated by the OTS and the agency has authority to order cessation of activities or divestiture of subsidiaries deemed to pose a threat to the safety and soundness of the institution. 

Generally under OTS regulations, savings institutions, such as the Bank, may make capital distributions during any calendar year equal to earnings of the previous two calendar years and current year-to-date earnings.  It is generally required under OTS regulations that the Bank remain well-capitalized before and after the proposed distribution.  However, an institution deemed to be in need of more than normal supervision by the OTS may have its dividend authority restricted by the OTS.  Savings institutions proposing to make any capital distribution within these limits need only submit written notice to the OTS 30 days prior to such distribution.  The OTS may object to the distribution during that 30-day period based on safety and soundness concerns.  Savings institutions that desire to make a larger capital distribution, or are under special restrictions, or are not, or would not be, well-capitalized following a proposed capital distribution, however, must obtain OTS approval prior to making such distribution.

The long-term ability of the Company to pay dividends to its stockholders is based primarily upon the ability of the Bank to make capital distributions to the Company.  So long as the Bank continues to remain “well capitalized” after each capital distribution, operate in a safe and sound manner, provide the OTS with updated capital levels, non-performing asset balances and ACL information as requested, and comply with the interest rate risk management guidelines of the OTS, it is management’s belief that the OTS will continue to allow the Bank to distribute its net income to the Company, although no assurance can be given in this regard.

In connection with the corporate reorganization in December 2010, a “liquidation account” was established for the benefit of certain depositors of the Bank in an amount equal to MHC’s ownership interest in the retained earnings of Capitol Federal Financial as of June 30, 2010.  Under applicable federal banking regulations, neither the Company nor the Bank, is permitted to pay dividends of its capital stock to its stockholders if stockholders’ equity would be reduced below the total amount of its liquidation account.
 
The Company paid cash dividends of $17.0 million prior to the corporate reorganization, and has paid $108.9 million since the corporate reorganization, for total cash dividends paid of $125.9 million as of March 31, 2011.  The $17.0 million consisted of a quarterly dividend of $10.6 million and a special dividend of $6.4 million related to fiscal year 2010 earnings, per the Company’s prior dividend policy.  The $108.9 million consisted of a quarterly dividend of $12.1 million and the welcome dividend of $96.8 million.  In April 2011, the Company declared a quarterly cash dividend of $0.075 per share, which will equate to approximately $12.1 million, payable in May 2011.  Dividend payments depend upon a number of factors including the Company's financial condition and results of operations, the Bank’s regulatory capital requirements, regulatory limitations on the Bank's ability to make capital distributions to the Company, and the amount of cash at the holding company.  At March 31, 2011, Capitol Federal Financial, Inc., at the holding company level, had $112.1 million on deposit with the Bank and $405.0 million in investment securities with a WAL of 1.02 years.
 

Off Balance Sheet Arrangements, Commitments and Contractual Obligations
 
The Company, in the normal course of business, makes commitments to buy or sell assets or to incur or fund liabilities.  Commitments may include, but are not limited to:
 
·  
the origination, purchase, or sale of loans,
·  
the purchase or sale of investment securities and MBS,
·  
extensions of credit on home equity loans and construction loans,
·  
terms and conditions of operating leases, and
·  
funding withdrawals of deposit accounts.

 
78

 
The Company’s contractual obligations related to operating leases and debentures have not changed significantly from September 30, 2010.  The following table summarizes our other contractual obligations as of March 31, 2011.

   
Maturity Range
 
   
 
   
Less than
      1 - 3       3 - 5    
More than
 
   
Total
   
1 year
   
years
   
years
   
5 years
 
   
(Dollars in thousands)
 
                                   
Certificates of Deposit
  $ 2,881,126     $ 1,733,166     $ 772,063     $ 373,447     $ 2,450  
    Weighted average rate
    1.96 %     1.68 %     2.28 %     2.62 %     2.83 %
                                         
FHLB Advances
    2,376,000       326,000       975,000       475,000       600,000  
    Weighted average rate
    3.45       3.53       3.62       3.58       3.05  
                                         
Repurchase Agreements
    590,000       225,000       145,000       120,000       100,000  
    Weighted average rate
    3.93       4.10       3.81       4.24       3.35  
                                         
Commitments to originate and
                                       
   purchase mortgage loans
    85,357       85,357       --       --       --  
    Weighted average rate
    4.50       4.50       --       --       --  
                                         
Commitments to fund unused home
                                       
   equity lines of credit
    269,149       269,149       --       --       --  
    Weighted average rate
    4.51       4.51       --       --       --  
                                         
Unadvanced portion of
                                       
   construction loans
    21,004       21,004       --       --       --  
   Weighted average rate
    4.24       4.24       --       --       --  

A percentage of commitments to originate mortgage loans are expected to expire unfunded, so the amounts reflected in the table above are not necessarily indicative of future liquidity requirements.  Additionally, the Bank is not obligated to honor commitments to fund unused home equity lines of credit if a customer is delinquent or otherwise in violation of the loan agreement.

We anticipate we will continue to have sufficient funds to meet our current commitments.


 
79

 


Contingencies
 
In the normal course of business, the Company and its subsidiary are named defendants in various lawsuits and counter claims.  In the opinion of management, after consultation with legal counsel, none of the currently pending suits are expected to have a materially adverse effect on the Company’s consolidated financial statements for the current interim or future periods.
 
Capital
 
Consistent with our goal to operate a sound and profitable financial organization, we actively seek to maintain a “well-capitalized” status in accordance with regulatory standards.  As of March 31, 2011, the Bank exceeded all capital requirements of the OTS.  The following table presents the Bank’s regulatory capital ratios at March 31, 2011 based upon regulatory guidelines.
 

         
Regulatory
 
         
Requirement
 
   
Bank
   
For “Well-
 
   
Ratios
   
Capitalized” Status
 
Tangible equity
    14.7 %     N/A  
Tier 1 (core) capital
    14.7 %     5.0 %
Tier 1 (core) risk-based capital
    37.7 %     6.0 %
Total risk-based capital
    38.0 %     10.0 %

A reconciliation of the Bank’s equity under GAAP to regulatory capital amounts as of March 31, 2011 is as follows (dollars in thousands):

Total Bank equity as reported under GAAP
  $ 1,389,878  
  Unrealized gains of AFS securities
    (26,643 )
  Other
    (296 )
Total tangible and core capital
    1,362,939  
  ACL (1)
    10,636  
Total risk-based capital
  $ 1,373,575  

(1)   This amount represents the general valuation allowances calculated using the formula analysis.  SVAs are netted against the related loan balance on the Thrift Financial Report and are therefore not included in this amount.  See Item 7 - “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations - Critical Accounting Policies” in the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended September 30, 2010 for additional information.

Item 3.   Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosure About Market Risk

For a complete discussion of the Bank’s asset and liability management policies, as well as the potential impact of interest rate changes upon the market value of the Bank’s portfolios, see “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations - Asset and Liability Management and Market Risk” in the Company’s Annual Report to Stockholders for the year ended September 30, 2010, attached as Exhibit 13 to the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended September 30, 2010.  The analysis presented in the tables below reflects the level of market risk at the Bank and does not include the assets and liabilities at the Company, at the holding company level.  Assets and liabilities at the holding company are not managed in accordance with the interest rate risk objectives of the Bank.  A general discussion of the impact of the holding company assets and liabilities is included for each table.

The rates of interest the Bank earns on assets and pays on liabilities generally are established contractually for a period of time.  Fluctuations in interest rates have a significant impact not only upon our net income, but also upon the cash flows of those assets and liabilities and the market value of our assets and liabilities.  Our results of operations, like those of other financial institutions, are impacted by these changes in interest rates and the interest rate sensitivity of our interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities.  The risk associated with changes in interest rates on the earnings of the Bank and the market value of its financial assets and liabilities is known as interest rate risk.  Interest rate risk is our most significant market risk and our ability to adapt to changes in interest rates is known as interest rate risk management.
 

 
80

 
The general objective of our interest rate risk management is to determine and manage an appropriate level of interest rate risk while maximizing net interest income, in a manner consistent with our policy to reduce, to the extent possible, the exposure of our net interest income to changes in market interest rates.  The Asset and Liability Committee (“ALCO”) regularly reviews the interest rate risk exposure of the Bank by forecasting the impact of hypothetical, alternative interest rate environments on net interest income and market value of portfolio equity (“MVPE”) at various dates.  The MVPE is defined as the net of the present value of the cash flows of an institution’s existing assets, liabilities and off-balance sheet instruments.  The present values are determined based upon market conditions as of the date of the analysis as well as in alternative interest rate environments providing potential changes in MVPE under those alternative interest rate environments.  Net interest income is projected in the same alternative interest rate environments as well, both with a static balance sheet and with management strategies considered.  MVPE and net interest income analysis is also conducted that estimates sensitivity to rates for future time horizons based upon market conditions as of the date of the analysis.   In addition to the interest rate environments presented below, management also reviews the impact of non-parallel rate shock scenarios on a quarterly basis.  These scenarios consist of flattening and steepening the yield curve by changing short-term and long-term scenarios independent of each other, and simulating cash flows and valuations as a result of the simulated changes in rates.  This analysis helps management quantify the Bank’s exposure to changes in the shape of the yield curve.

For each period end presented in the following table, the estimated percentage change in the Bank’s net interest income based on the indicated instantaneous, parallel and permanent change in interest rates is presented.  The percentage change in each interest rate environment represents the difference between estimated net interest income in the 0 basis point interest rate environment (“base case”, assumes the forward market and product interest rates implied by the yield curve are realized) and estimated net interest income in each alternative interest rate environment (assumes market and product interest rates have a parallel shift in rates across all maturities by the indicated change in rates).  Estimations of net interest income used in preparing the table below are based upon the assumptions that the total composition of interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities does not change materially and that any repricing of assets or liabilities occurs at anticipated product and market rates for the alternative rate environments as of the dates presented.  The estimation of net interest income does not include any projected gain or loss related to the sale of loans or securities, or income derived from non-interest income sources, but does include the use of different prepayment assumptions in the alternative interest rate environments.  It is important to consider that the estimated changes in net interest income are for a cumulative four-quarter period.  These do not reflect the earnings expectations of management.

Change
 
Percentage Change in Net Interest Income
(in Basis Points)
 
At
in Interest Rates (1)
 
March 31, 2011
 
December 31, 2010
 
September 30, 2010
 -200 bp
 
N/A
 
N/A
 
N/A
-100 bp
 
N/A
 
N/A
 
N/A
   000 bp
 
 --
 
 --
 
 --
 +100 bp  
 
-0.66%
 
6.22%
 
6.44%
 +200 bp  
 
-3.84%
 
6.90%
 
4.56%
 +300 bp  
 
-8.31%
 
6.95%
 
0.93%

(1) 
Assumes an instantaneous, permanent and parallel change in interest rates at all maturities.

At March 31, 2011, the net interest income projection was negatively impacted by the interest rate shock scenarios presented.  At both September 30, 2010 and December 31, 2010, the net interest income projection improved in the rising rate scenarios.  The decrease from September 30, 2010 to March 31, 2011 was caused by an increase in interest rates between these two periods.  As interest rates rise, borrowers have less economic incentive to refinance their mortgages and agency debt issuers have less economic incentive to exercise their call options in order to issue debt at lower interest rates.  Both scenarios resulted in lower projected cash flows over the four quarter period available for reinvestment at higher yields as interest rates increase.  As interest rates increase, more liabilities than assets reprice, resulting in a lower net interest income projection.

The decrease between the net interest income projection at December 31, 2010 and March 31, 2011 was caused by an increase in interest rates, magnified by a fluctuation in balance sheet composition between the two periods. The net interest income projection results at December 31, 2010 are not typical of the Bank’s net interest income profile due to the large cash balance related to the stock offering in late December 2010.  Net interest income projections assume that the composition of the balance sheet does not change; therefore interest income on cash increases immediately in a period of rising interest rates, which more than offsets the reduction in net interest income on the mortgage-related asset and investment securities portfolios.  The proceeds from the stock offering were not fully invested into securities until the current quarter.

 
81

 
The securities held at the Company, at the holding company level, are short-term bullet agency debentures and are not a component of the Bank’s interest rate risk management program.  The inclusion of these assets in the net interest income projection would have resulted in less of a negative impact to the rising interest rate shock scenarios due to the short-term nature of the securities.  In addition, the cash flows from these assets do not change as interest rates rise.  As a result, these assets would provide cash flows that could be reinvested into higher interest rates.  The Debentures are also not included in the net interest income projection, as they are not a component of the Bank’s interest rate risk management program and would have had an immaterial impact on the rising interest rate shock scenarios.  Additionally, they were repaid in April 2011.

The following table sets forth the estimated percentage change in the MVPE at each period end presented based on the indicated instantaneous, parallel and permanent change in interest rates.  The percentage change in each interest rate environment represents the difference between the MVPE in the base case and the MVPE in each alternative interest rate environment.  The estimations of MVPE used in preparing the table below are based upon the assumptions that the total composition of interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities does not change, that any repricing of assets or liabilities occurs at current product or market rates for the alternative rate environments as of the dates presented, and that different prepayment rates are used in each alternative interest rate environment.  The estimated MVPE results from the valuation of cash flows from financial assets and liabilities over the anticipated lives of each for each interest rate environment.  The following table presents the effects of the change in interest rates on our assets and liabilities as they mature, repay or reprice, as shown by the change in the MVPE in changing interest rate environments.

Change
 
Percentage Change in MVPE
(in Basis Points)
 
At
in Interest Rates (1)
 
March 31, 2011
 
December 31, 2010
 
September 30, 2010
 -200 bp
 
N/A
 
N/A
 
N/A
-100 bp
 
N/A
 
N/A
 
N/A
   000 bp
 
 --
 
 --
 
 --
 +100 bp  
 
-4.85%
 
-0.86%
 
0.10%
 +200 bp  
 
-12.84%
 
-5.23%
 
-8.76%
 +300 bp  
 
-22.09%
 
-11.05%
 
-22.42%

 (1)
Assumes an instantaneous, permanent and parallel change in interest rates at all maturities.

Changes in the estimated market values of our financial assets and liabilities drive changes in estimates of MVPE.  The market values of shorter term-to-maturity financial instruments are less sensitive to changes in interest rates than the market values of longer term-to-maturity financial instruments.  Because of this, our certificates of deposit (which have relatively short average lives) tend to display less sensitivity to changes in interest rates than do mortgage-related assets (which have relatively long average lives).  The average expected life of the mortgage-related assets varies under different interest rate environments because borrowers have the ability to prepay their mortgage loans.  The Bank manages this disparity by using long-term, fixed-rate borrowings to lengthen liabilities and by purchasing investment securities that are generally shorter term than the Bank’s mortgage-related asset portfolios.

At March 31, 2011, the MVPE decreased in all of the interest rate shock scenarios.  Compared to September 30, 2010, the MVPE is more sensitive in the +100 and +200 basis point instantaneous rate change scenarios.  As discussed above, interest rates increased significantly between these two periods.  This resulted in an increase in the WAL of all mortgage-related assets and investment securities between the two periods, which makes the market value of these assets more sensitive to changes in interest rates.  As a result, as interest rates are adjusted upward 100 basis points at March 31, 2011, the change in the market value of assets is greater than the change in the market value of liabilities.  In the +300 basis point scenarios, the MVPE continues to decrease, although at a slower rate.  The primary reason for the smaller change at March 31, 2011 than at September 30, 2010 is the significant increase in the base case MVPE as a result of an increase in capital due to the Company down-streaming 50% of the stock offering proceeds to the Bank.  The larger base case MVPE at March 31, 2011 requires a much larger change from the base case MVPE at September 30, 2010 to effect the same percentage change.

 
82

 
The increase in the sensitivity of the MVPE at March 31, 2011 compared to December 31, 2010 was caused by a significant decrease in cash between quarter ends.  As previously discussed, the Company’s stock offering occurred late in December 2010, therefore the net proceeds down-streamed to the Bank were not invested into securities at December 31, 2010, but rather held in cash at the Federal Reserve Bank.  The market value of cash does not change due to changing interest rate environments.  The cash was used to purchase securities during the current quarter, which increased the amount of interest rate sensitive assets and reduced the amount of cash, thereby negatively impacting the MVPE in the rising interest rate scenarios.

The securities held at the Company, at the holding company level, are short-term bullet agency debentures and are not a component of the Bank’s interest rate risk management program.  The inclusion of these assets in the MVPE analysis would result in a smaller negative impact to the rising interest rate scenarios due to their short-term nature, which would reduce the overall WAL of assets.  This would cause the market value of total assets to be less sensitive to changes in interest rates, thereby reducing the sensitivity of the MVPE.  The Debentures are also not included in the MVPE analysis, as they are not a component of the Bank’s interest rate risk management program and would have had an immaterial impact on the rising interest rate shock scenarios.  Additionally, they were repaid in April 2011.

The following gap table summarizes the anticipated maturities or repricing of our interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities at the Bank at March 31, 2011, based on the information and assumptions set forth in the notes below.  The table excludes interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities at the holding company.  Cash flow projections for mortgage loans and MBS are calculated based on current interest rates.  Prepayment projections are subjective in nature, involve uncertainties and assumptions and, therefore, cannot be determined with a high degree of accuracy.  Although certain assets and liabilities may have similar maturities or periods to repricing, they may react differently to changes in market interest rates.  Assumptions may not reflect how actual yields and costs respond to market changes. The interest rates on certain types of assets and liabilities may fluctuate in advance of changes in market interest rates, while interest rates on other types of assets and liabilities may lag behind changes in market interest rates.  Certain assets, such as ARM loans, have features that restrict changes in interest rates on a short-term basis and over the life of the asset.  In the event of a change in interest rates, prepayment and early withdrawal levels would likely deviate significantly from those assumed in calculating the gap table. For additional information regarding the impact of changes in interest rates, see the Percentage Change in Net Interest Income and Percentage Change in MVPE tables above.

 
83

 

   
Within
   
Three to
   
More Than
   
More Than
             
   
Three
   
Twelve
   
One Year to
   
Three Years
   
Over
       
   
Months
   
Months
   
Three Years
   
to Five Years
   
Five Years
   
Total
 
Interest-earning assets:
 
(Dollars in thousands)
 
Loans receivable (1) :
                                   
Mortgage loans:
                                   
Fixed
  $ 169,388     $ 452,474     $ 868,682     $ 605,188     $ 1,998,462     $ 4,094,194  
Adjustable
    55,643       484,787       200,466       79,231       11,999       832,126  
Other loans
    128,076       16,238       15,053       9,663       6,566       175,596  
Investment securities (2)
    205,541       204,914       410,695       606,285       16,336       1,443,771  
MBS (3)
    270,872       523,522       593,812       359,831       564,212       2,312,249  
Other interest-earning assets
    98,844       --       --       --       --       98,844  
Total interest-earning assets
    928,364       1,681,935       2,088,708       1,660,198       2,597,575       8,956,780  
                                                 
Interest-bearing liabilities:
                                               
Deposits:
                                               
Checking (4)
    11,922       94,344       89,865       69,598       275,332       541,061  
Savings (4)
    92,224       10,534       24,288       18,838       104,412       250,296  
Money market (4)
    50,557       139,851       333,499       164,360       462,549       1,150,816  
Certificates
    425,033       1,317,769       763,156       372,764       2,404       2,881,126  
Borrowings (5)
    25,000       526,000       1,128,024       595,000       747,260       3,021,284  
Total interest-bearing liabilities
    604,736       2,088,498       2,338,832       1,220,560       1,591,957       7,844,583  
                                                 
Excess (deficiency) of interest-earning assets over
                                               
  interest-bearing liabilities
  $ 323,628     $ (406,563 )   $ (250,124 )   $ 439,638     $ 1,005,618     $ 1,112,197  
                                                 
Cumulative excess (deficiency) of interest-earning
                                               
  assets over interest-bearing liabilities
  $ 323,628     $ (82,935 )   $ (333,059 )   $ 106,579     $ 1,112,197          
                                                 
Cumulative excess (deficiency) of interest-earning
                                               
  assets over interest-bearing liabilities as a
                                               
   percent of total Bank assets at
                                               
          March 31, 2011
    3.47 %     (0.89 )%     (3.57 )%     1.14 %     11.93 %        
          December 31, 2010
    15.62       14.30       7.95       8.62       11.04          
          September 30, 2010
    4.09       20.69       14.49       9.52       7.40          

 
84

 


(1)  ARM loans are included in the period in which the rate is next scheduled to adjust or in the period in which repayments are expected to occur, or prepayments are expected to be received, prior to their next rate adjustment, rather than in the period in which the loans are due.  Fixed-rate loans are included in the periods in which they are scheduled to be repaid, based on scheduled amortization and prepayment assumptions.  Balances have been reduced for non-performing loans, which totaled $29.5 million at March 31, 2011.

(2)  Based on contractual maturities, or terms to call date or pre-refunding dates as of March 31, 2011, and excludes the unrealized loss adjustment of $815 thousand on AFS investment securities.

(3)  Reflects estimated prepayments of MBS in our portfolio, and excludes the unrealized gain adjustment of $43.7 million on AFS MBS.

(4)  Although the Bank’s checking, savings and money market accounts are subject to immediate withdrawal, management considers a substantial amount of such accounts to be core deposits having significantly longer effective maturities.  The decay rates (the assumed rate at which the balance of existing accounts would decline) used on these accounts are based on assumptions developed from our actual experience with these accounts.  If all of the Bank’s checking, savings and money market accounts had been assumed to be subject to repricing within one year, interest-bearing liabilities which were estimated to mature or reprice within one year would have exceeded interest-earning assets with comparable characteristics by $1.63 billion, for a cumulative one-year gap of -17.43% of total Bank assets.

 (5)  Borrowings exclude $24.7 million of deferred prepayment penalty costs and $546 thousand of deferred gain from terminated interest rate swaps.

The change in the one-year gap to -0.89% at March 31, 2011 from 20.69% at September 30, 2010 was the result of an increase in long-term interest rates between the two periods.  The increase in interest rates resulted in a decrease in projected cash flows from mortgage-related assets and callable agency debentures, which resulted in longer WALs of these assets and lower cash flow projections at March 31, 2011 compared to September 30, 2010.

While interest rates were higher at December 31, 2010 compared to September 30, 2010, the large amount of cash at December 31, 2010 helped to offset the reduction in cash flows due to the increase in interest rates.  The investment of this cash into securities during the current quarter resulted in a significant decrease in the one-year gap between December 31, 2010 and March 31, 2011.

The securities held at the Company, at the holding company level, are short-term bullet agency debentures.  The inclusion of these assets in the gap analysis would have resulted in an increase in the one-year gap, as the majority of the assets mature in one year or less.  The Debentures are also not included in the gap analysis, as they are not a component of the Bank’s interest rate risk management program but would have resulted in a decrease in the one-year gap.  Additionally, they were repaid in April 2011.


Item 4 .  Controls and Procedures

Evaluation of Disclosure Controls and Procedures
Our management, with the participation of our Chief Executive Officer and our Chief Financial Officer, evaluated the Company’s disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Rule 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, the “Act”) as of March 31, 2011.  Based upon this evaluation, our Chief Executive Officer and our Chief Financial Officer have concluded that as of March 31, 2011, such disclosure controls and procedures were effective to ensure that information required to be disclosed by the Company in the reports it files or submits under the Act is accumulated and communicated to the Company’s management (including the Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer) to allow timely decisions regarding required disclosure, and is recorded, processed, summarized and reported within the time periods specified in the SEC’s rules and forms.

Changes in Internal Control Over Financial Reporting
There have been no changes in the Company’s internal control over financial reporting identified in connection with the evaluation required by Rule 13a-15(f) of the Act that occurred during the Company’s quarter ended March 31, 2011 that have materially affected, or are reasonably likely to materially affect, the Company’s internal control over financial reporting.

Part II -   OTHER INFORMATION

Item 1.  Legal Proceedings
We are not involved in any pending legal proceedings other than routine legal proceedings occurring in the ordinary course of business.  We believe that these routine legal proceedings, in the aggregate, are immaterial to our financial condition and results of operations.

 
85

 
Item 1A.  Risk Factors
There have been no material changes to our risk factors since September 30, 2010.  For a summary of risk factors relevant to our operations, see Part I, Item 1A in our 2010 Annual Report on Form 10-K.

Item 2.  Unregistered Sales of Equity Securities and Use of Proceeds
See “Liquidity and Capital Resources - Capital” in “Item 2. Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” regarding the OTS restrictions on dividends from the Bank to the Company.

There were no stock repurchases during the three months ended March 31, 2011.  Pursuant to applicable federal banking regulations, we may not repurchase our shares during the first year following the corporate reorganization except under very limited circumstances; therefore, the Company does not anticipate repurchasing any shares until December 2011.  The stock repurchase plan that was in effect at the time of the corporate reorganization ceased to exist once the reorganization was complete.  There is no repurchase plan currently in place.


<Index>
Item 3.  Defaults Upon Senior Securities
Not applicable.

<Index>
Item 4.  (Removed and Reserved)

<Index>
Item 5.  Other Information
Not applicable.

<Index>
Item 6.  Exhibits
See Index to Exhibits.

 
86

 

SIGNATURES

Pursuant to the requirement of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the registrant has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned thereunto duly authorized.

CAPITOL FEDERAL FINANCIAL, INC.


Date:  May 10, 2011                                                                                By: /s/ John B. Dicus
                                                                                          John B. Dicus, Chairman, President and
                                                                                          Chief Executive Officer


Date:  May 10, 2011                                                                                By: /s/ Kent G. Townsend
                                                                                          Kent G. Townsend, Executive Vice President,
                                                                                          Chief Financial Officer and Treasurer


<Index>

 
87

 

INDEX TO EXHIBITS
Exhibit
Number
 
  Document
     2.0
 
Amended Plan of Conversion and Reorganization filed on October 27, 2010 as Exhibit 2 to Capitol Federal Financial, Inc.’s Post Effective Amendment No. 2 Registration Statement on Form S-1 (File No. 333-166578) and incorporated herein by reference
     3(i)
 
Federal Stock Charter of Capitol Federal Financial, Inc., as filed on May 6, 2010, as Exhibit 3(i) to Capitol Federal Financial, Inc.’s Registration Statement on Form S-1 (File No. 333-166578) and incorporated herein by reference
     3(ii)
 
Bylaws of Capitol Federal Financial, Inc. as filed on May 6, 2010, as Exhibit 3(ii) to Capitol Federal Financial Inc.’s Registration Statement on Form S-1 (File No. 333-166578) and incorporated herein by reference
     4
 
The Registrant agrees to furnish to the Securities and Exchange Commission, upon request, the
   
instruments defining the rights of the holders of the Registrant’s long-term debt.
   10.1(i)
 
Capitol Federal Financial’s Thrift Plan filed on November 29, 2007 as Exhibit 10.1(i) to
   
the Annual Report on Form 10-K for Capitol Federal Financial and incorporated herein by reference
   10.1(ii)
 
Capitol Federal Financial, Inc.’s Stock Ownership Plan, as amended
   10.1(iii)
 
Form of Change of Control Agreement with each of John B. Dicus, Kent G. Townsend, R. Joe Aleshire, Larry Brubaker, and Rick C. Jackson filed on January 20, 2011 as Exhibit 10.1 to the Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K and incorporated herein by reference
   10.2
 
Capitol Federal Financial’s 2000 Stock Option and Incentive Plan (the “Stock Option Plan”) filed on April 13, 2000 as Appendix A to Capitol Federal Financial’s Revised Proxy Statement (File No. 000-25391) and incorporated herein by reference
   10.3
 
Capitol Federal Financial’s 2000 Recognition and Retention Plan filed on April 13, 2000 as Appendix B to Capitol Federal Financial’s Revised Proxy Statement (File No. 000-25391) and incorporated herein by reference
   10.4
 
Capitol Federal Financial Deferred Incentive Bonus Plan, as amended, filed on May 5, 2009 as Exhibit 10.4 to the June 30, 2009 Form 10-Q for Capitol Federal Financial and incorporated herein by reference
   10.5
 
Form of Incentive Stock Option Agreement under the Stock Option Plan filed on February 4, 2005
   
as Exhibit 10.5 to the December 31, 2004 Form 10-Q for Capitol Federal Financial and incorporated herein by reference
   10.6
 
Form of Non-Qualified Stock Option Agreement under the Stock Option Plan filed on February 4,
   
2005 as Exhibit 10.6 to the December 31, 2004 Form 10-Q for Capitol Federal Financial and incorporated herein by reference
   10.7
 
Form of Restricted Stock Agreement under the RRP filed on February 4, 2005 as Exhibit 10.7 to the
   
December 31, 2004 Form 10-Q for Capitol Federal Financial and incorporated herein by reference
   10.8
 
Description of Named Executive Officer Salary and Bonus Arrangements filed on November 29,
   
2010 as Exhibit 10.8 to the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 10-K and incorporated herein by reference
   10.9
 
Description of Director Fee Arrangements filed on February 9, 20111 as exhibit 10.9 to the
   
December 31, 2010 Form 10-Q and incorporated herein by reference
   10.10
 
Short-term Performance Plan filed on December 1, 2008 as Exhibit 10.10 to the Annual
   
Report on Form 10-K for Capitol Federal Financial for the fiscal year ended September 30, 2008 and incorporated herein by reference
   11
 
Statement re: computation of earnings per share*
   31.1
 
Certification pursuant to Section 302 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 made by John B. Dicus, Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer
   31.2
 
Certification pursuant to Section 302 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 made by Kent G. Townsend, Executive Vice President, Chief Financial Officer and Treasurer
   32
 
Certification pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350, as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 made by John B. Dicus, Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer, and Kent G. Townsend, Executive Vice President, Chief Financial Officer and Treasurer
*No statement is provided because the computation of per share earnings can be clearly determined from the Financial Statements included in this report.
 
 

88
 










 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CAPITOL FEDERAL FINANCIAL, INC.
EMPLOYEE STOCK OWNERSHIP PLAN
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Originally Effective October 1, 1998
Amended and Restated Effective October 1, 2007
Amended and Restated to Include Amendments Through March 31, 2011



 
 

 

 
 
CAPITOL FEDERAL FINANCIAL, INC . EMPLOYEE STOCK OWNERSHIP PLAN
 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS
 
PREAMBLE .................................................................................................................................................................. 1
 
 
ARTICLE I DEFINITION OF TERMS AND CONSTRUCTION ........................................................................... 2
 
 
1.1 Definitions .............................................................................................................................................................. 2
 
 
(a) Account .................................................................................................................................................................. 2
 
 
(b) Act .......................................................................................................................................................................... 2
 
 
(c) Administrator......................................................................................................................................................... 2
 
 
(d) Annual Additions ................................................................................................................................................ 2
 
 
(e) Authorized Leave of Absence ........................................................................................................................... 2
 
 
(f) Beneficiary.............................................................................................................................................................. 2
 
 
(g) Board of Directors ................................................................................................................................................ 2
 
 
(h) Break ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2
 
 
(i) Code.......................................................................................................................................................................... 2
 
 
(j) Compensation ........................................................................................................................................................ 3
 
 
(k) Date of Hire ............................................................................................................................................................ 4
 
 
(l) Disability ................................................................................................................................................................. 4
 
 
(m) Disability Retirement Date ................................................................................................................................. 4
 
 
(n) Early Retirement Date ......................................................................................................................................... 4
 
 
(o) Effective Date ...................................................................................................................................................... 4
 
 
(p) Eligibility Period .................................................................................................................................................. 4
 
 
(q) Employee .............................................................................................................................................................. 4
 
 
(r) Employee Stock Ownership Account ............................................................................................................... 4
 
 
(s) Employee Stock Ownership Contribution ....................................................................................................... 4
 
 
(t) Employee Stock Ownership Suspense Account ............................................................................................ 4
 
 
(u) Employer .............................................................................................................................................................. 4
 
 
(v) Employer Securities ............................................................................................................................................ 4
 
 
(w) Entry Date ........................................................................................................................................................... 5
 
 
(x) Exempt Loan......................................................................................................................................................... 5
 
 
(y) Exempt Loan Suspense Account ..................................................................................................................... 5
 
 
(z) Financed Shares ................................................................................................................................................. 5
 
(aa) Former Participant ........................................................................................................................................... 5
 
(bb) Fund .................................................................................................................................................................. 5
 
(cc) Hour of Service ................................................................................................................................................ 5
 
(dd) Investment Adjustments ............................................................................................................................... 5
 
(ee) Limitation Year.................................................................................................................................................. 5
.
(ff) Normal Retirement Date ................................................................................................................................... 6
 
(gg) Participant......................................................................................................................................................... 6
 
(hh) Plan ................................................................................................................................................................... 6
 
(ii) Plan Year ............................................................................................................................................................. 6
 
(jj) Qualified Domestic Relations Order................................................................................................................ 6
 
(kk) Related Employer ............................................................................................................................................ 6
 
(ll) Retirement........................................................................................................................................................... 6
 
(mm) Service ............................................................................................................................................................ 6
 
(nn) Sponsor ........................................................................................................................................................... 6
 
(oo) Trust Agreement ........................................................................................................................................... 6
 
(pp) Trustee ............................................................................................................................................................ 7
 
(qq) Valuation Date ............................................................................................................................................... 7
 
(rr) Year of Eligibility Service ............................................................................................................................... 7
 
(ss) Year of Vesting Service ................................................................................................................................ 7
 
1.2 Plurals and Gender .......................................................................................................................................... 7
 
1.3 Incorporation of Trust Agreement ............................................................................................................... 7
 
1.4 Headings........................................................................................................................................................... 7
 
1.5 Severability ...................................................................................................................................................... 7
 
1.6 References to Governmental Regulations................................................................................................... 7
 
1.7 Notices.............................................................................................................................................................. 7
 
1.8 Evidence .......................................................................................................................................................... 7
 
1.9 Action by Employer....................................................................................................................................... 8
 
ARTICLE II PARTICIPATION........................................................................................................................... 9
 
2.1 Commencement of Participation .................................................................................................................. 9
 
2.2 Termination of Participation ........................................................................................................................ 9
 
2.3 Resumption of Participation ........................................................................................................................ 9
 
2.4 Determination of Eligibility .......................................................................................................................... 9
 
2.5 Restricted Participation ............................................................................................................................... 9
 
ARTICLE III CREDITED SERVICE ................................................................................................................ 10
 
3.1 Service Counted for Eligibility Purposes................................................................................................. 10
 
3.2 Service Counted for Vesting Purposes ................................................................................................... 10
 
3.3 Credit for Pre-Break Service ...................................................................................................................... 10
 
3.4 Service Credit During Authorized Leaves............................................................................................... 10
 
3.5 Service Credit During Maternity or Paternity Leave.............................................................................. 10
 
3.6 Ineligible Employees .................................................................................................................................. 11
 
ARTICLE IV CONTRIBUTIONS..................................................................................................................... 12
 
4.1 Employee Stock Ownership Contribution .............................................................................................. 12
 
4.2 Time and Manner of Employee Stock Ownership Contribution ......................................................... 12
 
4.3 Records of Contributions ......................................................................................................................... 13
 
 
4.4 Erroneous Contributions ........................................................................................................................... 13
 
ARTICLE V ACCOUNTS, ALLOCATIONS AND INVESTMENTS ......................................................... 14
 
5.1 Establishment of Separate Participant Accounts ................................................................................... 14
 
5.2 Establishment of Suspense Accounts ..................................................................................................... 14
 
5.3 Allocation of Earnings, Losses and Expenses ........................................................................................ 15
 
5.4 Application of Forfeitures .......................................................................................................................... 15
 
5.5 Allocation of Employee Stock Ownership Contribution ........................................................................ 15
 
 
5.6 Limitation on Annual Additions................................................................................................................. 15
 
 
5.7 Erroneous Allocations ................................................................................................................................ 16
 
5.8 Value of Participant's Account .................................................................................................................. 16
 
 
5.9 Investment of Account Balances .............................................................................................................. 16
 
ARTICLE VI RETIREMENT, DEATH AND DESIGNATION OF BENEFICIARY ................................... 17
 
6.1 Normal Retirement ....................................................................................................................................... 17
 
6.2 Early Retirement ..........................................................................................................................................  17
 
6.3 Disability Retirement ...................................................................................................................................  17
 
 
6.4 Death Benefits .............................................................................................................................................  17
 
6.5 Designation of Beneficiary and Manner of Payment .............................................................................. 17
 
ARTICLE VII VESTING AND FORFEITURES ............................................................................................... 19
7.1 Vesting on Death, Disability and Normal Retirement .............................................................................. 19
 
7.2 Vesting on Termination of Participation ..................................................................................................  19
 
7.3 Disposition of Forfeitures.............................................................................................................................19
 
ARTICLE VIII EMPLOYEE STOCK OWNERSHIP PROVISIONS ...............................................................20
 
8.1 Right to Demand Employer Securities .....................................................................................................  20
 
8.2 Voting Rights; Tendering Shares.............................................................................................................. 20
 
8.3 Nondiscrimination in Employee Stock Ownership Contribution ..........................................................20
 
 
8.4 Dividends...................................................................................................................................................... 21
 
8.5 Exempt Loans............................................................................................................................................... 22
 
8.6 Exempt Loan Payments .............................................................................................................................. 22
 
8.7 Put Option ................................................................................................................................................... 23
 
8.8 Diversification Requirements ................................................................................................................... 23
 
8.9 Independent Appraiser ............................................................................................................................. 24
 
ARTICLE IX PAYMENTS AND DISTRIBUTIONS.................................................................................... 25
 
9.1 Payments on Termination of Service - In General.................................................................................. 25
 
9.2 Commencement of Payments ................................................................................................................... 25
 
9.3 Mandatory Commencement of Benefits ..................................................................................................25
 
9.4 Required Beginning Dates........................................................................................................................ 28
 
9.5 Form of Payment ........................................................................................................................................ 28
 
9.6 Payments Upon Termination of Plan ...................................................................................................... 28
 
9.7 Distributions Pursuant to Qualified Domestic Relations Orders ........................................................ 29
 
9.8 Cash-Out Distributions............................................................................................................................. 29
 
9.9 ESOP Distribution Rules .......................................................................................................................... 30
 
9.10 Direct Rollover ......................................................................................................................................... 30
 
9.11 Waiver of 30-day Notice ......................................................................................................................... 30
 
9.12 Re-employed Veterans ............................................................................................................................ 31
 
9.13 Share Legend ............................................................................................................................................ 31
 
9.14. Power to Reduce Benefit ........................................................................................................................ 31
 
ARTICLE X PROVISIONS RELATING TO TOP-HEAVY PLANS............................................................ 32
 
10.1 Top-Heavy Rules to Control................................................................................................................... 32
 
10.2 Top-Heavy Plan Definitions.................................................................................................................... 32
 
10.3 Calculation of Accrued Benefits ............................................................................................................. 32
 
10.4 Determination of Top-Heavy Status ....................................................................................................... 33
 
10.5 Minimum Contribution .............................................................................................................................. 34
 
10.6 Vesting ........................................................................................................................................................  35
 
ARTICLE XI ADMINISTRATION ................................................................................................................. 36
 
11.1 Appointment of Administrator ................................................................................................................ 36
 
11.2 Resignation or Removal of Administrator ............................................................................................. 36
 
11.3 Appointment of Successors: Terms of Office, Etc. .............................................................................. 36
 
 
11.4 Powers and Duties of Administrator....................................................................................................... 36
 
11.5 Action by Administrator .........................................................................................................................  37
 
11.6 Participation by Administrator ................................................................................................................. 37
 
11.7 Agents.......................................................................................................................................................... 37
 
11.8 Allocation of Duties .................................................................................................................................  38
 
11.9 Delegation of Duties.................................................................................................................................  38
 
 
11.10 Administrator's Action Conclusive....................................................................................................... 38
 
11.11 Compensation and Expenses of Administrator.................................................................................... 38
 
11.12 Records and Reports................................................................................................................................ 38
 
11.13 Reports of Fund Open to Participants.................................................................................................... 38
 
11.14 Named Fiduciary ......................................................................................................................................  38
 
11.15 Information from Employer ...................................................................................................................... 38
 
11.16 Responsibilities of Directors ................................................................................................................... 39
 
11.17 Liability and Indemnification ................................................................................................................... 39
 
ARTICLE XII CLAIMS PROCEDURE ............................................................................................................. 40
 
12.1 Notice of Denial ...........................................................................................................................................40
 
12.2 Right to Reconsideration .......................................................................................................................... 40
 
12.3 Review of Documents ............................................................................................................................... 40
 
12.4 Decision by Administrator ........................................................................................................................40
 
12.5 Notice by Administrator ........................................................................................................................... 40
 
12.6 Special Claims Procedures ....................................................................................................................... 40
 
ARTICLE XIII AMENDMENTS, TERMINATION AND MERGER .......................................................... 42
 
 
13.1 Amendments ............................................................................................................................................. 42
 
13.2 Effect of Change In Control .................................................................................................................... 42
 
13.3 Consolidation or Merger of Trust........................................................................................................... 43
 
13.4 Bankruptcy or Insolvency of Employer ................................................................................................ 43
 
13.5 Voluntary Termination ............................................................................................................................. 44
 
 
13.6 Partial Termination of Plan or Permanent Discontinuance of Contributions................................... 44
 
ARTICLE XIV MISCELLANEOUS................................................................................................................. 45
 
 
14.1 No Diversion of Funds ............................................................................................................................. 45
 
14.2 Liability Limited .......................................................................................................................................   45
 
14.3 Facility of Payment ................................................................................................................................... 45
 
14.4 Spendthrift Clause .................................................................................................................................... 45
 
 
14.5 Benefits Limited to Fund .......................................................................................................................... 45
 
14.6 Cooperation of Parties .............................................................................................................................. 45
 
14.7 Payments Due Missing Persons.............................................................................................................. 46
 
14.8 Governing Law.........................................................................................................................................   46
\
14.9 Nonguarantee of Employment ..............................................................................................................   46
 
14.10 Counsel .................................................................................................................................................... 46
 
14.11 Purposes................................................................................................................................................... 46
 
14.12 Invalidity ................................................................................................................................................. 46
 
ARTICLE XVI TRUST PROVISIONS..........................................................................................................   47  
 
15.1 Contributions ............................................................................................................................................ 47
 
15.2 Information and Data to be Furnished the Trustee ............................................................................. 47
 
 
15.3 Trust Fund and Accounts........................................................................................................................ 47
 
15.4 Duties and Powers of the Trustee .......................................................................................................... 48
 
15.5 Resignation or Removal of the Trustee .................................................................................................. 51
 
15.6 Continuance and Termination of this Agreement ................................................................................. 52
 
15.7 Miscellaneous ...........................................................................................................................................   52
 


 

CAPITOL FEDERAL FINANCIAL, INC.
EMPLOYEE STOCK OWNERSHIP PLAN
PREAMBLE

THIS PLAN AND TRUST AGREEMENT, made and entered into this ____ day of ______________, 2011, by and between Capitol Federal Financial, Inc., a Maryland corporation (hereinafter referred to as “Sponsor” or “Employer”) and   (hereinafter referred to as “Trustee”), is to witnesseth that:

WHEREAS, effective as of October 1, 1998, Capitol Federal Financial, Inc. (the predecessor to Capitol Federal Financial, Inc.), adopted the Capitol Federal Financial, Inc. Employee Stock Ownership Plan (“Plan”) in order to enable Participants to share in the growth and prosperity of the Sponsor and its wholly owned subsidiary, Capitol Federal Savings Bank, and to provide Participants with an opportunity to accumulate capital for their future economic security by accumulating funds to provide retirement, death and disability benefits; and

WHEREAS,  the Plan is a stock bonus plan, designed to meet the applicable requirements of Code Section 409, and an employee stock ownership plan, designed to meet the applicable requirements of Code Section 4975(e)(7) and Act Section 407(d)(6); and

WHEREAS, the Plan is intended to invest primarily in “qualifying employer securities” as defined in Code Section 4975(e)(8); and

WHEREAS, The Sponsor intends that the Plan will qualify under Code Sections 401(a) and 501(a) and will comply with such provisions; and

WHEREAS, the Plan has been amended and restated from time to time to comply with various legislation affecting tax-qualified plans; and

WHEREAS, the Plan is hereby being amended to comply with the applicable provisions of the Pension Protection Act of 2006; and

WHEREAS, the Sponsor's Board of Directors has resolved to adopt, continue, sponsor, and maintain the Plan for the benefit of eligible employees; and

WHEREAS, the Sponsor wishes to include the Plan terms within the provisions of a trust document consistent with the Sponsor's practice with its other pension benefit plan; and

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the foregoing premises, effective October 1, 2007, except to the extent a different effective date is prescribed by applicable pension legislation, or except to the extent a particular Plan section specifies a different effective date, the parties agree through this instrument to continue an existing plan and  trust relationship and, through this instrument, the sponsor amends, restates, continues, adopts and agrees to maintain that certain stock bonus plan and employee stock ownership plan qualified under Code Section 401(a) and 4975(e)(7) and Treas. Reg. §1.401-1(b)(1)(iii) known as the “Capitol Federal Financial Employee Stock Ownership Plan” in accordance with the provisions set forth herein.  Notwithstanding the foregoing, the rights of any person (including such person's beneficiaries) who terminated employment or who retired on or before any effective date, or the effective date of a particular amendment, shall be determined solely under the terms of this Plan as in effect on the date of his termination of employment or retirement, unless such person is thereafter reemployed and again becomes a participant.


 
 

 


ARTICLE I
DEFINITION OF TERMS AND CONSTRUCTION

1.1            Definitions .

Unless a different meaning is plainly implied by the context, the following terms as used in this Plan shall have the following meanings:

(a)            "Account" shall mean a Participant's or Former Participant's entire accrued benefit under the Plan, including the balance credited to his Employee Stock Ownership Account and any other account described in Section 5.1.

(b)            "Act" shall mean the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended from time to time, or any successor statute, together with the applicable regulations promulgated thereunder.

(c)            "Administrator" shall mean the fiduciary provided for in Article XI.

(d)            "Annual Additions" shall mean, with respect to each Participant, the sum of those amounts allocated to the Participant's Account under this Plan and accounts under any other qualified defined contribution plan to which the Employer or a Related Employer contributes for any Limitation Year, consisting of the following:

(1)  Employer contributions;

(2)  Forfeitures; and

(3)  Employee contributions (if any).

Annual Additions shall not include any Investment Adjustment.  Annual Additions also shall not include employer contributions which are used by the Trust to pay interest on an Exempt Loan nor any forfeitures of Employer Securities purchased with the proceeds of an Exempt Loan, provided that not more than one-third of the employer contributions are allocated to Participants who are among the group of employees deemed "highly compensated employees" within the meaning of Code Section 414(q), as further described in Section 8.3.  Annual Additions also shall not include any other amounts not considered annual additions pursuant Treasury Regulations issued under Code Section 415.

(e)            "Authorized Leave of Absence" shall mean an absence from Service with respect to which the Employee may or may not be entitled to Compensation and which meets any one of the following requirements:

(1)            Service in any of the armed forces of the United States for up to 36 months, provided that the Employee resumes Service within 90 days after discharge, or such longer period of time during which such Employee's employment rights are protected by law; or

(2)           Any other absence or leave expressly approved and granted by the Employer.  In approving such leaves of absence, the Employer shall treat all Employees on a uniform and nondiscriminatory basis.

(f)            "Beneficiary" shall mean such legal or natural persons, who may be designated contingently or successively, as may be designated by the Participant pursuant to Section 6.5 to receive benefits after the death of the Participant, or in the absence of a valid designation, such persons specified in Section 6.5(b) to receive benefits after the death of the Participant.

(g)            "Board of Directors" shall mean the Board of Directors of the Sponsor.

(h)            "Break" shall mean a Plan Year during which an Employee fails to complete more than 500 Hours of Service.  No Break shall occur while a Participant is performing Qualified Military Service.

(i)            "Code" shall mean the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended from time to time, or any successor statute, together with the applicable regulations promulgated thereunder.

(j)            "Compensation" shall be defined as follows:

(1)           Generally.  Compensation shall mean the “compensation” paid to an Employee by the Employer for services rendered to the Employer during a Plan Year, after the date on which the Employee becomes a Participant,  as defined in Code Section 3401(a) (for purposes of income tax withholding at the source) plus amounts that would be required to be included as wages but for an election under Code Sections 125(a), 132(f)(4), 402(e)(3), 402(h)(1)(B), 402(k) or 457(b) of the Code, plus all other payments of compensation to an employee by his employer (in the course of the employer's trade or business) for which the employer is required to furnish the employee a written statement under Code Sections 6041(d), 6051(a)(3), and 6052.  Notwithstanding the following, for purposes of this Section 1.1(j)(1), the following items shall not constitute Compensation: reimbursements or other expense allowances, fringe benefits, moving expenses, deferred compensation welfare benefits, amounts paid by the Employer or accrued with respect to this Plan or any other qualified or non-qualified unfunded plan of deferred compensation or other employee welfare plan to which the Employer contributes, payments for group insurance, medical benefits, expense reimbursements, including moving expenses, bonuses, excess commissions as described in certain employment contracts, overtime pay, incentive pay, employee referral payments and income reportable on Form W-2 in connection with the Employer's recognition and retention plan and stock option plans.  Compensation must be determined without regard to any rules under Code Section 3401(a) that limit the remuneration included in wages based on the nature or location of the employment or the services performed (such as the exception for agricultural labor in Code Section 3401(a)(2)).

(2)           Compensation for purposes of applying the limitations of Code Section 415.  For purposes of applying the limitations of Code Section 415, the term “Compensation” shall mean wages within the meaning of Code Section 3401(a) (for purposes of income tax withholding at the source), plus amounts that would be included in wages but for an election under Code Sections 125(a), 132(f)(4), 402(e)(3), 402(h)(1)(B), 402(k), or 457(b), plus all other payments of compensation to an employee by his employer (in the course of the employer's trade or business) for which the employer is required to furnish the employee a written statement under Code Sections 6041(d), 6051(a)(3), and 6052. See §§1.6041-1(a), but excluding amounts paid or reimbursed by the Employer for moving expenses incurred by the Participant, but only to the extent that, at the time of the payment, it is reasonable to believe that these amounts are deductible by the Participant under Code Section 217.  Any rules that limit the remuneration included in wages based on the nature or location of the employment or the services performed (such as the exception for agricultural labor in Code Section 3401(a)(2)) are disregarded for this purpose.

(3)           General timing rule.  In order to be taken into account for a Plan Year with respect to (1) above, or a Limitation Year with respect to (2) above, Compensation must be actually paid or made available to a Participant (or, if earlier, includible in the gross income of the Participant) within the Plan Year or Limitation Year, as the case may be. For this purpose, compensation is treated as paid on a date if it is actually paid on that date or it would have been paid on that date but for an election under Code section 125, 132(f)(4), 401(k), 403(b), 408(k), 408(p)(2)(A)(i), or 457(b).

(4)           Special rules regarding severance compensation.  For purposes of applying the definitions in (1) and (2) above, in order to be taken into account for a Plan Year or Limitation Year, Compensation must be paid or treated as paid to the Participant prior to the Participant's severance from employment with the Employer maintaining the plan.  For this purpose, severance from employment is determined in the same manner as under Treasury Regulation Section 1.401(k)-1(d)(2) except that, for purposes of determining the employer of an employee, the modifications provided under Code Section 415(h) to the employer aggregation rules apply.   This paragraph shall be interpreted in a manner consistent with the Regulations under Code Section 415.

(5)           Dollar Limitation.   Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, the annual Compensation of each Participant taken into account under the Plan for any purpose during any Plan Year shall not exceed $200,000.  The $200,000 dollar amount shall be adjusted from time to time in accordance with Section 415(d) of the Code.

(k)            "Date of Hire" shall mean the date on which an Employee shall perform his first Hour of Service.  Notwithstanding the foregoing, in the event that an Employee incurs one or more consecutive Breaks after his initial Date of Hire which results in the forfeiture of his pre-Break Service pursuant to Section 3.3, his "Date of Hire" shall thereafter be the date on which he completes his first Hour of Service after such Break or Breaks.

(l)            "Disability" shall mean a physical or mental impairment which prevents a Participant from performing the duties assigned to him by the Employer and which either has caused the Social Security Administration to classify the individual as "disabled" for purposes of Social Security or has been determined by a qualified physician selected by the Administrator.

(m)            "Disability Retirement Date" shall mean the first day of the month after which a Participant incurs a Disability.

(n)            "Early Retirement Date" .   There is no early retirement under this Plan.

(o)            "Effective Date" shall mean October 1, 1998. The effective date of the amended and restated Plan shall mean October 1, 2007.

(p)            "Eligibility Period" shall mean the period of 12 consecutive months commencing on an Employee's Date of Hire.  Succeeding Eligibility Periods after the initial Eligibility Period shall be based on the Plan Year beginning with the Plan Year which includes the first anniversary date of an Employee's Date of Hire, and subsequent Plan Years.

(q)            "Employee" shall mean any person who is classified as an employee by the Employer or a Related Employer, including officers, but excluding directors in their capacity as such.  Individuals not originally classified as Employees who are later classified as such for any reason shall not be treated as Employees under the Plan.

(r)            "Employee Stock Ownership Account" shall mean the separate bookkeeping account established for each Participant pursuant to Section 5.1(a).

(s)            "Employee Stock Ownership Contribution" shall mean the cash, Employer Securities, or both that are contributed to the Plan by the Employer pursuant to Article IV.

(t)            "Employee Stock Ownership Suspense Account" shall mean the temporary account in which the Trustee may maintain any Employee Stock Ownership Contribution that is made prior to the last day of the Plan Year for which it is made, as described in Section 5.2.

(u)            "Employer" shall mean Capitol Federal Financial, Inc., a Maryland corporation, and its wholly owned subsidiary, Capitol Federal Savings Bank, or any successors to the aforesaid corporations by merger, consolidation or otherwise, which may agree to continue this Plan, or any Related Employer or any other business organization which, with the consent of the Sponsor, shall agree to become a party to this Plan.  To the extent required by the Code or the Act, references herein to the Employer shall also include all Related Employers, whether or not they are participating in this Plan.

(v)            "Employer Securities" shall mean the common stock issued by Capitol Federal Financial, Inc., a federally-chartered corporation.  Such term shall also mean, in the discretion of the Board of Directors, any other common stock issued by the Employer or any Related Employer having voting power and dividend rights equal to or in excess of:

(1)           that class of common stock of the Employer or a Related Employer having the greatest voting power, and

(2)           that class of common stock of the Employer or a Related Employer having the greatest dividend rights.

Non-callable preferred stock shall be treated as Employer Securities if such stock is convertible at any time into stock which meets the requirements of (1) and (2) next above and if such conversion is at a conversion price which (as of the date of the acquisition by the Plan) is reasonable.  For purposes of the last preceding sentence, preferred stock shall be treated as non-callable if, after the call, there will be a reasonable opportunity for a conversion which meets the requirements of the last preceding sentence.

(w)            "Entry Date" shall mean each October 1 and April 1.

(x)            "Exempt Loan" shall mean a loan described at Section 4975(d)(3) of the Code to the Trustee to purchase Employer Securities for the Plan, made or guaranteed by a disqualified person, as defined at Section 4975(e)(2) of the Code, including, but not limited to, a direct loan of cash, a purchase money transaction, an assumption of an obligation of the Trustee, an unsecured guarantee or the use of assets of such disqualified person as collateral for such a loan.

(y)            "Exempt Loan Suspense Account" shall mean the account to which Financed Shares are initially credited until they are released in accordance with Section 8.5.

(z)            "Financed Shares" shall mean the Employer Securities acquired by the Trustee with the proceeds of an Exempt Loan and which are credited to the Exempt Loan Suspense Account until they are released in accordance with Section 8.5.

(aa)            "Former Participant" shall mean any previous Participant whose participation has terminated but who has a vested Account in the Plan which has not been distributed in full.

(bb)            "Fund" shall mean the trust fund maintained by the Trustee pursuant to the Trust Agreement in order to provide for the payment of the benefits specified in the Plan.

(cc)            "Hour of Service" shall mean each hour for which an Employee is directly or indirectly paid or entitled to payment by the Employer or a Related Employer for the performance of duties or for reasons other than the performance of duties (such as vacation time, holidays, sickness, disability, paid lay-offs, jury duty and similar periods of paid nonworking time).  To the extent not otherwise included, Hours of Service shall also include each hour for which back pay, irrespective of mitigation of damages, is either awarded or agreed to by the Employer or a Related Employer.  Hours of working time shall be credited on the basis of actual hours worked, even though compensated at a premium rate for overtime or other reasons.  In computing and crediting Hours of Service for an Employee under this Plan, the rules set forth in Sections 2530.200b-2(b) and (c) of the Department of Labor Regulations shall apply, said sections being herein incorporated by reference.  Hours of Service shall be credited to the Plan Year or other relevant period during which the services were performed or the nonworking time occurred, regardless of the time when compensation therefore may be paid.  Notwithstanding the preceding sentence, where Hours of Service are to be credited to an Employee in connection with a period (no more than 31 days) that extends beyond one computation period (for eligibility, vesting and contribution allocation purposes), all such Hours of Service during such period shall be credited to the second, later computation period. Any Employee for whom no hourly employment records are kept by the Employer or a Related Employer shall be credited with 45 Hours of Service for each calendar week in which he would have been credited with a least one Hour or Service under the foregoing provisions, if hourly records were available.  Solely for purposes of determining whether a Break for participation and vesting purposes has occurred in an Eligibility Period or a Plan Year, an individual who is absent from work for maternity or paternity reasons shall receive credit for the Hours of Service which would otherwise have been credited to such individual but for such absence, or in any case in which such hours cannot be determined, 8 Hours of Service per day of such absence.  For purposes of Section 1.1(cc), an absence from work for maternity or paternity reasons means an absence (1) by reason of the pregnancy of the individual, (2) by reason of the birth of a child of the individual, (3) by reason of the placement of a child with the individual in connection with the adoption of such child by such individual, or (4) for purposes of caring for such child for a period beginning immediately following such birth or placement.  The Hours of Service credited under this provision shall be credited (1) in the computation period in which the absence begins if the crediting is necessary to prevent a Break in that period, or (2) in all other cases, in the following computation period.

(dd)            "Investment Adjustments" shall mean the increases and/or decreases in the value of a Participant's Account attributable to earnings, gains, losses and expenses of the Fund, as set forth in Section 5.3.

(ee)            "Limitation Year" shall mean the Plan Year.

(ff)            "Normal Retirement Date" shall mean the date on which a Participant attains age 65.

(gg)            "Participant" shall mean an Employee who has met all of the eligibility requirements of the Plan and who is currently included in the Plan as provided in Article II hereof; provided, however, that the term "Participant" shall not include (1) leased employees (as defined herein), (2) any individual who is employed by a Related Employer that has not adopted the Plan in accordance with Section 1.1(u) hereof, (3) any Employee who is regularly employed outside the Employer's own offices in connection with the operation and maintenance of buildings or other properties acquired through foreclosure or deed, (4) any Employee who is a non-resident alien individual and who has no earned income from sources within the United States, or (5) any Employee who is included in a unit of Employees covered by a collective-bargaining agreement with the Employer or a Related Employer that does not expressly provide for participation of such Employees in the Plan, where there has been good-faith bargaining between the Employer or a Related Employer and Employees' representatives on the subject of retirement benefits.  To the extent required by the Code or the Act, or appropriate based on the context, references herein to Participant shall include Former Participant.  The term "leased employee" means any person (other than an employee of the recipient) who pursuant to an agreement between the recipient and any other person ("leasing organization") has performed services for the recipient (or for the recipient and related persons determined in accordance with Code Section 414(n)(6)) on a substantially full time basis for a period of at least one year, and such services are performed under primary direction or control by the recipient.

(hh)            "Plan" shall mean the Capitol Federal Financial, Inc. Employee Stock Ownership Plan, as described herein or as hereafter amended from time to time.

(ii)            "Plan Year" shall mean the twelve month period commencing October 1 and ending September 30.

(jj)            "Qualified Domestic Relations Order" shall mean any judgment, decree or order that satisfies the requirements to be a "qualified domestic relations order," as defined in Section 414(p) of the Code.

(jj-1)            "Qualified Military Service"   shall have the meaning provided for in Code Section 414(u).

(kk)            "Related Employer" shall mean any entity that is:

(1)            a member of a controlled group of corporations that includes the Employer, while it is a member of such controlled group (within the meaning of Section 414(b) of the Code);

(2)           a member of a group of trades or businesses under common control with the Employer, while it is under common control (within the meaning of Section 414(c) of the Code);

(3)           a member of an affiliated service group that includes the Employer, while it is a member of such affiliated service group (within the meaning of Section 414(m) of the Code); or

(4)           a leasing or other organization that is required to be aggregated with the Employer pursuant to the provisions of Section 414(n) or 414(o) of the Code.

(ll)            "Retirement" shall mean termination of employment which qualifies as early, normal or Disability retirement as described in Article VI.

(mm)            "Service" shall mean, for purposes of eligibility to participate and vesting,  employment with the Employer or any Related Employer, and for purposes of allocation of the Employee Stock Ownership Contribution and forfeitures, employment with the Employer.  Service shall be determined for vesting and benefit accrual purposes by taking into account Qualified Military Service as required under Code Section 414(u).

(nn)            "Sponsor" shall mean Capitol Federal Financial, Inc.

(oo)            "Trust Agreement" shall mean the agreement by and between the Sponsor and the Trustee, as in effect from time to time, whether set forth herein or otherwise.

(pp)            "Trustee" shall mean the trustee or trustees by whom the assets of the Plan are held, as provided in the Trust Agreement, or his or their successors.

(qq)            "Valuation Date" shall mean the last day of each Plan Year.  Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Trustee may value the Trust as frequently as each business day of the Plan Year to determine the fair market value of each Participant's Account under the Plan.

(rr)            "Year of Eligibility Service" shall mean an Eligibility Period during which an Employee is credited with at least 1,000 Hours of Service, except as otherwise specified in Article III.

(ss)            "Year of Vesting Service" shall mean a Plan Year during which an Employee is credited with at least 1,000 Hours of Service, except as otherwise specified in Article III.

1.2            Plurals and Gender .

Where appearing in the Plan and the Trust Agreement, the masculine gender shall include the feminine and neuter genders, and the singular shall include the plural, and vice versa, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise.

1.3            Incorporation of Trust Agreement .

If there is a separate Trust Agreement, then that Trust Agreement, as the same may be amended from time to time, is intended to be and hereby is incorporated by reference into this Plan.  All contributions made under the Plan will be held, managed and controlled by the Trustee pursuant to the terms and conditions of the Trust Agreement.

1.4            Headings .

The headings and sub-headings in this Plan are inserted for the convenience of reference only and are to be ignored in any construction of the provisions hereof.

1.5            Severability .

In case any provision of this Plan shall be held illegal or void, such illegality or invalidity shall not affect the remaining provisions of this Plan, but shall be fully severable, and the Plan shall be construed and enforced as if said illegal or invalid provisions had never been inserted herein.

1.6            References to Governmental Regulations .

References in this Plan to regulations issued by the Internal Revenue Service, the Department of Labor, or other governmental agencies shall include all regulations, rulings, procedures, releases and other position statements issued by any such agency.

1.7            Notices .

Any notice or document required to be filed with the Administrator or Trustee under the Plan will be properly filed if delivered or mailed by registered mail, postage prepaid, to the Administrator in care of the Sponsor or to the Trustee, each at its principal business offices.  Any notice required under the Plan may be waived in writing by the person entitled to notice.

1.8            Evidence .

Evidence required of anyone under the Plan may be by certificate, affidavit, document or other information which the person acting on it considers pertinent and reliable, and signed, made or presented by the proper party or parties.

1.9            Action by Employer .

Any action required or permitted to be taken by any entity constituting the Employer under the Plan shall be by resolution of its Board of Directors or by a person or persons authorized by its Board of Directors.

 
 

 

ARTICLE II
PARTICIPATION

2.1            Commencement of Participation .


(a)           Any Employee who is otherwise eligible to become a Participant in accordance with Section 1.1(gg) hereof shall initially become a Participant on the Entry Date coincident with or next following the date on which he has attained age twenty-one (21) and completes one Year of Eligibility Service.

(b)           Any Employee who had satisfied the requirements set forth in Section 2.1(a) during the 12 consecutive month period prior to the Effective Date shall become a Participant on the Effective Date, provided he is still employed by the Employer on the Effective Date.

2.2            Termination of Participation .

After commencement or resumption of his participation, an Employee shall remain a Participant during each consecutive Plan Year thereafter until the earliest of the following dates:

(a)           His actual Retirement date;

(b)           His date of death; or

(c)           The last day of a Plan Year during which he incurs a Break.

2.3            Resumption of Participation .

(a)           Any Participant whose employment terminates and who resumes Service before he incurs a Break shall resume participation immediately on the date he is reemployed.

(b)           Except as otherwise provided in Section 2.3(c), any Participant who incurs one or more Breaks and resumes Service shall resume participation retroactively as of the first day of the first Plan Year in which he completes a Year of Eligibility Service after such Break(s).

(c)           Any Participant who incurs one or more Breaks and resumes Service, but whose pre-Break Service is not reinstated to his credit pursuant to Section 3.3, shall be treated as a new Employee and shall again be required to satisfy the eligibility requirements contained in Section 2.1(a) before resuming participation on the appropriate Entry Date, as specified in Section 2.1(a).

2.4            Determination of Eligibility .

The Administrator shall determine the eligibility of Employees in accordance with the provisions of this Article.  For each Plan Year, the Employer shall furnish the Administrator a list of all Employees, indicating their Date of Hire, their Hours of Service during their Eligibility Period, their date of birth, the original date of their reemployment with the Employer, if any, and any Breaks they may have incurred.

2.5            Restricted Participation .

Subject to the terms and conditions of the Plan, during the period between the Participant's date of termination of participation in the Plan (as described in Section 2.2) and the distribution of his entire Account (as described in Article IX), and during any period that a Participant does not meet the requirements of Section 2.1(a) or is employed by a Related Employer that is not participating in the Plan, the Participant or, in the event of the Participant's death, the Beneficiary of the Participant, will be considered and treated as a Participant for all purposes of the Plan, except as follows:

(a)           the Participant will not share in the Employee Stock Ownership Contribution and forfeitures (as described in Sections 7.2 and 7.3), except as provided in Sections 5.4 and 5.5; and

(b)           the Beneficiary of a deceased Participant cannot designate a Beneficiary under Section 6.5.

 
 

 

ARTICLE III
CREDITED SERVICE

3.1            Service Counted for Eligibility Purposes .

Except as provided in Section 3.3, all Years of Eligibility Service completed by an Employee shall be counted in determining his eligibility to become a Participant on and after the Effective Date, whether such Service was completed before or after the Effective Date.

3.2            Service Counted for Vesting Purposes .

All Years of Vesting Service completed by an Employee (including Years of Vesting Service completed prior to the Effective Date) shall be counted in determining his vested interest in this Plan, except the following:

(a)           Service which is disregarded under the provisions of Section 3.3;

(b)           Service prior to the Effective Date of this Plan if such Service would have been disregarded under the "break in service" rules (within the meaning of Section 1.411(a)-5(b) of the Treasury Regulations).

3.3            Credit for Pre-Break Service .

Upon his resumption of participation following one or a series of consecutive Breaks, an Employee's pre-Break Service shall be reinstated to his credit for eligibility and vesting purposes only if either:

(a)           He was vested in any portion of his accrued benefit at the time the Break(s) began; or

(b)           The number of his consecutive Breaks does not equal or exceed the greater of 5 or the number of his Years of Eligibility Service or Years of Vesting Service, as the case may be, credited to him before the Breaks began.

Except as provided in the foregoing, none of an Employee's Service prior to one or a series of consecutive Breaks shall be counted for any purpose in connection with his participation in this Plan thereafter.

3.4            Service Credit During Authorized Leaves .

An Employee shall receive no Service credit under Section 3.1 or 3.2 during any Authorized Leave of Absence.  However, solely for the purpose of determining whether he has incurred a Break during any Plan Year in which he is absent from Service for one or more Authorized Leaves of Absence, he shall be credited with 45 Hours of Service for each week during any such leave period.  Notwithstanding the foregoing, if an Employee fails to return to Service on or before the end of a leave period, he shall be deemed to have terminated Service as of the first day of such leave period and his credit for Hours of Service, determined under this Section 3.4, shall be revoked.  Notwithstanding anything contained herein to the contrary, an Employee who is absent by reason of military service as set forth in Section 1.1(e)(1) shall be given Service credit under this Plan for such military leave period to the extent, and for all purposes, required by law.

3.5            Service Credit During Maternity or Paternity Leave .

For purposes of determining whether a Break has occurred for participation and vesting purposes, an individual who is on maternity or paternity leave as described in Section 1.1(cc), shall be deemed to have completed Hours of Service during such period of absence, all in accordance with Section 1.1(cc).  Notwithstanding the foregoing, no credit shall be given for such Hours of Service unless the individual furnishes to the Administrator such timely information as the Administrator may reasonably require to determine:

(a)           that the absence from Service was attributable to one of the maternity or paternity reasons enumerated in Section 1.1(cc); and

 
(b)
the number of days of such absence.

In no event, however, shall any credit be given for such leave other than for determining whether a Break has occurred.

3.6            Ineligible Employees .

Notwithstanding any provisions of this Plan to the contrary, any Employee who is ineligible to participate in this Plan either because of his failure

(a)           To meet the eligibility requirements contained in Article II; or

(b)           To be a Participant, as defined in Section 1.1(gg),

shall, nevertheless, earn Years of Eligibility Service and Years of Vesting Service pursuant to the rules contained in this Article III.  However, such Employee shall not be entitled to an allocation of any contributions or forfeitures hereunder unless and until he becomes a Participant in this Plan, and then, only during his period of participation.

 
 

 

ARTICLE IV
CONTRIBUTIONS

4.1            Employee Stock Ownership Contribution .

(a)           Subject to all of the provisions of this Article IV, for each Plan Year commencing on or after the Effective Date, the Employer shall make an Employee Stock Ownership Contribution to the Fund in such amount as may be determined by resolution of the Board of Directors in its discretion; provided, however, that the Employer shall contribute an amount in cash not less than the amount required to enable the Trustee to discharge any indebtedness incurred with respect to an Exempt Loan in accordance with Section 8.6(c).  If any part of the Employee Stock Ownership Contribution under this Section 4.1 for any Plan Year is in cash in an amount exceeding the amount needed to pay the amount due during or prior to such Plan Year with respect to an Exempt Loan, such cash shall be applied by the Trustee, as directed by the Administrator in its sole discretion, either to the purchase of Employer Securities or to repay an Exempt Loan.  Contributions hereunder shall be in the form of cash, Employer Securities or any combination thereof.  In determining the value of Employer Securities transferred to the Fund as an Employee Stock Ownership Contribution, the Administrator may determine the average of closing prices of such securities for a period of up to 90 consecutive days immediately preceding the date on which the securities are contributed to the Fund.  In the event that the Employer Securities are not readily tradable on an established securities market, the value of the Employer Securities transferred to the Fund shall be determined by an independent appraiser in accordance with Section 8.9.

(b)           Subject to Section 4.1(a), in no event shall the Employee Stock Ownership Contribution exceed for any Plan Year the maximum amount that may be deducted by the Employer under Section 404 of the Code, nor shall such contribution cause the Employer to violate its regulatory capital requirements.  Each Employee Stock Ownership Contribution by the Employer shall be deemed to be made on the express condition that the Plan, as then in effect, shall be qualified under Sections 401(a) and 501(a) of the Code and that the amount of such contribution shall be deductible from the Employer's income under Section 404 of the Code.

4.2            Time and Manner of Employee Stock Ownership Contribution .

(a)           The Employee Stock Ownership Contribution (if any) for each Plan Year shall be paid to the Trustee in one lump sum or installments at any time on or before the expiration of the time prescribed by law (including any extensions) for filing of the Employer's federal income tax return for its fiscal year ending concurrent with or during such Plan Year; provided, however, that the Employee Stock Ownership Contribution (if any) for a Plan Year shall be made in a timely manner to make any required payment of principal and/or interest on an Exempt Loan for such Plan Year.  Any portion of the Employee Stock Ownership Contribution for each Plan Year that may be made prior to the last day of the Plan Year shall, if there is an Exempt Loan outstanding at such time, at the election of the Administrator, either (i) be applied immediately to make payments on such Exempt Loan or (ii) be maintained in the Employee Stock Ownership Suspense Account described in Section 5.2 until the last day of such Plan Year.

(b)           If an Employee Stock Ownership Contribution for a Plan Year is paid after the close of the Employer's fiscal year which ends concurrent with or during such Plan Year but on or prior to the due date (including any extensions) for filing of the Employer's federal income tax return for such fiscal year, it shall be considered, for allocation purposes, as an Employee Stock Ownership Contribution to the Fund for the Plan Year for which it was computed and accrued, unless such contribution is accompanied by a statement to the Trustee, signed by the Employer, which specifies that the Employee Stock Ownership Contribution is made with respect to the Plan Year in which it is received by the Trustee.  Any Employee Stock Ownership Contribution paid by the Employer during any Plan Year but after the due date (including any extensions) for filing of its federal income tax return for the fiscal year of the Employer ending on or before the last day of the preceding Plan Year shall be treated, for allocation purposes, as an Employee Stock Ownership Contribution to the Fund for the Plan Year in which the contribution is paid to the Trustee.

(c)           Notwithstanding anything contained herein to the contrary, no Employee Stock Ownership Contribution shall be made for any Plan Year during which a limitations account created pursuant to Section 5.6(c)(3) is in existence until the balance of such limitations account has been reallocated in accordance with Section 5.6(c)(3).

4.3            Records of Contributions .

The Employer shall deliver at least annually to the Trustee, with respect to the Employee Stock Ownership Contribution contemplated in Section 4.1, a certificate of the Administrator, in such form as the Trustee shall approve, setting forth:

(a)           The aggregate amount of such contribution, if any, to the Fund for such Plan Year;

(b)           The names, Internal Revenue Service identifying numbers and current residential addresses of all Participants in the Plan;

(c)           The amount and category of contributions to be allocated to each such Participant; and

(d)           Any other information reasonably required for the proper operation of the Plan.

4.4            Erroneous Contributions .

(a)           Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, upon the Employer's written request, a contribution which was made by a mistake of fact, or conditioned upon the initial qualification of the Plan, under Code Section 401(a), or upon the deductibility of the contribution under Section 404 of the Code, shall be returned to the Employer by the Trustee within one year after the payment of the contribution, the denial of the qualification or the disallowance of the deduction (to the extent disallowed), whichever is applicable; provided, however, that in the case of denial of the initial qualification of the Plan, a contribution shall not be returned unless an Application for Determination has been timely filed with the Internal Revenue Service.  Any portion of a contribution returned pursuant to this Section 4.4 shall be adjusted to reflect its proportionate share of the losses of the Fund, but shall not be adjusted to reflect any earnings or gains.  Notwithstanding any provisions of this Plan to the contrary, the right or claim of any Participant or Beneficiary to any asset of the Fund or any benefit under this Plan shall be subject to and limited by this Section 4.4.

(b)           In no event shall Employee contributions be accepted.  Any such Employee contributions (and any earnings attributable thereto) mistakenly received by the Trustee shall promptly be returned to the Participant.

 
 

 

ARTICLE V
ACCOUNTS, ALLOCATIONS AND INVESTMENTS

5.1            Establishment of Separate Participant Accounts .

The Administrator shall establish and maintain a separate Account for each Participant in the Plan and for each Former Participant in accordance with the provisions of this Article V.  Such separate Account shall be for bookkeeping purposes only and shall not require a segregation of the Fund, and no Participant, Former Participant or Beneficiary shall acquire any right to or interest in any specific assets of the Fund as a result of the allocations provided for under this Plan.

(a)            Employee Stock Ownership Accounts .

The Administrator shall establish a separate Employee Stock Ownership Account in the Fund for each Participant.  The Administrator may establish subaccounts hereunder, an Employer Stock Account reflecting a Participant's interest in Employer Securities held by the Fund, and an Other Investments Account reflecting the Participant's interest in his Employee Stock Ownership Account other than Employer Securities.  Each Participant's Employer Stock Account shall reflect his share of any Employee Stock Ownership Contribution made in Employer Securities, his allocable share of forfeitures (as described in Section 5.4), and any Employer Securities attributable to earnings on such stock.  Each Participant's Other Investments Account shall reflect any Employee Stock Ownership Contribution made in cash, any cash dividends on Employer Securities allocated and credited to his Employee Stock Ownership Account (other than currently distributable dividends) and his share of corresponding cash forfeitures, and any income, gains, losses, appreciation, or depreciation attributable thereto.   Dividends attributable to Employer Securities that are allocated to a Participant pursuant to Section 8.4 (and not distributable thereunder) shall be treated as part of the Participant's Employee Stock Ownership Account.

(b)            Distribution Accounts .

In any case where distribution of a terminated Participant's vested Account is to be deferred, the Administrator may establish a separate, nonforfeitable account in the Fund to which the balance in his Employee Stock Ownership Account in the Plan shall be transferred after such Participant incurs a Break.  Unless the Former Participant's distribution accounts are segregated for investment purposes pursuant to Article IX, they shall share in Investment Adjustments.

(c)            Other Accounts .

The Administrator shall establish such other separate accounts for each Participant as may be necessary or desirable for the convenient administration of the Fund.

5.2            Establishment of Suspense Accounts .

The Administrator shall establish a separate Employee Stock Ownership Suspense Account.  There shall be credited to such account any Employee Stock Ownership Contribution that may be made prior to the last day of the Plan Year and that are allocable to the Employee Stock Ownership Suspense Account pursuant to Section 4.2(a).  The Employee Stock Ownership Suspense Account shall share proportionately as to time and amount in any Investment Adjustments.  As of the last day of each Plan Year, the balance of the Employee Stock Ownership Suspense Account shall be added to the Employee Stock Ownership Contribution and allocated to the Employee Stock Ownership Accounts of Participants as provided in Section 5.5, except as provided herein.  In the event that the Plan takes an Exempt Loan, the Employer Securities purchased thereby shall be allocated as Financed Shares to a separate Exempt Loan Suspense Account, from which Employer Securities shall be released in accordance with Section 8.5 and shall be allocated in accordance with Section 8.6(b).

 
 

 

5.3            Allocation of Earnings, Losses and Expenses .

Except as otherwise provided in this instrument, as of each Valuation Date, any increase or decrease in the net worth of the aggregate Employee Stock Ownership Accounts held in the Fund attributable to earnings, losses, expenses and unrealized appreciation or depreciation in each such account, as determined by the Trustee, shall be credited to or deducted from the appropriate suspense accounts and all Participants̓ Employee Stock Ownership Accounts (except segregated distribution accounts described in Section 5.1(b) and the “limitations account” described in Section 5.6(c)(3)), in accordance with this Section.  Earnings, losses, and unrealized appreciation or depreciation in Employer Securities in a Participant's Employee Stock Ownership Account shall be determined and allocated only to such account, but such determination shall be made immediately prior to crediting any Contributions and forfeitures for the current Plan Year, but after adjustment for any transfer to or from such accounts.  Earnings, losses, and unrealized appreciation or depreciation in investments other than Employer Securities in the Participant's Other Investment Accounts shall be allocated in the proportion that the value of each such account (determined immediately prior to such allocation and before crediting any Contributions and forfeitures for the current Plan Year but after adjustment for any transfer to or from such accounts and for the time such funds were in such accounts) bears to the value of all Other Investment Accounts.  Provided, however, cash dividends paid to the Plan shall be allocated or otherwise disposed of in accordance with Plan Section 8.4. Plan expenses paid from the assets of this employee pension benefit plan shall be allocated across all Accounts in the proportion that the value of each Participant's Account bears to the value of all Participant Accounts.

5.4            Application of Forfeitures .

Forfeitures occurring during the Plan Year may, at the discretion of the Administrator, be used to pay or reimburse expenses of the Plan, to the extent such payment or reimbursement is consistent with the applicable fiduciary requirements of the Act.  As of the last day of each Plan Year, all forfeitures which have not been applied in accordance with the preceding sentence shall be added to the Employee Stock Ownership Contribution (if any) for such year and allocated among the Participants' Employee Stock Ownership Accounts, as appropriate, in the manner provided in Section 5.5.

5.5            Allocation of Employee Stock Ownership Contribution .

As of the last day of each Plan Year for which the Employer shall make an Employee Stock Ownership Contribution, the Administrator shall allocate the Employee Stock Ownership Contribution (including reallocable forfeitures) for such Plan Year to the Employee Stock Ownership Account of each Participant who completed a Year of Vesting Service during that Plan Year, provided that he is still employed by the Employer on the last day of the Plan Year.  Such allocation shall be made in the same proportion that each such Participant's Compensation for such Plan Year bears to the total Compensation of all such Participants for such Plan Year, subject to Section 5.6.  Furthermore, if a Participant completes a Year of Vesting Service and is on an authorized Leave of Absence on the last day of the Plan Year, such a Participant shall be entitled to an allocation based on his Compensation earned during such Plan Year.

5.6            Limitation on Annual Additions .

(a)           Notwithstanding any provisions of this Plan to the contrary, the total Annual Additions credited to a Participant's Account under this Plan (and accounts under any other defined contribution plan maintained by the Employer or a Related Employer) for any Limitation Year shall not exceed the lesser of:

(1)           $40,000, as adjusted for increases in the cost-of-living under section 415(d) of the Code, or

(2)           100 percent of the Participant's Compensation for the Limitation Year.

(b)           This Section 5.6 shall be applied in a manner consistent with the Treasury Regulations under Code Section 415, which shall be incorporated herein by this reference, except as provided herein or in the definition of Compensation.

(c)           In the event that the limitations on Annual Additions described in Section 5.6(a) above are exceeded with respect to any Participant in any Limitation Year, then:

(1)           The Administrator shall determine to what extent the Annual Additions to any Participant's Employee Stock Ownership Account must be reduced in each Limitation Year.  The Administrator shall reduce the Annual Additions to all other qualified, tax-exempt retirement plans maintained by the Employer or a Related Employer in accordance with the terms contained therein for required reductions or reallocations mandated by Section 415 of the Code before reducing any Annual Additions in this Plan.

(2)           If any excess Annual Additions remain, then the excess shall be corrected pursuant to a correction method provided for in the Internal Revenue Service employee plans compliance resolution system procedure then in effect.

5.7            Erroneous Allocations .

No Participant shall be entitled to any Annual Additions or other allocations to his Account in excess of those permitted under Sections 5.3, 5.4, 5.5, and 5.6.  If it is determined at any time that the Administrator has erred in accepting and allocating any contributions or forfeitures under this Plan, or in allocating Investment Adjustments, or in excluding or including any person as a Participant, then the Administrator, in a uniform and nondiscriminatory manner, shall determine the manner in which such error shall be corrected and shall promptly advise the Trustee in writing of such error and of the method for correcting such error. The accounts of any or all Participants may be revised, if necessary, in order to correct such error.  To the extent applicable, such correction shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the Employee Plans Compliance Resolution System (EPCRS) then in effect (i.e., Internal Revenue Service Revenue Procedure 2008-50 or its successor).

5.8            Value of Participant's Account .

At any time, the value of a Participant's Account shall consist of the aggregate value of his Employee Stock Ownership Account and his distribution account, if any, determined as of the next-preceding Valuation Date.  The Administrator shall maintain adequate records of the cost basis of Employer Securities allocated to each Participant's Employee Stock Ownership Account.

5.9            Investment of Account Balances .

The Employee Stock Ownership Accounts shall be invested primarily in Employer Securities.  All sales of Employer Securities by the Trustee attributable to the Employee Stock Ownership Accounts of all Participants shall be charged pro rata to the Employee Stock Ownership Accounts of all Participants.

 
 

 

ARTICLE VI
RETIREMENT, DEATH AND DESIGNATION OF BENEFICIARY

6.1            Normal Retirement .

A Participant who reaches his Normal Retirement Date and who shall retire at that time shall thereupon be entitled to retirement benefits based on the value of his Account, payable pursuant to the provisions of Section 9.1.  A Participant who remains in Service after his Normal Retirement Date shall not be entitled to any retirement benefits until his actual termination of Service thereafter (except as provided in Section 9.4), and he shall meanwhile continue to participate in this Plan.

6.2            Early Retirement .

There is no early retirement under this Plan.

6.3            Disability Retirement .

In the event a Participant incurs a Disability, he may retire on his Disability Retirement Date and shall thereupon be entitled to retirement benefits based on the value of his Account, payable pursuant to the provisions of Section 9.1.

6.4            Death Benefits .

(a)           Upon the death of a Participant before his Retirement or other termination of Service, the value of his Account shall be payable pursuant to the provisions of Section 9.1.  The Administrator shall direct the Trustee to distribute his Account to any surviving Beneficiary designated by the Participant or, if none, to such persons specified in Section 6.5(b).  Survivors of a Participant who dies while performing Qualified Military Service shall be entitled to any additional benefits provided under the Plan as if the Participant resumed service with the Employer and then terminated employment on account of death. The additional benefits shall not include benefit accruals relating to the period of Qualified Military Service.

(b)           Upon the death of a Former Participant, the Administrator shall direct the Trustee to distribute any undistributed balance of his Account to any surviving Beneficiary designated by him or, if none, to such persons specified in Section 6.5(b).

(c)           The Administrator may require such proper proof of death and such evidence of the right of any person to receive the balance credited to the Account of a deceased Participant or Former Participant as the Administrator may deem desirable.  The Administrator's determination of death and of the right of any person to receive payment shall be conclusive.

6.5            Designation of Beneficiary and Manner of Payment .

(a)           Each Participant shall have the right to designate a Beneficiary to receive the sum or sums to which he may be entitled upon his death.  The Participant may also designate the manner in which any death benefits under this Plan shall be payable to his Beneficiary, provided that such designation is in accordance with Section 9.5.  Such designation of Beneficiary and manner of payment shall be in writing and delivered to the Administrator, and shall be effective when received by the Administrator while the Participant is alive.  The Participant shall have the right to change such designation by notice in writing to the Administrator while the Participant is alive.  Such change of Beneficiary or the manner of payment shall become effective upon its receipt by the Administrator while the Participant is alive.  Any such change shall be deemed to revoke all prior designations.

(b)           If a Participant shall fail to designate validly a Beneficiary, or if no designated Beneficiary survives the Participant, the balance credited to his Account shall be paid to the person or persons in the first of the following classes of successive preference Beneficiaries surviving at the death of the Participant:  the Participant's (1) widow or widower, (2) natural-born or adopted children, (3) natural-born or adoptive parents, and (4) estate.  The Administrator shall determine which Beneficiary, if any, shall have been validly designated or entitled to receive the balance credited to the Participant's Account in accordance with the foregoing order of preference, and its decision shall be binding and conclusive on all persons.

(c)           Notwithstanding the foregoing, if a Participant is married on the date of his death, the sum or sums to which he may be entitled under this Plan upon his death shall be paid to his spouse, unless the Participant's spouse shall have consented to the election of another Beneficiary.  Such a spousal consent shall be in writing and shall be witnessed either by a representative of the Administrator or by a notary public.  Any designation by an unmarried Participant shall be rendered ineffective by any subsequent marriage, and any consent of a spouse shall be effective only as to that spouse.  If it is established to the satisfaction of the Administrator that spousal consent cannot be obtained because there is no spouse, because the spouse cannot be located, or other reasons prescribed by governmental regulations, the consent of the spouse may be waived, and the Participant may designate a Beneficiary or Beneficiaries other than his spouse.


 
 

 

ARTICLE VII
VESTING AND FORFEITURES

7.1            Vesting on Death, Disability and Normal Retirement .

Unless his participation in this Plan shall have terminated prior thereto, upon a Participant's death, Disability or Normal Retirement Date (whether or not he actually retires at that time) while he is still employed by the Employer, the Participant's entire Account shall be fully vested and nonforfeitable.

7.2            Vesting on Termination of Participation .

(a)           Upon termination of his participation in this Plan for any reason other than death, Disability, or Normal Retirement, a Participant shall be vested in a percentage of his Employee Stock Ownership Account, such vested percentage to be determined under the following table (“Vesting Schedule”), based on the Years of Vesting Service (including Years of Vesting Service prior to the Effective Date) credited to him at the time of his termination of participation:

Years of Vesting Service                                                        Percentage Vested
Less than 5                                                           0%
 
5 or more
100%

(b)           The foregoing Vesting Schedule shall remain in effect for Plan Years beginning before the earlier of (a) the date on which an Exempt Loan that was in existence on September 26, 2005 (a “Pre-PPA Exempt Loan”) is repaid in full, or (b) the date on which such Pre-PPA Exempt Loan is scheduled to be repaid in full.  For subsequent Plan Years, the Vesting Schedule shall be as follows:

Years of Vesting Service                                                        Percentage Vested
Less than 3                                                           0%
 
3 or more
100%

Notwithstanding the foregoing, a Participant shall at all times have a nonforfeitable interest in Employer Securities acquired with dividends received pursuant to Section 8.4(c).

(c)           Any portion of the Participant's Employee Stock Ownership Account which is not vested at the time he incurs a Break shall thereupon be forfeited and disposed of pursuant to Section 7.3.  In such event, Employer Securities shall be forfeited only after other assets. Distribution of the vested portion of a terminated Participant's interest in the Plan shall be payable in any manner permitted under Section 9.1.

7.3            Disposition of Forfeitures .

(a)           Subject to the limited possible application of Section 9.8, in the event a Participant incurs 5 consecutive Breaks in Service, forfeiture shall occur.

(b)           In the event a Participant terminates Service and receives (or is deemed to receive) a distribution, then the forfeitable portion of his Employee Stock Ownership Account, including Investment Adjustments, shall be forfeited as of the date the Participant terminates Service, and such forfeiture shall be reallocated to other Participants pursuant to Section 5.4.

(c)           In the event a former Participant is rehired, any amounts previously forfeited from his Accounts in connection with his previous termination of Service shall be restored.

 
 

 

ARTICLE VIII
EMPLOYEE STOCK OWNERSHIP PROVISIONS

8.1            Right to Demand Employer Securities .

A Participant entitled to a distribution from his Account shall be entitled to demand that his interest in the Account be distributed to him in the form of Employer Securities, all subject to Section 9.9.  The Administrator shall notify the Participant of his right to demand distribution of his vested Account balance entirely in whole shares of Employer Securities (with the value of any fractional share paid in cash).  However, if the charter or by-laws of the Employer restrict ownership of substantially all of the outstanding Employer Securities to Employees and the Trust, then the distribution of a Participant's vested Account shall be made entirely in the form of cash or other property, and the Participant is not entitled to a distribution in the form of Employer Securities.

8.2            Voting Rights; Tendering Shares .

(a)           Each Participant with an Employee Stock Ownership Account shall be entitled to direct the Trustee as to the manner in which the Employer Securities in such account are to be voted.  Employer Securities held in the Employee Stock Ownership Suspense Account or the Exempt Loan Suspense Account shall be voted by the Trustee on each issue with respect to which shareholders are entitled to vote in the same proportion as the Participants who timely directed the Trustee as to the manner of voting their shares in the Employee Stock Ownership Accounts with respect to such issue (that is, affirmatively, negatively or with an abstention).  In the event that a Participant fails to give timely voting instructions to the Trustee with respect to the voting of Employer Securities that are allocated to his Employee Stock Ownership Account, the Trustee shall vote such shares in the same proportion as those shares on which the Trustee has received timely direction from the Participants with respect to such issue (that is, affirmatively, negatively or with an abstention).

(b)           Tender rights or exchange offers for Employer Securities will be passed through to Participants.  As soon as practicable after the commencement of a tender or exchange offer for Employer Securities, the Employer shall cause each person with power to control the response to such tender or exchange offer to be advised in writing the terms of the offer and, if applicable, to be provided with a form for instructing the Trustee, or for revoking such instruction, to tender or exchange shares of Employer Securities, to the extent permitted under the terms of such offer.  In advising such persons of the terms of the offer, the Employer may include statements from the board of directors setting forth its position with respect to the offer.  To the extent some or all of the Participants have not directed or have not timely directed the Trustee on how to respond to such tender or exchange, then the Trustee shall tender or exchange such Employer Securities on which no direction was received as directed by the Plan Administrator.  In addition, shares attributable to Employer Securities held unallocated in the Exempt Loan Suspense Account as a result of and Exempt Loan shall be tendered or exchanged (or not tendered or exchanged) in the same proportion as those tendered by Participants.  If the tender or exchange offer is limited so that all of the shares that the Trustee has been directed to tender or exchange cannot be sold or exchanged, the shares that each Participant directed to be tendered or exchanged shall be deemed to have been sold or exchanged in the same ratio that the number of shares actually sold or exchanged bears to the total number of shares that the Trustee was directed to tender or exchange. The Trustee shall hold the Participant's individual directions with respect to voting rights or tender decisions in confidence and, except as required by law, shall not divulge or release such individual directions to anyone associated with the Employer. The Employer may require verification of the Trustee's compliance with the directions received from Participants by any independent auditor selected by the Employer, provided that such auditor agrees to maintain the confidentiality of such individual directions. The Employer may develop procedures to facilitate the exercise of votes or tender rights, such as the use of facsimile transmissions for the Participants located in physically remote areas.

8.3            Nondiscrimination in Employee Stock Ownership Contribution .

In the event that the amount of the Employee Stock Ownership Contribution that would be required in any Plan Year to make the scheduled payments on an Exempt Loan would exceed the amount that would otherwise be deductible by the Employer for such Plan Year under Code Section 404, then no more than one-third of the Employee Stock Ownership Contribution for the Plan Year, which is also the Employer's taxable year, shall be allocated to the group of Employees who:

(a)           Was at any time during the Plan Year or the preceding Plan Year a 5 percent owner of the Employer; or

(b)           Received Compensation (within the meaning of Section 1.1(j)(2)) from the Employer for the preceding Plan Year in excess of $80,000, as adjusted under Code Section 414(q), and was in the “top-paid group” of Employees (as defined below) for such year.  An Employee shall be deemed a member of the “top-paid group” of Employees for a given Plan Year if such Employee is in the group of the top 20% of the Employees of the Employer when ranked on the basis of compensation (as defined above).

A former Employee shall be included in the group of Employees described above if either such former Employee was included in such group when such Employee separated from Service, or such former Employee was included in such group at any time after attaining age 55.

The determination of who is included in the group of Employees described above, including the determination of the number and identity of Employees in the “top-paid group,” will be made in accordance with Section 414(q) of the Code and the regulations thereunder. Amounts not allocable on account of this Section 8.3 shall be allocated among the Accounts of Participants who are not highly compensated employees, as defined herein, in accordance with Sections 5.5 and 5.6.

8.4            Dividends .

(a)           Dividends paid with respect to Employer Securities credited to a Participant's Employee Stock Ownership Account as of the record date for the dividend payment may be allocated to the Participant's Employee Stock Ownership Account, paid in cash to the Participant, or used by the Trustee to make payments on an Exempt Loan, pursuant to the direction of the Administrator.

(b)           If the Administrator shall direct that the aforesaid dividends shall be paid directly to Participants, the dividends paid with respect to such Employer Securities shall be paid to the Plan, from which dividend distributions in cash shall be made to the Participants with respect to the Employer Securities in their Employee Stock Ownership Accounts within 90 days of the close of the Plan Year in which the dividends were paid.

(c)           If the Administrator permits, then Participants shall be able to elect, in accordance with regulations or other guidance, to have the dividends paid and allocable to the Participant's Account either (i) distributed to the Participant (or his Beneficiary) no later than 90 days after close of the Plan Year in which the dividend is paid (reduced by any investment losses occurring from when the dividend is paid to the Plan to when it is distributed to the Participant), or (ii) retained in the Participant's Account under the Plan to be invested in Employer Securities.  Such election procedure shall be consistent with the requirements of Section 404(k) of the Code. If the Participant fails to make the election, he shall be deemed to have elected payment to the Plan and reinvestment in Employer Securities.  All elections shall be irrevocable upon the later of (i) the date of the Participant's election, or (ii) the end of the applicable election period.  Effective March 29, 2011, the election provided for in this Section 8.4(c) ("dividend reinvestment election") shall not be available to a Participant who, at the time the dividend is paid, is not actively employed by the Employer or a Related Employer (unless the Participant is on an Authorized Leave of Absence), and the other provisions of this Section 8.4 shall apply. A Participant's dividend reinvestment election shall terminate as of the date of the Participant's termination of employment with the Employer and all Related Employers.

(d)           If dividends on Employer Securities already allocated to Participants' Employee Stock Ownership Accounts are used to make payments on an Exempt Loan, the Employer Securities which are released from the Exempt Loan Suspense Account shall first be allocated to each Employee Stock Ownership Account in an amount equal to the amount of dividends that would have been allocated to such Account if the dividends had not been used to make payments on an Exempt Loan, and the remaining Employer Securities (if any) which are released shall be allocated on a pro-rata basis based on the shares of Employer Securities held by all Participants in their Employee Stock Ownership Accounts, all in accordance with Section 404(k) of the Code.

(e)           Dividends on Employer Securities obtained pursuant to an Exempt Loan and still held in the Exempt Loan Suspense Account may be used to make payments on an Exempt Loan, as described in Section 8.6.

 
 

 

8.5            Exempt Loans .

(a)           The Sponsor may direct the Trustee to obtain Exempt Loans.  The Exempt Loan shall be primarily for the benefit of the Participants and their Beneficiaries.  The Exempt Loan may take the form of (i) a loan from a bank or other commercial lender to purchase Employer Securities (ii) a loan from the Employer to the Plan; or (iii) an installment sale of Employer Securities to the Plan.  The proceeds of any such Exempt Loan shall be used, within a reasonable time after the Exempt Loan is obtained, only to purchase Employer Securities, repay the Exempt Loan, or repay any prior Exempt Loan.  Any such Exempt Loan shall provide for no more than a reasonable rate of interest and shall be without recourse against the Plan.  The number of years to maturity under the Exempt Loan must be definitely ascertainable at all times.  The only assets of the Plan that may be given as collateral for an Exempt Loan are Financed Shares acquired with the proceeds of the Exempt Loan and Financed Shares that were used as collateral for a prior Exempt Loan repaid with the proceeds of the current Exempt Loan.  Such Financed Shares so pledged shall be placed in an Exempt Loan Suspense Account.  No person or institution entitled to payment under an Exempt Loan shall have recourse against Trust assets other than the Financed Shares, the Employer Stock Ownership Contribution (other than contributions of Employer Securities) that is available under the Plan to meet obligations under the Exempt Loan, and earnings attributable to such Financed Shares and the investment of such contribution.  Any Employee Stock Ownership Contribution paid during the Plan Year in which an Exempt Loan is made (whether before or after the date the proceeds of the Exempt Loan are received), any Employee Stock Ownership Contribution paid thereafter until the Exempt Loan has been repaid in full, and all earnings from investment of such Employee Stock Ownership Contribution, without regard to whether any such Employee Stock Ownership Contribution and earnings have been allocated to Participants' Employee Stock Ownership Accounts, shall be available to meet obligations under the Exempt Loan as such obligations accrue, or prior to the time such obligations accrue, unless otherwise provided by the Employer at the time any such contribution is made.  Any pledge of Employer Securities shall provide for the release of Financed Shares upon the payment of any portion of the Exempt Loan.

(b)           For each Plan Year during the duration of the Exempt Loan, the number of Financed Shares released from such pledge shall equal the number of Financed Shares held immediately before release for the current Plan Year multiplied by a fraction.  The numerator of the fraction is the sum of principal and interest paid in such Plan Year.  The denominator of the fraction is the sum of the numerator plus the principal and interest to be paid for all future years.  Such years will be determined without taking into account any possible extension or renewal periods.  If interest on any Exempt Loan is variable, the interest to be paid in future years under the Exempt Loan shall be computed by using the interest rate applicable as of the end of the Plan Year.

(c)           Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Trustee may, in accordance with the direction of the Administrator, obtain an Exempt Loan pursuant to the terms of which the number of Financed Shares to be released from encumbrance shall be determined with reference to principal payments only.  In the event that such an Exempt Loan is obtained, annual payments of principal and interest shall be at a cumulative rate that is not less rapid at any time than level payments of such amounts for not more than 10 years.  The amount of interest in any such annual loan repayment shall be disregarded only to the extent that it would be determined to be interest under standard loan amortization tables.  The requirement set forth in the preceding sentence shall not be applicable from the time that, by reason of a renewal, extension, or refinancing, the sum of the expired duration of the Exempt Loan, the renewal period, the extension period, and the duration of a new Exempt Loan exceeds 10 years.

8.6            Exempt Loan Payments .

(a)           Payments of principal and interest on any Exempt Loan during a Plan Year shall be made by the Trustee (as directed by the Administrator) only from (1) the Employee Stock Ownership Contribution to the Trust made to meet the Plan's obligation under an Exempt Loan (other than contributions of Employer Securities) and from any earnings attributable to Financed Shares and investments of such contributions (both received during or prior to the Plan Year); (2) the proceeds of a subsequent Exempt Loan made to repay a prior Exempt Loan; and (3) the proceeds of the sale of any Financed Shares.  Such contribution and earnings shall be accounted for separately by the Plan until the Exempt Loan is repaid.

(b)           Employer Securities released from the Exempt Loan Suspense Account by reason of the payment of principal or interest on an Exempt Loan from amounts allocated to Participants' Employee Stock Ownership Accounts shall immediately upon release be allocated as set forth in Section 5.5.

(c)           The Employer shall contribute to the Trust sufficient amounts to enable the Trust to pay principal and interest on any such Exempt Loans as they are due, provided, however, that no such contribution shall exceed the limitations in Section 5.6.  In the event that such contributions by reason of the limitations in Section 5.6 are insufficient to enable the Trust to pay principal and interest on such Exempt Loan as it is due, then upon the Administrator's direction the Employer shall:

(1)           Make an Exempt Loan to the Trust in sufficient amounts to meet such principal and interest payments.  Such new Exempt Loan shall be subordinated to the prior Exempt Loan.  Employer Securities released from the pledge of the prior Exempt Loan shall be pledged as collateral to secure the new Exempt Loan.  Such Employer Securities will be released from this new pledge and allocated to the Employee Stock Ownership Accounts of the Participants in accordance with the applicable provisions of the Plan;

(2)           Purchase any Financed Shares in an amount necessary to provide the Trustee with sufficient funds to meet the principal and interest repayments.  Any such sale by the Plan shall meet the requirements of Section 408(e) of the Act; or

(3)           Any combination of the foregoing.

However, the Employer shall not, pursuant to the provisions of this subsection, do, fail to do or cause to be done any act or thing which would result in a disqualification of the Plan as an employee stock ownership plan under Section 4975(e)(7) of the Code.

(d)           Except as provided in Section 8.1 above and notwithstanding any amendment to or termination of the Plan which causes it to cease to qualify as an employee stock ownership plan within the meaning of Section 4975(e)(7) of the Code, or any repayment of an Exempt Loan, no shares of Employer Securities acquired with the proceeds of an Exempt Loan obtained by the Trust to purchase Employer Securities may be subject to a put, call or other option, or buy-sell or similar arrangement, while such shares are held by the Plan or when such shares are distributed from the Plan.  The provisions of this Section 8.6(d) shall continue to be applicable to Employer Securities held by the Trustee, whether or not allocated to Participants' and Former Participants' Accounts, even if the Plan ceases to be an employee stock ownership plan, as defined in Section 4975(e)(7) of the Code.

8.7            Put Option .

In the event that the Employer Securities distributed to a Participant are not readily tradable on an established market, the Participant shall be entitled to require that the Employer repurchase the Employer Securities under a fair valuation formula, as provided by governmental regulations.  The Participant or Beneficiary shall be entitled to exercise the put option described in the preceding sentence for a period of not more than 60 days following the date of distribution of Employer Securities to him.  If the put option is not exercised within such 60-day period, the Participant or Beneficiary may exercise the put option during an additional period of not more than 60 days after the beginning of the first day of the first Plan Year following the Plan Year in which the first put option period occurred, all as provided in regulations promulgated by the Secretary of the Treasury.

If a Participant exercises the foregoing put option with respect to Employer Securities that were distributed as part of a total distribution pursuant to which a Participant's Employee Stock Ownership Account is distributed to him in a single taxable year, the Employer or the Plan may elect to pay the purchase price of the Employer Securities over a period not to exceed 5 years.  Such payments shall be made in substantially equal installments not less frequently than annually over a period beginning not later than 30 days after the exercise of the put option.  Reasonable interest shall be paid to the Participant with respect to the unpaid balance of the purchase price, and adequate security shall be provided with respect thereto.  In the event that a Participant exercises a put option with respect to Employer Securities that are distributed as part of an installment distribution, if permissible under Section 9.5, the amount to be paid for such securities shall be paid not later than 30 days after the exercise of the put option.

8.8            Diversification Requirements .

(a)           Each Participant who is fully vested in his Account and has attained age 50 may elect, beginning after the close of the Plan Year in which such requirements are satisfied (the “Diversification Year”), to have at least 25 percent of his Employee Stock Ownership Account diversified from investment in Employer Securities.  This is a one-time election. After the fifth anniversary of the last day of the Participant's Diversification Year, an eligible Participant may elect (on a one-time basis) to have at least 50 percent of his Employee Stock Ownership Account diversified from investment in Employer Securities.  The diversification process shall be carried out in accordance with procedures promulgated by the Administrator, and coordinated with the diversification requirements of Section 8.8(b).

(b)           Each Participant who has completed at least 10 years of participation in the Plan and has attained age 55 may elect within 90 days after the close of each Plan Year during his “qualified election period” to direct the Plan as to the investment of at least (that is, up to) 25 percent of his Employee Stock Ownership Account (to the extent such percentage exceeds the amount to which a prior election under this Section 8.8(b) had been made). For purposes of this Section 8.8(b), the term “qualified election period” shall mean the 5-Plan-Year period beginning with the Plan Year after the Plan Year in which the Participant attains age 55 (or, if later, beginning with the Plan Year after the first Plan Year in which the Employee first completes at least 10 years of participation in the Plan). In the case of an Employee who has attained age 60 and completed 10 years of participation in the prior Plan Year and in the case of the election year in which any other Participant who has met the minimum age and service requirements for diversification can make his last election hereunder, he shall be entitled to direct the Plan as to the investment of (that is, up to) at least 50 percent of his Employee Stock Ownership Account (to the extent such percentage exceeds the amount to which a prior election under this Section 8.8(b) had been made). Notwithstanding the foregoing, if the fair market value of the Employer Securities allocated to the Employee Stock Ownership Account of a Participant otherwise entitled to diversify hereunder is $500 or less as of the Valuation Date immediately preceding the first day of any election period, then such Participant shall not be entitled to an election under this Section 8.8(b) for that qualified election period.

(c)           The Plan shall diversify a Participant's Employee Stock Ownership Account pursuant to an election made under Section 8.8(a) or Section 8.8(b) by making a distribution of the elected amount to the Participant or his designated Beneficiary within 90 days after the election.  Such distribution may either be in cash or in the form of Employer Securities and, if an eligible rollover distribution within the meaning of Code Section 402(c)(4), may be directly transferred to an eligible retirement plan in a direct transfer pursuant to Section 9.10.

(d)           Diversification elections under this Section 8.8 shall be restricted, delayed or eliminated if and to the extent that the Administrator determines that such elections would cause the Plan not to be invested primarily in Employer Securities.  Notwithstanding the preceding sentence, diversification elections shall be permitted and implemented to the extent necessary to comply with Code Section 401(a)(28)(B), and such diversification elections shall be given priority over other diversification elections.

8.9            Independent Appraiser .

An independent appraiser meeting the requirements of the regulations promulgated under Code Section 170(a)(1) shall value the Employer Securities in those Plan Years when such securities are not readily tradable on an established securities market.

 
 

 

ARTICLE IX
PAYMENTS AND DISTRIBUTIONS

9.1            Payments on Termination of Service - In General .

All benefits provided under this Plan shall be funded by the value of a Participant's vested Account in the Plan.  As soon as practicable after a Participant's Retirement, Disability, death or other termination of Service, the Administrator shall ascertain the value of his vested Account, as provided in Article V, and the Administrator shall hold or dispose of the same in accordance with the following provisions of this Article IX.

9.2            Commencement of Payments .

(a)            Distributions upon Retirement, Disability or Death .  Upon a Participant's Retirement, Disability or death, payment of benefits under this Plan shall, unless the Participant otherwise elects (in accordance with Section 9.3), commence as soon as practicable after the Valuation Date next following the date of the Participant's Retirement, Disability or death.

(b)            Distribution following Termination of Service .  Unless a Participant elects otherwise, if a Participant terminates Service prior to Retirement, Disability or death, he shall be accorded an opportunity to commence receipt of benefits as soon as administratively practicable after his termination of Service.  A Participant who terminates Service with a vested Account balance shall be entitled to receive from the Administrator a statement of his benefits.  If a Participant's vested Account balance does not exceed $5,000, the Plan Administrator shall distribute his vested Account balance as soon as administratively feasible after the date the Participant terminates Service, without the consent of the Participant or his spouse.

(c)            Distribution of Larger Accounts .

(1)           If the value of a Participant's vested Account balance exceeds $5,000, and the Account balance is immediately distributable, the Participant must consent to any distribution of such vested Account balance.  The consent of the Participant shall not be required to the extent that a distribution is required to satisfy Code Section 401(a)(9) or Code Section 415.

(2)           The consent of the Participant shall be obtained in writing within the 180-day period (90-day period for Plan Years beginning before October 1, 2007) ending on the date the distribution is to be made.  The Administrator shall notify the Participant of the right to defer a distribution until the Participant has attained his Normal Retirement Date.  The notification shall be provided no less than 30 days and no more than 180 days (90 days for notices given in Plan Years beginning before October 1, 2007) prior to the Plan distribution date.  The Administrator must clearly inform the Participant: (a) that the Participant has a right to a period of at least 30 days after receiving the notice to decide whether or not to elect a distribution (and, if applicable, a particular distribution option); (b) that there are consequences for failing to defer receipt of a distribution; (c) that the Participant must affirmatively elect a distribution after receiving the 30-day notice, and (d) any other information required under Treasury Regulations.

9.3            Mandatory Commencement of Benefits .

(a)           Unless a Participant elects otherwise, in writing, distribution of benefits will begin no later than the 60th day after the latest to occur of the close of the Plan Year in which (i) the Participant attains age 65, (ii) the tenth anniversary of the Plan Year in which the Participant commenced participation, or (iii) the Participant terminates Service with the Employer and all Related Employers.

(b)           In the event that the Plan shall be subsequently amended to provide for a form of distribution other than a lump sum, if the Participant's interest is to be distributed in other than a lump sum, the following minimum distribution rules shall apply on or after the required beginning date:

(1)           All distributions required under this Section 9.3(b) shall be determined and made in accordance with the Treasury Regulation under Code Section 401(a)(9).

(2)           Time and Manner of Distribution.

(A)           The Participant's entire interest will be distributed, or begin to be distributed, to the Participant no later than the Participant 's Required Beginning Date.

(B)           If the Participant dies before distributions begin, the Participant 's entire interest will be distributed, or begin to be distributed, no later than as follows:

(i)           If the Participant 's surviving spouse is the Participant's sole designated beneficiary, then distributions to the surviving spouse will begin by December 31 of the calendar year immediately following the calendar year in which the Participant died, or by December 31 of the calendar year in which the Participant would have attained age 70½, if later.

(ii)           If the Participant's surviving spouse is not the Participant's sole designated beneficiary, then distributions to the designated beneficiary will begin by December 31 of the calendar year immediately following the calendar year in which the Participant died.

(iii)            If there is no designated beneficiary as of September 30 of the year following the year of the Participant's death, the Participant's entire interest will be distributed by December 31 of the calendar year containing the fifth anniversary of the Participant's death.

(iv)           If the participant's surviving spouse is the participant's sole designated beneficiary and the surviving spouse dies after the participant but before distributions to the surviving spouse begin, this Section 9.3(b)(2)(B), other than Section 9.3(b)(2)(B)(i), will apply as if the surviving spouse were the participant.

For purposes of this Section 9.3(b)(2)(B) and Section 9.3(b)(4) ,unless Section 9.3(b)(2)(B)(iv) applies, distributions are considered to begin on the Participant's required beginning date. If Section 9.3(b)(2)(B)(iv) applies, distributions are considered to begin on the date distributions are required to begin to the surviving spouse under Section 9.3(b)(2)(B)(i).

(3)           Required Minimum Distributions During Participant's Lifetime.  During the Participant's lifetime, the minimum amount that will be distributed for each distribution calendar year is the lesser of:

(A)           the quotient obtained by dividing the Participant's account balance by the distribution period in the Uniform Lifetime Table set forth in section 1.401(a)(9)-9 of the Treasury Regulations, using the Participant's age as of the Participant's birthday in the distribution calendar year; or

(B)           if the Participant's sole designated beneficiary for the distribution calendar year is the Participant's spouse, the quotient obtained by dividing the Participant's account balance by the number in the Joint and Last Survivor Table set forth in section 1.401(a)(9)-9 of the Treasury Regulations, using the Participant's and spouse's attained ages as of the Participant's and spouse's birthdays in the distribution calendar year.

Required minimum distributions will be determined under this Section 9.3(b)(2) beginning with the first distribution calendar year and up to and including the distribution calendar year that includes the participant's date of death.

 
(4)
Required Minimum Distributions After Participant's Death.

(A)           Participant Survived by Designated Beneficiary. If the Participant dies on or after the date distributions begin and there is a designated beneficiary, the minimum amount that will be distributed for each distribution calendar year after the year of the Participant's death is the quotient obtained by dividing the Participant's account balance by the longer of the remaining life expectancy of the Participant or the remaining life expectancy of the Participant's designated beneficiary, determined as follows:

(i)           The Participant's remaining life expectancy is calculated using the age of the participant in the year of death, reduced by one for each subsequent year.

(ii)           If the Participant's surviving spouse is the Participant's sole designated beneficiary, the remaining life expectancy of the surviving spouse is calculated for each distribution calendar year after the year of the Participant's death using the surviving spouse's age as of the spouse's birthday in that year. For distribution calendar years after the year of the surviving spouse's death, the remaining life expectancy of the surviving spouse is calculated using the age of the surviving spouse as of the spouse's birthday in the calendar year of the spouse's death, reduced by one for each subsequent calendar year.

(iii)           If the Participant's surviving spouse is not the Participant's sole designated beneficiary, the designated beneficiary's remaining life expectancy is calculated using the age of the beneficiary in the year following the year of the participant's death, reduced by one for each subsequent year.

(B)           If the Participant dies on or after the date distributions begin and there is no designated beneficiary as of September 30 of the year after the year of the Participant's death, the minimum amount that will be distributed for each distribution calendar year after the year of the Participant's death is the quotient obtained by dividing the Participant's  account balance by the Participant's remaining life expectancy calculated using the age of the Participant in the year of death, reduced by one for each subsequent year.

 
(5)
Death Before Date Distributions Begin.

(A)           Participant Survived by Designated Beneficiary. If the Participant dies before the date distributions begin and there is a designated beneficiary, the minimum amount that will be distributed for each distribution calendar year after the year of the Participant's death is the quotient obtained by dividing the Participant's account balance by the remaining life expectancy of the Participant's designated beneficiary, determined as provided in (4) above.

(B)           No Designated Beneficiary. If the Participant dies before the date distributions begin and there is no designated beneficiary as of September 30 of the year following the year of the Participant's death, distribution of the Participant's entire interest will be completed by December 31 of the calendar year containing the fifth anniversary of the Participant's  death.

(C)           Death of Surviving Spouse Before Distributions to Surviving Spouse Are Required to Begin. If the Participant dies before the date distributions begin, the Participant's surviving spouse is the Participant's sole designated beneficiary, and the surviving spouse dies before distributions are required to begin to the surviving spouse, this paragraph (5) will apply as if the surviving spouse were the Participant.

 
(6)
Definitions.

(A)           Designated beneficiary. The individual who is designated as the beneficiary under the Plan and is the designated beneficiary under Code Section 401(a)(9) of and section 1.401(a)(9)-1, Q&A-4, of the Treasury Regulations.

(B)           Distribution calendar year. A calendar year for which a minimum distribution is required. For distributions beginning before the Participant's death, the first distribution calendar year is the calendar year immediately preceding the calendar year which contains the Participant's required beginning date. For distributions beginning after the Participant's death, the first distribution calendar year is the calendar year in which distributions are required to begin under Section 9.3(b)(2).  The required minimum distribution for the Participant's first distribution calendar year will be made on or before the Participant's required beginning date. The required minimum distribution for other distribution calendar years, including the required minimum distribution for the distribution calendar year in which the Participant's  required beginning date occurs, will be made on or before December 31 of that distribution calendar year.

(C)           Life expectancy. Life expectancy as computed by use of the Single Life Table in section 1.401(a)(9)-9 of the Treasury Regulations.

(D)           Participant's account balance. The account balance as of the last Valuation Date in the calendar year immediately preceding the distribution calendar year (valuation calendar year) increased by the amount of any contributions made and allocated or forfeitures allocated to the account balance as of dates in the valuation calendar year after the valuation date and decreased by distributions made in the valuation calendar year after the valuation date. The account balance for the valuation calendar year includes any amounts rolled over or transferred to the Plan either in the valuation calendar year or in the distribution calendar year if distributed or transferred in the valuation calendar year.

 
(E)
Required beginning date. The date specified in Section 9.4.

(4)           Distributions shall be made under this Section 9.3 for the 2009 calendar year notwithstanding that they are not required to be made pursuant to the Workers, Retiree and Employer Recovery Act of 2008. Any such distribution made during 2009 that otherwise qualifies as a required minimum distribution shall be treated as an Eligible Rollover Distribution as defined in Section 9.10, except that (A) such amounts are not subject to the mandatory tax withholding requirements of Code section 3405(c), (B) the Participant need not be given an opportunity to make a Direct Rollover of the distributed amount, and (C) the tax notice required by Code section 402(f) does not have to be provided to that Participant.

9.4            Required Beginning Dates.

(a)            General Rule . The required beginning date of a Participant who is a 5-percent owner of the Employer is the first day of April of the calendar year following the calendar year in which the Participant attains age 70-1/2.  The required beginning date of a Participant who is not a 5-percent owner shall be April 1 of the calendar year following the later of either:  (i) the calendar year in which the Participant attains age 70-1/2, or (ii) the calendar year in which the Participant retires.

(b)            5-percent owner .  A Participant is treated as a 5-percent owner for purposes of this section if such Participant is a 5-percent owner as defined in section 416(i) of the Code (determined in accordance with section 416 but without regard to whether the plan is top-heavy) at any time during the Plan Year ending with or within the calendar year in which such owner attains age 66-1/2 or any subsequent Plan Year.  Once distributions have begun to a 5-percent owner under this section, they must continue to be distributed, even if the Participant ceases to be a 5-percent owner in a subsequent year.

9.5            Form of Payment .

Each Participant's vested Account balance shall be distributed in a lump sum payment.  Notwithstanding the preceding sentence, but subject to Section 9.3, the Administrator may not distribute a lump sum without the Participant's consent when the present value of a Participant's total Account balance is in excess of $1,000.  This form of payment shall be the normal form of distribution.  However, in the event that the Administrator must commence distributions, as required by Section 9.4 herein, with respect to an Employee who has attained age 70 ½ and is still employed by the Employer, if the Employee does not elect a lump sum distribution, payments shall be made in installments in such amounts as shall satisfy the minimum distribution rules of Section 9.3.

9.6            Payments Upon Termination of Plan .

Upon termination of this Plan pursuant to Sections 13.2, 13.4, 13.5 or 13.6, the Administrator shall continue to perform its duties and the Trustee as directed by the Administrator, and shall make all payments upon the following terms, conditions and provisions:  The Account balance of each affected Participant and Former Participant shall immediately become fully vested and nonforfeitable; the Account balance of all Participants and Former Participants shall be determined within 60 days after such termination, and the Administrator shall have the same powers to direct the Trustee in making payments as contained in Sections 9.1 and 13.5.


 
 

 


9.7            Distributions Pursuant to Qualified Domestic Relations Orders .

Nothing contained in this Plan prevents the Trustee, in accordance with the direction of the Retirement and Benefits Committee, from complying with the provisions of a Qualified Domestic Relations Order. This Plan specifically permits distribution to an alternate payee under a Qualified Domestic Relations Order at any time, irrespective of whether the Participant has attained his earliest retirement age (as defined under Code §414(p)) under the Plan. A distribution to an alternate payee prior to the Participant's attainment of earliest retirement age is available only if: (1) the order specifies distribution at that time or permits an agreement between the Plan and the alternate payee to authorize an earlier distribution; and (2) if the present value of the alternate payee's benefits under the Plan exceeds $5,000, and the order requires, the alternate payee consents to any distribution occurring prior to the Participant's attainment of earliest retirement age. Nothing in this Section 9.7 gives a Participant a right to receive distribution at a time otherwise not permitted under the Plan nor does it permit the alternate payee to receive a form of payment not otherwise permitted under the Plan.

The Committee must establish reasonable procedures to determine the qualified status of a domestic relations order. Upon receiving a domestic relations order, the Committee promptly will notify the Participant and any alternate payee named in the order, in writing, of the receipt of the order and the Plan's procedures for determining the qualified status of the order. Within a reasonable period of time after receiving the domestic relations order, the Committee must determine the qualified status of the order and must notify the Participant and each alternate payee, in writing, of its determination. The Committee must provide notice under this paragraph by mailing to the individual's address specified in the domestic relations order, or in a manner consistent with Department of Labor regulations.

If any portion of the Participant's Account is payable during the period the Committee is making its determination of the qualified status of the domestic relations order, the Committee must make a separate accounting of the amounts payable. If the Committee determines the order is a Qualified Domestic Relations Order within 18 months of the date amounts first are payable following receipt of the order, the Committee will direct the Trustee to distribute the payable amounts in accordance with the order. If the Committee does not make its determination of the qualified status of the order within the 18 month determination period, the Committee will direct the Trustee to distribute the payable amounts in the manner the Plan would distribute if the order did not exist and will apply the order prospectively if the Committee later determines the order is a Qualified Domestic Relations Order. To the extent it is not inconsistent with the provisions of the Qualified Domestic Relations Order, the Committee may direct the Trustee to invest any partitioned amount in a segregated sub-account or separate account and to invest the account in Federally insured, interest-bearing savings account(s) or time deposit(s) (or a combination of both), or in other fixed income investments. A segregated sub-account remains a part of the Trust, but it alone shares in any income it earns, and it alone bears any expense or loss it incurs. The Trustee will make any payments or distributions required under this Section 9.7 by separate benefit checks or other separate distribution to the alternate payee(s).

9.8            Cash-Out Distributions .

If the Plan becomes subject to its top heavy vesting schedule, or the Plan is amended  to implement a graded vesting schedule, a Participant who receives a distribution of his entire vested Account balance because of the termination of his participation in the Plan, the Plan shall disregard a Participant's Service with respect to which such cash-out distribution shall have been made, in computing his Account balance in the event that a Former Participant shall again become an Employee and become eligible to participate in the Plan.  Such a distribution shall be deemed to be made on termination of participation in the Plan if it is made not later than the close of the second Plan Year following the Plan Year in which such termination occurs.  The forfeitable portion of a Participant's Account balance shall be restored upon repayment to the Plan by such Former Participant of the full amount of the cash-out distribution, provided that the Former Participant again becomes an Employee.  Such repayment must be made by the Employee not later than the end of the 5-year period beginning with the date the Participant is reemployed by the Company or a Related Employer, or the close of the first period of 5 consecutive Breaks commencing after the distribution to the Participant.  Forfeitures required to be restored by virtue of such repayment shall be restored from the following sources in the following order of preference: (i) current forfeitures; (ii) an additional Employee Stock Ownership Contribution, as appropriate, and as subject to Section 5.6; and (iii) investment earnings of the Fund.  In the event that a Participant's Account balance is totally forfeitable, a Participant shall be deemed to have received a distribution of zero upon his termination of Service.  In the event of a return to Service within 5 years of the date of his deemed distribution, the Participant shall be deemed to have repaid his distribution in accordance with the rules of this Section 9.8.

9.9            ESOP Distribution Rules .

Notwithstanding any provision of this Article IX to the contrary, the distribution of a Participant's Employee Stock Ownership Account (unless the Participant elects otherwise in writing) shall commence as soon as administratively feasible as of the first Valuation Date coincident with or next following his death, Disability or termination of Service, but not later than 1 year after the close of the Plan Year in which the Participant separates from Service by reason of the attainment of his Normal Retirement Date, Disability, death or separation from Service.  In addition, all distributions hereunder shall, to the extent that the Participant's Account is invested in Employer Securities, be made in the form of Employer Securities or cash, or a combination of Employer Securities and cash, in the discretion of the Administrator, subject to the Participant's right to demand Employer Securities in accordance with Section 8.1.  Fractional shares, however, may be distributed in the form of cash.

9.10            Direct Rollover .

(a)           Notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary that would otherwise limit a distributee's election under this Article IX, a distributee may elect, at the time and in the manner prescribed by the Administrator, to have any portion of an "eligible rollover distribution" paid directly to an "eligible retirement plan" specified by the distributee in a "direct rollover."

(b)           For purposes of this Section 9.10, an "eligible rollover distribution" is any distribution of all or any portion of the balance to the credit of the distributee, except that an "eligible rollover distribution" does not include:  any distribution that is one of a series of substantially equal periodic payments (not less frequently than annually) made for the life (or life expectancy) of the distributee or the joint lives (or joint life expectancies) of the distributee and the distributee's designated Beneficiary, or for a specified period of ten years or more; any distribution to the extent such distribution is required under section 401(a)(9) of the Code; the portion of any distribution that is not includable in gross income (determined without regard to the exclusion for net unrealized appreciation with respect to Employer Securities); and any hardship distribution made on behalf of the Participant.

(c)           For purposes of this Section 9.10, an "eligible retirement plan" is an individual retirement account described in section 408(a) of the Code, an individual retirement annuity described in section 408(b) of the Code, an annuity plan described in section 403(a) of the Code, or a qualified trust described in section 401(a) of the Code, that accepts the distributee's eligible rollover distribution.  However, in the case of an "eligible rollover distribution" to the surviving spouse or a non-spouse designated beneficiary, an "eligible retirement plan" is an individual retirement account or individual retirement annuity (and in the case of a non-spouse designated beneficiary an inherited individual retirement account or individual retirement annuity).  An eligible retirement plan shall also mean an annuity contract described in section 403(b) of the Code and an eligible plan under section 457(b) of the Code which is maintained by a state, political subdivision of a state, or any agency or instrumentality of a state or political subdivision of a state and which agrees to separately account for amounts transferred into such plan from this plan.  The definition of eligible retirement plan shall also apply in the case of a distribution to a surviving spouse or a non-spouse designated beneficiary, or to a spouse or former spouse who is the alternate payee under a qualified domestic relation order, as defined in section 414(p) of the Code.  Effective January 1, 2008, the term “eligible retirement plan” shall also mean an individual retirement plan described in Code Section 408A(b) (a Roth IRA) subject to any limitations described in Code Section 408A(c).

(d)           For purposes of this Section 9.10, a distributee includes a Participant or Former Participant.  In addition, the Participant's or Former Participant's surviving spouse and the Participant's or Former Participant's spouse or former spouse who is the alternate payee under a Qualified Domestic Relations Order are "distributees" with regard to the interest of the spouse or former spouse.

(e)           For purposes of this Section 9.10, a "direct rollover" is a payment by the Plan to the "eligible retirement plan" specified by the distributee.

9.11            Waiver of 30-day Notice .

If a distribution is one to which Sections 401(a)(11) and 417 of the Code do not apply, such distribution may commence less than 30 days after the notice required under Section 1.411(a)-11(c) of the Income Tax Regulations is given, provided that: (1) the Administrator clearly informs the Participant that the Participant has a right to a period of at least 30 days after receiving the notice to consider the decision of whether or not to elect a distribution (and, if applicable, a particular distribution option), and (2) the Participant, after receiving the notice, affirmatively elects a distribution.

9.12            Re-employed Veterans .

Notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary, contributions, benefits, Plan loan repayment suspensions and Service credit with respect to Qualified Military Service will be provided in accordance with Code Section 414(u).

9.13            Share Legend .

Employer Securities held or distributed by the Trustee may include such legend restrictions on transferability as the Employer may reasonably require in order to assure compliance with applicable Federal and State securities and other laws.

9.14.
Power to Reduce Benefit .

Notwithstanding Section 14.4, effective for judgments, orders, and decrees issued, and settlement agreements entered into, on or after August 5, 1997, a Participant's Plan benefit may be reduced to satisfy liabilities of the Participant to the Plan due to:

(a)           The Participant's being convicted of committing a crime involving the Plan;

(b)           A civil judgment (or consent order or decree) entered by a court in an action brought in connection with a violation of the fiduciary provisions of the Act; or

(c)           A settlement agreement between the Department of Labor and the Participant in connection with a violation of the fiduciary provisions of the Act.

The court order establishing such liability must require that the Participant's benefit in the Plan be applied to satisfy the liability.

 
 

 

ARTICLE X
PROVISIONS RELATING TO TOP-HEAVY PLANS

10.1            Top-Heavy Rules to Control .

Anything contained in this Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, if for any Plan Year the Plan is a top-heavy plan, as determined pursuant to Section 416 of the Code, then the Plan must meet the requirements of this Article X for such Plan Year.

10.2            Top-Heavy Plan Definitions .

Unless a different meaning is plainly implied by the context, the following terms as used in this Article X shall have the following meanings:

(a)            "Accrued Benefit" shall mean the account balances or accrued benefits of an Employee, calculated pursuant to Section 10.3.

(b)            "Determination Date" shall mean, with respect to any particular Plan Year of this Plan, the last day of the preceding Plan Year (or, in the case of the first Plan Year of the Plan, the last day of the first Plan Year).  In addition, the term "Determination Date" shall mean, with respect to any particular plan year of any plan (other than this Plan) in a Required Aggregation Group or a Permissive Aggregation Group, the last day of the plan year of such plan which falls within the same calendar year as the Determination Date for this Plan.

(c)            "Employer" shall mean the Employer (as defined in Section 1.1(q)) and any entity which is (1) a member of a controlled group including such Employer, while it is a member of such controlled group (within the meaning of Section 414(b) of the Code), (2) in a group of trades or businesses under common control with such Employer, while it is under common control (within the meaning of Section 414(c) of the Code), and (3) a member of an affiliated service group including such Employer, while it is a member of such affiliated service group (within the meaning of Section 414(m) of the Code).

(d)            "Key Employee" shall mean any Employee or former Employee (including any deceased  Employee) who at any time during the Plan Year that includes the Determination Date was an officer of the Employer having annual compensation greater than $130,000 (as adjusted under section 416(i)(1) of the Code), a 5-percent owner of the Employer, or a 1-percent owner of the Employer having annual compensation of more than $150,000.  For this purpose, annual compensation means compensation within the meaning of section 415(c)(3) of the Code.  The determination of who is a key employee will be made in accordance with section 416(i)(1) of the Code and the applicable regulations and other guidance of general applicability issued thereunder.

(e)            "Non-Key Employee" shall mean any Employee or former Employee (or any Beneficiary of such Employee or former Employee, as the case may be) who is not considered to be a Key Employee with respect to this Plan.

(f)            "Permissive Aggregation Group" shall mean all plans in the Required Aggregation Group and any other plans maintained by the Employer which satisfies Sections 401(a)(4) and 410 of the Code when considered together with the Required Aggregation Group.

(g)            "Required Aggregation Group" shall mean each plan (including any terminated plan) of the Employer in which a Key Employee is (or in the case of a terminated plan, had been) a Participant in the Plan Year containing the Determination Date or any of the 4 preceding Plan Years, and each other plan of the Employer which enables any plan of the Employer in which a Key Employee is a Participant to meet the requirements of Sections 401(a)(4) or 410 of the Code.

10.3            Calculation of Accrued Benefits .

(a)           An Employee's Accrued Benefit shall be equal to:

(1)           With respect to this Plan or any other defined contribution plan (other than a defined contribution pension plan) in a Required Aggregation Group or a Permissive Aggregation Group, the Employee's account balances under the respective plan, determined as of the most recent plan valuation date within a 12-month period ending on the Determination Date, including contributions actually made after the valuation date but before the Determination Date (and, in the first plan year of a plan, also including any contributions made after the Determination Date which are allocated as of a date in the first plan year).

(2)           With respect to any defined contribution pension plan in a Required Aggregation Group or a Permissive Aggregation Group, the Employee's account balances under the plan, determined as of the most recent plan valuation date within a 12-month period ending on the Determination Date, including contributions which have not actually been made, but which are due to be made as of the Determination Date.

(3)           With respect to any defined benefit plan in a Required Aggregation Group or a Permissive Aggregation Group, the present value of the Employee's accrued benefits under the plan, determined as of the most recent plan valuation date within a 12-month period ending on the Determination Date, pursuant to the actuarial assumptions used by such plan, and calculated as if the Employee terminated Service under such plan as of the valuation date (except that, in the first plan year of a plan, a current Participant's estimated Accrued Benefit as of the Determination Date shall be taken into account).

(4)           The present values of accrued benefits and the amounts of account balances of an employee as of the Determination Date shall be increased by the distributions made with respect to the employee under the Plan and any plan aggregated with the Plan under section 416(g)(2) of the Code during the 1-year period ending on the Determination Date.  The preceding sentence shall also apply to distributions under a terminated plan which, had it not been terminated, would have been aggregated with the Plan under section 416(g)(2)(A)(i) of the Code.  In the case of a distribution made for a reason other than severance from employment, death, or disability, this provision shall be applied by substituting "5-year period" for "1-year period."

(5)           The accrued benefits and accounts of any individual who has not performed services for the Employer during the 1-year period ending on the Determination Date shall not be taken into account.

(6)           The Accrued Benefit shall be calculated to include all amounts attributable to both Employer and Employee contributions, but shall exclude amounts attributable to voluntary deductible Employee contributions, if any.

(7)           Rollover and direct plan-to-plan transfers shall be taken into account as follows:

(A)           If the transfer is initiated by the Employee and made from a plan maintained by one employer to a plan maintained by another unrelated employer, the transferring plan shall continue to count the amount transferred; the receiving plan shall not count the amount transferred.

(B)           If the transfer is not initiated by the Employee or is made between plans maintained by related employers, the transferring plan shall no longer count the amount transferred; the receiving plan shall count the amount transferred.

10.4            Determination of Top-Heavy Status .

This Plan shall be considered to be a top-heavy plan for any Plan Year if, as of the Determination Date, the value of the Accrued Benefits of Key Employees exceeds 60% of the value of the Accrued Benefits of all eligible Employees under the Plan.  Notwithstanding the foregoing, if the Employer maintains any other qualified plan, the determination of whether this Plan is top-heavy shall be made after aggregating all other plans of the Employer in the Required Aggregation Group and, if desired by the Employer as a means of avoiding top-heavy status, after aggregating any other plan of the Employer in the Permissive Aggregation Group.  If the required Aggregation Group is top-heavy, then each plan contained in such group shall be deemed to be top-heavy, notwithstanding that any particular plan in such group would not otherwise be deemed to be top-heavy.  Conversely, if the Permissive Aggregation Group is not top-heavy, then no plan contained in such group shall be deemed to be top-heavy, notwithstanding that any particular plan in such group would otherwise be deemed to be top-heavy.  In no event shall a plan included in a top-heavy Permissive Aggregation Group be deemed a top-heavy plan unless such plan is also included in a top-heavy Required Aggregation Group.

10.5            Minimum Contribution .

(a)           For any Plan Year in which the Plan is top-heavy, each Non-Key Employee who has met the age and service requirements, if any, contained in the Plan, shall be entitled to a minimum contribution (which may include forfeitures otherwise allocable) equal to a percentage of such Non-Key Employee's compensation (as defined in Section 415 of the Code) as follows:

(1)           If the Non-Key Employee is not covered by a defined benefit plan maintained by the Employer, then the minimum contribution under this Plan shall be 3% of such Non-Key Employee's compensation.

(2)           If the Non-Key Employee is covered by a defined benefit plan maintained by the Employer, then the minimum contribution under this Plan shall be 5% of such Non-Key Employee's compensation.

(b)           Notwithstanding the foregoing, the minimum contribution otherwise allocable to a Non-Key Employee under this Plan shall be reduced in the following circumstances:

(1)           The percentage minimum contribution required under this Plan shall in no event exceed the percentage contribution made for the Key Employee for whom such percentage is the highest for the Plan Year after taking into account contributions under other defined contribution plans in this Plan's Required Aggregation Group; provided, however, that this Section 10.5(b)(1) shall not apply if this Plan is included in a Required Aggregation Group and this Plan enables a defined benefit plan in such Required Aggregation Group to meet the requirements of Section 401(a)(4) or 410 of the Code.

(2)           No minimum contribution shall be required (or the minimum contribution shall be reduced, as the case may be) for a Non-Key Employee under this Plan for any Plan Year if the Employer maintains another qualified plan under which a minimum benefit or contribution is being accrued or made on account of such Plan Year, in whole or in part, on behalf of the Non-Key Employee, in accordance with Section 416(c) of the Code.

(c)           For purposes of this Section 10.5, there shall be disregarded (1) any Employer contributions attributable to a salary reduction or similar arrangement, or (2) any Employer contributions to or any benefits under Chapter 21 of the Code (relating to the Federal Insurance Contributions Act), Title II of the Social Security Act, or any other federal or state law.

(d)           For purposes of this Section 10.5, minimum contributions shall be required to be made on behalf of only those Non-Key Employees, as described in Section 10.6(a), who have not terminated Service as of the last day of the Plan Year.  If a Non-Key Employee is otherwise entitled to receive a minimum contribution pursuant to this Section 10.5(d), the fact that such Non-Key Employee failed to complete 1,000 Hours of Service or failed to make any mandatory or elective contributions under this Plan, if any are so required, shall not preclude him from receiving such minimum contribution.

(e)           Matching contributions shall be taken into account for purposes of satisfying the minimum contribution requirements of section 416(c)(2) of the Code and the Plan.  The preceding sentence shall apply with respect to matching contributions under the Plan or, if the plan provides that the minimum contribution requirement shall be met in another plan, such other plan.  Matching contributions that are used to satisfy the minimum contribution requirements shall be treated as matching contributions for purposes of the actual contribution percentage test and other requirements of section 401(m) of the Code.


 
 

 


10.6
Vesting .

(a)           For any Plan Year in which the Plan is a top-heavy plan, a Participant’s Account shall continue to vest according to the following schedule (if such schedule is more favorable than the regular vesting schedule):

Years of Vesting Service Completed                                                                  Percentage Vested
Less than 2                                                          0%
2 but less than 3                                                                  20%
3 but less than 4                                                                  40%
4 but less than 5                                                                  60%
5 or more                                                      100%

After all Pre-PPA Exempt Loans (as defined in Section 7.2(b)) are repaid in full, the top-heavy vesting schedule shall be the same as in Section 7.2.

(b)           If for any Plan Year the Plan becomes top-heavy and the vesting schedule set forth in Section 10.6(a) becomes effective, then, even if the Plan ceases to be top-heavy in any subsequent Plan Year, the vesting schedule set forth in Section 10.7(a) shall remain applicable with respect to any Participant who has completed 3 or more Years of Service.


 
 

 

ARTICLE XI
ADMINISTRATION

11.1            Appointment of Administrator .

This Plan shall be administered by a committee consisting of up to 7 persons, whether or not Employees or Participants, who shall be appointed from time to time by the Board of Directors to serve at its pleasure.  Such Committee may, at the Board's discretion, be one and the same as the Committee or Retirement and Benefits Committee which administers the Sponsor's other employee benefit plans.  The Sponsor may require that each person appointed as an Administrator shall signify his acceptance by filing an acceptance with the Sponsor.  The term "Administrator" as used in this Plan shall refer to the members of the committee, either individually or collectively, as appropriate.  The authority to control and manage the operation and administration of the Plan is vested in the Administrator appointed by the Board of Directors. The Administrator shall have the rights, duties and obligations of an "administrator," as that term is defined in section 3(16)(A) of the Act, and of a "plan administrator," as that term is defined in Section 414(g) of the Code.  In the event that the Sponsor shall elect not to appoint any individuals to constitute a committee to administer the Plan, the Sponsor shall serve as the Administrator hereunder.

11.2            Resignation or Removal of Administrator .

An Administrator shall have the right to resign at any time by giving notice in writing, mailed or delivered to the Sponsor and to the Trustee.  Any Administrator who was an employee of the Employer at the time of his appointment shall be deemed to have resigned as an Administrator upon his termination of Service.  The Board of Directors may, in its discretion, remove any Administrator with or without cause, by giving notice in writing, mailed or delivered to the Administrator and to the Trustee.

11.3            Appointment of Successors:  Terms of Office, Etc.

Upon the death, resignation or removal of an Administrator, the Sponsor may appoint, by Board of Directors' resolution, a successor or successors.  Notice of termination of an Administrator and notice of appointment of a successor shall be made by the Sponsor in writing, with copies mailed or delivered to the Trustee, and the successor shall have all the rights and privileges and all of the duties and obligations of the predecessor.

11.4            Powers and Duties of Administrator .

The Administrator shall have the following duties and responsibilities in connection with the administration of this Plan:

(a)           To promulgate and enforce such rules, regulations and procedures as shall be proper for the efficient administration of the Plan, such rules, regulations and procedures to apply uniformly to all Employees, Participants and Beneficiaries;

(b)           To exercise discretion in determining all questions arising in the administration, interpretation and application of the Plan, including questions of eligibility and of the status and rights of Participants, Beneficiaries and any other persons hereunder;

(c)           To decide any dispute arising hereunder strictly in accordance with the terms of the Plan; provided, however, that no Administrator shall participate in any matter involving any questions relating solely to his own participation or benefits under this Plan;

(d)           To advise the Employer and direct the Trustee regarding the known future needs for funds to be available for distribution in order that the Trustee may establish investments accordingly;

(e)           To correct defects, supply omissions and reconcile inconsistencies to the extent necessary to effectuate the Plan;

(f)           To advise the Employer of the maximum deductible contribution to the Plan for each fiscal year;

(g)           To direct the Trustee concerning all matters requiring the Administrator's direction pursuant to the provisions of this Plan and the Trust Agreement;

(h)           To advise the Trustee on all terminations of Service by Participants, unless the Employer has so notified the Trustee;

(i)           To confer with the Trustee on the settling of any claims against the Fund;

(j)           To make recommendations to the Board of Directors with respect to proposed amendments to the Plan and the Trust Agreement;

(k)           To file all reports with government agencies, Employees and other parties as may be required by law, whether such reports are initially the obligation of the Employer, the Plan or the Trustee;

(l)           To have all such other powers as may be necessary to discharge its duties hereunder; and

(m)           To direct the Trustee to pay all expenses of administering this Plan, except to the extent that the Employer pays such expenses.

Full discretion is granted to the Administrator to interpret the Plan and to determine the benefits, rights and privileges of Participants, Beneficiaries or other persons affected by this Plan.  The Administrator shall exercise its discretion under the terms of this Plan and shall administer the Plan in accordance with its terms, such administration to be exercised uniformly so that all persons similarly situated shall be similarly treated.

11.5            Action by Administrator .

The Administrator may elect a Chairman and Secretary from among its members and may adopt rules for the conduct of its business.  A majority of the members then serving shall constitute a quorum for the transaction of business.  All resolutions or other action taken by the Administrator shall be by vote of a majority of those present at such meeting and entitled to vote.  Resolutions may be adopted or other action taken without a meeting upon written consent signed by at least a majority of the members.  All documents, instruments, orders, requests, directions, instructions and other papers shall be executed on behalf of the Administrator by either the Chairman or the Secretary of the Administrator, if any, or by any member or agent of the Administrator duly authorized to act on the Administrator's behalf.

11.6            Participation by Administrator .

No member of the committee constituting the Administrator shall be precluded from becoming a Participant in the Plan if he would be otherwise eligible, but he shall not be entitled to vote or act upon matters or to sign any documents relating specifically to his own participation under the Plan, except when such matters or documents relate to benefits generally.  If this disqualification results in the lack of a quorum, then the Board of Directors shall appoint a sufficient number of temporary members of the committee constituting the Administrator who shall serve for the sole purpose of determining such a question.

11.7            Agents .

The Administrator may employ agents and provide for such clerical, legal, actuarial, accounting, medical, advisory or other services as it deems necessary to perform its duties under this Plan.  The cost of such services and all other expenses incurred by the Administrator in connection with the administration of the Plan shall be paid from the Fund, unless paid by the Employer.


 
 

 

11.8            Allocation of Duties .

The duties, powers and responsibilities reserved to the Administrator may be allocated among its members so long as such allocation is pursuant to written procedures adopted by the Administrator, in which case, except as may be required by the Act, no Administrator shall have any liability, with respect to any duties, powers or responsibilities not allocated to him, for the acts of omissions of any other Administrator.

11.9            Delegation of Duties .

The Administrator may delegate any of its duties to any Employees of the Employer, or to any other person or firm, provided that the Administrator shall prudently choose such agents and rely in good faith on their actions.

11.10            Administrator's Action Conclusive .

Any action on matters within the authority of the Administrator shall be final and conclusive except as provided in Article XII.

11.11            Compensation and Expenses of Administrator .

No Administrator who is receiving compensation from the Employer as a full-time employee, as a director or agent, shall be entitled to receive any compensation or fee for his services hereunder.  Any other Administrator shall be entitled to receive such reasonable compensation for his services as an Administrator hereunder as may be mutually agreed upon between the Employer and such Administrator.  Any such compensation shall be paid from the Fund, unless paid by the Employer.  Each Administrator shall be entitled to reimbursement by the Employer for any reasonable and necessary expenditures incurred in the discharge of his duties.

11.12            Records and Reports .

The Administrator shall maintain adequate records of its actions and proceedings in administering this Plan and shall file all reports and take all other actions as it deems appropriate in order to comply with the Act, the Code and governmental regulations issued thereunder.

11.13            Reports of Fund Open to Participants .

The Administrator shall keep on file, in such form as it shall deem convenient and proper, all annual reports of the Fund received by the Administrator from the Trustee, and a statement of each Participant's interest in the Fund as from time to time determined.  The annual reports of the Fund and the statement of his Account balance, as well as a complete copy of the Plan and the Trust Agreement and copies of annual reports to the Internal Revenue Service, shall be made available by the Administrator to the Employer for examination by each Participant during reasonable hours at the office of the Employer, provided, however, that the statement of a Participant's Account balance shall not be made available for examination by any other Participant.

11.14            Named Fiduciary .

The Administrator is the named fiduciary for purposes of Section 402 of the Act and shall be the designated agent for receipt of service of process on behalf of the Plan.  It shall use the care and diligence in the performance of its duties under this Plan that are required of fiduciaries under the Act.  Nothing in this Plan shall preclude the Employer from purchasing liability insurance to protect the Administrator with respect to its duties under this Plan.

11.15            Information from Employer .

The Employer shall promptly furnish all necessary information to the Administrator to permit it to perform its duties under this Plan.  The Administrator shall be entitled to rely upon the accuracy and completeness of all information furnished to it by the Employer, unless it knows or should have known that such information is erroneous.

 
 

 

11.16            Responsibilities of Directors .

Subject to the rights reserved to the Board of Directors acting on behalf of the Employer as set forth in this Plan, no member of the Board of Directors shall have any duties or responsibilities under this Plan, except to the extent he shall be acting in the capacity of an Administrator or Trustee.

11.17            Liability and Indemnification .

(a)           To the extent not prohibited by the Act, the Administrator shall not be responsible in any way for any action or omission of the Employer, the Trustee or any other person in the performance of their duties and obligations set forth in this Plan and in the Trust Agreement.  To the extent not prohibited by the Act, the Administrator shall also not be responsible for any act or omission of any of its agents, or with respect to reliance upon advice of its counsel (whether or not such counsel is also counsel to the Employer or the Trustee), provided that such agents or counsel were prudently chosen by the Administrator and that the Administrator relied in good faith upon the action of such agent or the advice of such counsel.

(b)           The Administrator shall not be relieved from responsibility or liability for any responsibility, obligation or duty imposed upon it under this Plan or under the Act.  Except for its own gross negligence, willful misconduct or willful breach of the terms of this Plan, the Administrator shall be indemnified and held harmless by the Employer against liability or losses occurring by reason of any act or omission of the Administrator to the extent that such indemnification does not violate the Act or any other federal or state laws.


 
 

 

ARTICLE XII
CLAIMS PROCEDURE

12.1            Notice of Denial .

If a Participant or his Beneficiary is denied any benefits under this Plan, either in whole or in part, the Administrator shall advise the claimant in writing of the amount of his benefit, if any, and the specific reasons for the denial.  The Administrator shall also furnish the claimant at that time with a written notice containing:

(a)           A specific reference to pertinent Plan provisions;

(b)           A description of any additional material or information necessary for the claimant to perfect his claim, if possible, and an explanation of why such material or information is needed; and

(c)           An explanation of the Plan's claim review procedure.

12.2            Right to Reconsideration .

Within 60 days of receipt of the information described in 12.1 above, the claimant shall, if he desires further review, file a written request for reconsideration with the Administrator.

12.3            Review of Documents .

So long as the claimant's request for review is pending (including the 60-day period described in Section 12.2 above), the claimant or his duly authorized representative may review pertinent Plan documents and the Trust Agreement (and any pertinent related documents) and may submit issues and comments in writing to the Administrator.

12.4            Decision by Administrator .

A final and binding decision shall be made by the Administrator within 60 days of the filing by the claimant of his request for reconsideration; provided, however, that if the Administrator feels that a hearing with the claimant or his representative present is necessary or desirable, this period shall be extended an additional 60 days.

12.5            Notice by Administrator .

The Administrator's decision shall be conveyed to the claimant in writing and shall include specific reasons for the decision, written in a manner calculated to be understood by the claimant, with specific references to the pertinent Plan provisions on which the decision is based.  The Administrator's decision shall be binding and conclusive with respect to all persons interested therein unless the Administrator has no reasonable basis for its decision.

12.6            Special Claims Procedures .

The following changes to the claims procedures set forth above shall apply to all claims for disability benefits under the Plan.  A disability benefit is any benefit, the availability of which is conditioned upon a showing of a disability.  Unless a change to the normal claims procedures set forth above is indicated, the normal procedures will also apply to claims for disability benefits.

(a)           In the case of a claim for disability benefits, the Administrator shall advise the claimant of any adverse determination not later than 45 days after receipt of the claim.  Should it be necessary, that period may be extended by 30 days provided the Plan notifies the claimant of the circumstances prior to the expiration of the initial 45 day period.  In addition to the disclosure requirements of Section 12.1, a notice of denial of disability benefits must include:  (a) any internal rule or guideline relied upon by the Plan in making its determination and; (b) if the adverse determination is based on a medical necessity or experimental treatment, a statement explaining the specific clinical judgment for the determination, or a statement that such an explanation will be provided upon request.

(b)           Within 180 days of receipt of a notice of denial of a disability claim, the claimant may file a written claim for review with the Administrator.

(c)           Within 45 days, the Administrator must provide the claimant with a written notification of the benefit determination on review.  Should an extension of time be required, the initial period may be extended by up to 45 additional days.  The notice of the review determination shall include all of the disclosures required to be made by Section 12.1 and this Section 12.6.

 
 

 

ARTICLE XIII
AMENDMENTS, TERMINATION AND MERGER

13.1            Amendments .

The Sponsor reserves the right at any time and from time to time, for any reason and retroactively if deemed necessary or appropriate by it, to the extent permissible under law, to conform with governmental regulations or other policies, to amend in whole or in part any or all of the provisions of this Plan, provided that:

(a)           No amendment shall make it possible for any part of the Fund to be used for, or diverted to, purposes other than for the exclusive benefit of Participants or their Beneficiaries under the Trust Agreement, except to the extent provided in Section 4.4;

(b)           No amendment may, directly or indirectly, reduce the vested portion of any Participant's Account balance as of the effective date of the amendment or change the vesting schedule with respect to the future accrual of Employer contributions for any Participants unless each Participant with 3 or more Years of Vesting Service is permitted to elect to have the vesting schedule in effect before the amendment used to determine his vested benefit;

(c)           No amendment may eliminate an optional form of benefit; and.

(d)           No amendment may increase or change the duties or liabilities of the Trustee without its consent.

Amendments may be made in the form of Board of Directors' resolutions or separate written document.  Copies of all amendments shall be delivered to the Trustee.

13.2            Effect of Change In Control .

(a)           In the event of a “change in control” of the Sponsor, as defined in paragraph (d) below, this Plan shall terminate at the effective time of such change in control.  Nothing in this Plan shall prevent the Sponsor from becoming a party to such a change in control.

(b)           Upon the effective time of a change in control, the Account balances of all affected Participants and Former Participants shall become fully vested and nonforfeitable, and the Trustee shall make payments to each Participant and Beneficiary in accordance with Section 9.5.

(c)           Notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary, at and after the effective time of a change in control, each of the following provisions shall become applicable; provided, however, that any such provision shall not apply if the Board of Directors determines that such provision would adversely affect the tax-qualified status of the Plan pursuant to Code Section 401(a), or should not apply for any other reason:

(1)           The Plan shall be interpreted, maintained and operated exclusively for the benefit of those individuals who are participating in the Plan as of the effective time of the change in control and their Beneficiaries.  Notwithstanding the provisions of Section 2.1(a), no Employee shall become a Participant for the first time at or after the effective time of a change in control.

(2)           After a Participant's Retirement, Disability or other termination of Service, such Participant's Account, regardless of its value, shall not be distributed and shall share in the allocation of the Employee Stock Ownership Contribution and Investment Adjustments until such time as either (A) the Fund is liquidated in connection with the termination of the Plan, or (B) the Participant (or his Beneficiary) receives a full distribution of his Account either upon his election in accordance with Section 9.2(c) or as required in accordance with Section 8.8, 9.3 or 9.4.

(3)           Upon the termination of the Plan, Employer Securities that are allocated to the Exempt Loan Suspense Account and that are not used to repay an Exempt Loan shall be allocated as Investment Adjustments in accordance with Section 5.3.

(4)           Employer Securities that are released from the Exempt Loan Suspense Account in accordance with Section 8.5 shall be allocated to the Employee Stock Ownership Account of each Participant regardless of whether he completed a Year of Vesting Service during the Plan Year or was an Employee on the last day of such Plan Year.

(5)           The Administrator shall consist of a committee selected by the Board of Directors, and such committee shall have the exclusive authority (i) to remove the Trustee and to appoint a successor trustee, (ii) to adopt amendments to the Plan or the Trust Agreement to effectuate the provisions and intent of this Section 13.2, and (iii) to perform any or all of the functions and to exercise all of the discretion that are delegated to the Administrator pursuant to Article XI.

(6)           Any application for a favorable determination letter with respect to the tax-qualified status of the Plan under Code Section 401(a) with respect to its termination shall be subject to the prior review, comment and approval (which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld) of the Administrator, as defined in paragraph (5) above.

(d)           For purposes of this Section 13.2, the term "change in control" means the occurrence of any one or more of the events specified in the following clauses (i) through (iii): (i)any third person, including a “group” as defined in Section 13(d)(3) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, shall become the beneficial owner of shares of the Sponsor with respect to which 25% or more of the total number of votes for the election of the Board of Directors may be cast, (ii) as a result of, or in connection with, any cash tender offer, merger or other business combination, sale of assets or contested election, or combination of the foregoing, the persons who were directors of the Sponsor shall cease to constitute a majority of the Board of Directors, or (iii) the effective time of a transaction that is approved by the stockholders of the Sponsor and that provides either for the Sponsor to cease to be an independent publicly-owned corporation or for a sale or other disposition of all or substantially all of the assets of the Sponsor.

13.3            Consolidation or Merger of Trust .

In the event of any merger or consolidation of the Fund with, or transfer in whole or in part of the assets and liabilities of the Fund to, another trust fund held under any other plan of deferred compensation maintained or to be established for the benefit of all or some of the Participants of this Plan, the assets of the Fund applicable to such Participants shall be transferred to the other trust fund only if:

(a)           Each Participant would receive a benefit under such successor trust fund immediately after the merger, consolidation or transfer which is equal to or greater than the benefit he would have been entitled to receive immediately before the merger, consolidation or transfer (determined as if this Plan and such transferee trust fund had then terminated);

(b)           Resolutions of the Board of Directors, or of any new or successor employer of the affected Participants, shall authorize such transfer of assets, and, in the case of the new or successor employer of the affected Participants, its resolutions shall include an assumption of liabilities imposed under this Plan with respect to such Participants' inclusion in the new employer's plan; and

(c)           Such other plan and trust are qualified under Sections 401(a) and 501(a) of the Code.

13.4            Bankruptcy or Insolvency of Employer .

In the event of (a) the Employer's legal dissolution or liquidation by any procedure other than a consolidation or merger, (b) the Employer's receivership, insolvency, or cessation of its business as a going concern, or (c) the commencement of any proceeding by or against the Employer under the federal bankruptcy laws, or similar federal or state statute, or any federal or state statute or rule providing for the relief of debtors, compensation of creditors, arrangement, receivership, liquidation or any similar event which is not dismissed within 30 days, this Plan shall terminate automatically with respect to such entity on such date (provided, however, that if a proceeding is brought against the Employer for reorganization under Chapter 11 of the United States Bankruptcy Code or any similar federal or state statute, then this Plan shall terminate automatically if and when said proceeding results in a liquidation of the Employer, or the approval of any Plan providing therefor, or the proceeding is converted to a case under Chapter 7 of the Bankruptcy Code or any similar conversion to a liquidation proceeding under federal or state law including, but not limited to, a receivership proceeding).  In the event of any such termination as provided in the foregoing sentence, the Trustee shall make payments to the persons entitled thereto in accordance with Section 9.6 hereof.

13.5            Voluntary Termination .

The Board of Directors reserves the right to terminate this Plan at any time by giving to the Trustee and the Administrator notice in writing of such desire to terminate.  The Plan shall terminate upon the date of receipt of such notice, the Account balances of all affected Participants and Former Participants shall become fully vested and nonforfeitable, and the Trustee shall make payments to each Participant or Beneficiary in accordance with Section 9.6.  Alternatively, the Sponsor, in its discretion, may determine to continue the Trust Agreement and to continue the maintenance of the Fund, in which event distributions shall be made upon the contingencies and in all the circumstances under which such distributions would have been made, on a fully vested basis, had there been no termination of the Plan.  In addition, an entity other than the Sponsor that is participating in this Plan may terminate its participation in the Plan on a prospective basis by action of its board of directors.  Upon such termination of participation, Participants who are employees of such entity shall be entitled to distributions from this Plan in accordance with Article IX and this Article XIII.

13.6            Partial Termination of Plan or Permanent Discontinuance of Contributions .

In the event that a partial termination of the Plan shall be deemed to have occurred, or if the Employer shall discontinue permanently its contributions hereunder, the right of each affected Participant and Former Participant in his Account balance shall be fully vested and nonforfeitable.  The Sponsor, in its discretion, shall decide whether to direct the Trustee to make immediate distribution of such portion of the Fund assets to the persons entitled thereto or to make distribution in the circumstances and contingencies which would have controlled such distributions if there had been no partial termination or permanent discontinuance of contributions.

 
 

 

ARTICLE XIV
MISCELLANEOUS

14.1            No Diversion of Funds .

It is the intention of the Employer that it shall be impossible for any part of the corpus or income of the Fund to be used for, or diverted to, purposes other than for the exclusive benefit of the Participants or their Beneficiaries, except to the extent that a return of the Employer's contribution is permitted under Section 4.4.

14.2            Liability Limited .

Neither the Employer nor the Administrator, nor any agents, employees, officers, directors or shareholders of any of them, nor the Trustee, nor any other person, shall have any liability or responsibility with respect to this Plan, except as expressly provided herein.

14.3            Facility of Payment .

If the Administrator shall receive evidence satisfactory to it that a Participant or Beneficiary entitled to receive any benefit under the Plan is, at the time when such benefit becomes payable, a minor, or is physically or mentally incompetent to receive such benefit and to give a valid release therefor, and that another person or an institution is then maintaining or has custody of such Participant or Beneficiary and that no guardian, committee or other representative of the estate of such Participant or Beneficiary shall have been duly appointed, the Administrator may direct the Trustee to make payment of such benefit otherwise payable to such Participant or Beneficiary, to such other person or institution, including a custodian under a Uniform Gifts to Minors Act, or corresponding legislation (who shall be an adult, a guardian of the minor or a trust company), and the release of such other person or institution shall be a valid and complete discharge for the payment of such benefit.

14.4            Spendthrift Clause .

Except as permitted by the Act or the Code, including in the case of certain judgments and settlements described in subparagraph (C) of Section 401(a)(13) of the Code, no benefits or other amounts payable under the Plan shall be subject in any manner to anticipation, sale, transfer, assignment, pledge, encumbrance, charge or alienation.  If the Administrator determines that any person entitled to any payments under the Plan has become insolvent or bankrupt or has attempted to anticipate, sell, transfer, assign, pledge, encumber, charge or otherwise in any manner alienate any benefit or other amount payable to him under the Plan or that there is any danger of any levy or attachment or other court process or encumbrance on the part of any creditor of such person entitled to payments under the Plan against any benefit or other accounts payable to such person, the Administrator may, at any time, in its discretion, and in accordance with applicable law, direct the Trustee to withhold any or all payments to such person under the Plan and apply the same for the benefit of such person, in such manner and in such proportion as the Administrator may deem proper.

14.5            Benefits Limited to Fund .

All contributions by the Employer to the Fund shall be voluntary, and the Employer shall be under no legal liability to make any such contributions, except as otherwise provided herein.  The benefits of this Plan shall be provided solely by the assets of the Fund, and no liability for the payment of benefits under the Plan or for any loss of assets due to any action or inaction of the Trustee shall be imposed upon the Employer.

14.6            Cooperation of Parties .

All parties to this Plan and any party claiming interest hereunder agree to perform any and all acts and execute any and all documents and papers which are necessary and desirable for carrying out this Plan or any of its provisions.

 
 

 

14.7            Payments Due Missing Persons .

The Administrator shall direct the Trustee to make a reasonable effort to locate all persons entitled to benefits under the Plan; however, notwithstanding any provision in the Plan to the contrary, if, after a period of 5 years from the date such benefit shall be due, any such persons entitled to benefits have not been located, their rights under the Plan shall stand suspended.  Before this provision becomes operative, the Trustee shall send a certified letter to all such persons at their last known address advising them that their interest in benefits under the Plan shall be suspended.  Any such suspended amounts shall be held by the Trustee for a period of 3 additional years (or a total of 8 years from the time the benefits first became payable), and thereafter such amounts shall be reallocated among current Participants in the same manner that a current contribution would be allocated.  However, if a person subsequently makes a valid claim with respect to such reallocated amounts and any earnings thereon, the Plan earnings or the Employer's contribution to be allocated for the year in which the claim shall be paid shall be reduced by the amount of such payment.  Any such suspended amounts shall be handled in a manner not inconsistent with regulations issued by the Internal Revenue Service and Department of Labor.

14.8            Governing Law .

This Plan has been executed in the State of Kansas, and all questions pertaining to its validity, construction and administration shall be determined in accordance with the laws of that State, except to the extent superseded by the Act.

14.9            Nonguarantee of Employment .

Nothing contained in this Plan shall be construed as a contract of employment between the Employer and any Employee, or as a right of any Employee to be continued in the employment of the Employer, or as a limitation of the right of the Employer to discharge any of its Employees, with or without cause.

14.10            Counsel .

The Trustee and the Administrator may consult with legal counsel, who may be counsel for the Employer and for the Administrator or the Trustee (as the case may be), with respect to the meaning or construction of this Plan and the Trust Agreement, their respective obligations or duties hereunder, or with respect to any action or proceeding or any question of law, and they shall be fully protected to the extent allowable by law with respect to any action taken or omitted by them in good faith pursuant to the advice of legal counsel.

14.11            Purposes .

This Plan is intended to satisfy the Federal Tax Qualification Requirements for stock bonus plans which are intended to operate and serve as employee stock ownership plans as described in Code Section 4975(e)(7).  This Plan has been implemented so that Participants may be provided with an opportunity to accumulate capital for their future economic security by being provided an equity interest in their employer.  This Plan, as an employee stock ownership plan, is intended to invest primarily in “qualifying employer securities” as defined in Code Section 4975(e)(8) of the Code.

14.12            Invalidity .

Subject to the requirements of the Code and the Act, in the event any provision of the Agreement, as between the Sponsor and the Trustee, shall be held illegal or invalid for any reason, said illegality or invalidity shall not affect the remaining provisions hereof, and this Agreement shall thereafter be construed and enforced as if said illegal or invalid provisions had never been included herein.

 
 

 

ARTICLE XVI
TRUST PROVISIONS

15.1            Contributions .

The Employer shall contribute and pay over to the Trustee, annually or more often, as the Employer shall decide, such amounts as shall be determined under the Plan. Notwithstanding the foregoing, however, the Employer shall contribute sufficient amounts to make the principal and interest payments on any Exempt Loan as they become due; provided, however, that no such contribution shall exceed the limitations under Sections 404 and 415 of the Code. Contributions may be made by the Employer to the Trustee in the form of cash, Employer Securities or any other property permissible under the Code and acceptable to the Trustee.

As set forth in the Plan, and except as provided in this Section, the Employer assumes no contractual obligation to continue contributions to the Plan but has specifically reserved therein the right at any time and for any reason to discontinue the Plan and the contributions provided to be made thereunder. Failure by the Employer to continue the Plan or make contributions provided to be made thereunder shall not give rise to any liability on its part whatsoever other than for contributions provided to be made prior to the effective date of the termination.

15.2            Information and Data to be Furnished the Trustee .

(a)           The Employer agrees to furnish the Trustee, through the Administrator, with such information and data relative to the Plan as is necessary for the proper administration of the Fund established hereunder. The Employer also agrees that the Administrator or an investment manager appointed pursuant to this Article (“Investment Manager”) shall direct the Trustee with respect to all matters contemplated by the Plan and this Agreement. The Employer shall promptly notify the Trustee in writing in the event that the Internal Revenue Service proposes to disallow the qualified status of the Plan or Trust.

(b)           Except as otherwise provided by law or as otherwise provided in the Plan or in this Agreement, neither the Employer nor any of its shareholders or directors, nor the Administrator, shall have any duties or obligations with respect to this Agreement.

(c)           Except as otherwise provided by law, neither the Employer, nor any of its officers, directors, employees, or partners (as the case may be), nor the Administrator, shall in any way be liable or responsible to any Participant, Beneficiary, Trustee or any other person, firm or corporation whatsoever for any acts of omission or commission in connection with his or its duties, as specified in this Article, unless such act of omission or commission is due to his or its own individual, willful and intentional nonfeasance, malfeasance or misfeasance.

15.3            Trust Fund and Accounts .

(a)           The Trustee shall establish and maintain a trust fund into which shall be paid the contributions made by the Employer under the terms of the Plan, which contributions, together with any income, gains or profits, less distributions, expenses and losses, shall comprise the Fund held by the Trustee. The Trustee shall hold, invest, reinvest, manage, administer and distribute the assets of the Fund, as hereinafter set forth, in accordance with the directions of the Administrator or an Investment Manager and for the exclusive benefit of the Employees participating in the Plan or their  Beneficiaries.

(b)           As a part of the Fund, the Administrator shall establish and maintain any individual Participants' Accounts required under the provisions of the Plan for such individuals who become Participants from time to time, including any separate accounts as may be provided for in the Plan from time to time to aid in the administration of the Plan. In addition, the Trustee shall establish and maintain suspense accounts as a part of the Fund for the purposes specified in the Plan. The establishment of separate accounts hereunder shall not require a segregation of any part of the assets of the Fund, and no Participant shall acquire any right to or interest in any specific asset of the Fund as a result of the allocations to such accounts provided for under the Plan.

(c)           The Trustee shall accept and hold in the Fund contributions made by the Employer under the Plan. If the amount of the contribution is less than any minimum established for any investment medium, then the contribution may be held by the Trustee in cash, without interest, until such time as the required amount has been contributed so that an investment may be properly made. The Trustee shall not be responsible in any way for the administration of the Plan and shall be under no duty to determine whether the amount of any contribution is in accordance with the Plan or to collect or enforcement of any contribution.

(d)           The Trustee shall make payment from the Fund to such persons (who may include the Administrator) in such manner, at such times, and in such amounts as the Administrator may from time to time direct in writing. Each such direction shall be in the form of a certificate setting forth the names and addresses of, and the amount payable to, the persons named therein and verifying that such persons are entitled to receive benefits under the Plan in the amounts and at the times stated in such certificate. All such payments shall be made by the Trustee in kind or, if in cash, by checks mailed postage prepaid to the persons or companies named in such certificate at their addresses therein set forth.

(e)           Upon receipt of written instructions from the Administrator, the Trustee shall charge the appropriate account of the Participant for any withdrawals or distributions made under the Plan.

(f)           In the event that any dispute shall arise as to the persons to whom payments and the delivery of any fund or property shall be made by the Trustee, or the amounts thereof, the Trustee may retain such payments and/or postpone such delivery until actual adjudication of such dispute shall have been made in a court of competent jurisdiction as provided herein, or it shall be indemnified against loss to its satisfaction.

 
(g)
The Trust Fund  shall be valued as follows:

(i)           As of each Valuation Date, the Trustee shall determine the net worth of the assets of the Fund and report such value to the Administrator in writing. In determining such net worth, the Trustee shall evaluate the assets of the Fund at their fair market value as of such Valuation Date and shall deduct all expenses chargeable to the Fund. Any increase or decrease in the net worth of the assets of the Fund shall be allocated as of each Valuation Date among the Accounts established as a part of the Fund in the manner specified in the Plan.

(ii)           In determining and valuing the assets and liabilities of the Fund for any purpose, securities held in the Fund shall be valued at their last published sale price on the Valuation Date, or if the Valuation Date is not a business day, then on the business day immediately prior thereto upon the New York Stock Exchange or upon any other recognized exchange or exchanges, or if no sale shall have been reported, and in the case of over-the-counter quotations, the last bid price at the close of business on said business day, all as reported by any report in common use or authorized as official by the New York Stock Exchange or any such other exchange, as the case may be. Where any security is listed on two or more exchanges, the Administrator or an Investment Manager shall direct the Trustee from time to time with respect to the particular exchange which shall be used for the purpose of this Section.

(iii)           However, with respect to securities, in the event the Administrator or an Investment Manager considers the method described in Section 15.3(g)(ii) above to be impracticable because of the fact that any of the securities included in the Fund are not quoted or listed, or for any other reason, then the Trustee shall employ, at the expense of the Fund, an independent appraiser to appraise such securities for the purpose of obtaining the value of the Fund and for any other purpose in the administration of the Trust.

15.4            Duties and Powers of the Trustee .

(a)           The Trustee shall keep accurate and detailed accounts of all investments, receipts and disbursements and other transactions hereunder, which shall show the complete record of the operation of the Fund, and all such accounts and the books and records relating thereto shall be open to inspection at all reasonable times by any person designated in writing by the Administrator.

(b)           The Trustee shall also furnish to the Employer and the Administrator, upon request, balance sheets and statements of receipts and disbursements during the continuance of this Agreement as of any date requested, but the Trustee shall not be required to furnish such statements more than once in any three-month period.

(c)           Within one hundred twenty (120) days following the close of each Plan Year, and within one hundred twenty (120) days following the resignation or removal of the Trustee as provided for in Section 15.5 hereof, and within one hundred twenty (120) days following the completion of the application or distribution of the Fund upon termination of the Plan, the Trustee shall file with the Employer and with the Administrator a written account setting forth all investments, receipts, disbursements and other transactions effected by it during such year or during the period from the closing date of the last preceding written account to the date of such resignation or removal or to the date of such completion of application or distribution of funds. Each such account shall set forth in summary form the receipts and disbursements of the Trustee for the period accounted for and shall include a description of all securities and other assets purchased and sold during the period accounted for, and the cost or proceeds of sale thereof, and shall show all cash, securities and other property held at the end of such period, and the cost and the market value of each item thereof. Except as otherwise prescribed by the Act, the Trustee shall be forever released and discharged from any liability or accountability to anyone about the propriety of its acts or transactions shown in such account, except with respect to any such acts or transactions as to which the Employer or Administrator shall, within the one year period after such account shall have been filed with the Employer and with the Administrator, file with the Trustee a written statement setting forth its or their exceptions or objections. If such account is filed with the Trustee and the matters thereby brought into controversy cannot be adjusted by agreement between the Employer and/or Administrator and the Trustee, then the Trustee shall file such account in any court of competent jurisdiction for audit and adjudication, as provided in Section 15.8(g) hereof. The written approval by the Employer and by the Administrator of any account filed by the Trustee with the Employer and the Administrator shall forever release and discharge the Trustee from any liability or accountability to anyone about the propriety of its acts or transactions shown in such account.

(d)           The Trustee may employ such counsel, accountants, brokers, actuaries and other agents and provide for such clerical, accounting, actuarial and other services as the Trustee may deem advisable to perform its duties under this Agreement, or as may be directed by the Administrator. The Trustee may pay for such services in accordance with Section 15.4(y) hereof.

(e)           The Trustee may enter into contracts in such form as it shall determine with one or more persons, firms, corporations or associations to provide administrative services in handling investments, including custodial arrangements with qualified parties.

(f)           The Administrator may retain the services of one or more persons or firms for the management of (including the power to acquire and dispose of) all or any part of the Fund, or to direct the Trustee on investments for all or any part of the Fund, provided that each such person or firm is registered as an investment advisor under the Investment Advisers Act of 1940, is a bank (as defined in that Act), or is an insurance company qualified to manage, acquire or dispose of trust assets under the laws of more than one state, and provided that each of such persons or firms has acknowledged in writing that he or it is a fiduciary with respect to the Plan; in such event, the investment manager or managers shall have the same investment powers and duties as the Administrator to direct the Trustee with respect to any matters contemplated under the Plan or this Agreement, to the extent that such advisors are so retained, and the Trustee shall not be liable for the acts or omissions of such investment manager or managers, or for any transaction entered into upon the instructions of such investment manager or managers, nor shall it be under any obligation to invest or otherwise manage any Fund assets except as directed by the Administrator or such investment manager or managers.

(g)           The Trustee shall have all of the powers necessary or desirable to perform properly its duties as a directed trustee under the terms of this Agreement.

(h)           The Trustee shall invest and reinvest the Fund assets primarily in Employer Securities in accordance with the directions of the Administrator or an Investment Manager. If any distribution of an investment may be paid at the election of the shareholder in additional shares or in cash, the Trustee may elect to receive it in additional shares. The Trustee is also directed to sell or redeem shares as required to implement the instructions of the Administrator or an Investment Manager or to pay the Trustee’s fees and expenses.

(i)           In extension and not in limitation of the powers given it by law or by other provisions of this Agreement, the Trustee, in complying with the directions of the Administrator or an Investment Manager, shall have the following powers with respect to the Fund, to be exercised at the direction of the Administrator or an Investment Manager, if applicable.

(j)           To invest and reinvest any monies at any time forming a part of the Fund in any capital or common stock (whether voting or non-voting and whether or not currently paying a dividend), preferred or preference stock (whether voting or non-voting and whether or not currently paying a dividend), convertible securities, corporate and governmental obligations, common or collective trust funds or pooled investment funds maintained by a bank or trust company or pooled investment funds of an insurance company qualified to do business in a state even though such bank, trust company or insurance company is a disqualified person within the meaning of Section 4975(e)(2) of the Code, notes and other evidences of indebtedness or ownership (secured or unsecured), contracts, partnership or joint venture interests, choses in action, and warrants and other instruments entitling the owner thereof to subscribe to or purchase any of the aforesaid. A substitute trustee need not request approval from any governmental agency as to the propriety of any investment in the Fund at the time it assumes its duties.

(k)           To borrow or raise money for the purposes of the Fund, including the borrowing of money for the purpose of acquiring Employer Securities to the extent permitted by the Act, the Code and the applicable regulations, upon such terms and conditions as are directed by the Administrator or an Investment Manager in its absolute discretion. For any sum so borrowed, the Trustee may, in accordance with the directions of the Administrator or an Investment Manager, issue a promissory note as Trustee and secure the repayment thereof by pledging, mortgaging or otherwise assigning all or any part of the Fund.

(l)           To vote in person or by proxy any stocks, bonds or other securities held by the Trustee; to exercise any options appurtenant to any stocks, bonds or other securities, or to exercise any right to subscribe for additional stocks, bonds, or other securities and to make any and all necessary payments therefor; to join in, or to dissent from and to oppose the reorganization, recapitalization, consolidation, liquidation, sale or merger of corporations or properties, upon such terms and conditions as may be specified in directions to the Trustee by the Administrator or an Investment Manager. Notwithstanding the foregoing, each Participant with an Employee Stock Ownership Account shall be entitled to direct the Trustee as to the manner in which the Employer Securities in such Account are to be voted in accordance with Section 8.2.

(m)           To cause any investments from time to time held by it to be registered in, or transferred into, its name as Trustee, or the name of a nominee, or to retain them unregistered or in form permitting transferability by delivery, but the books and records of the Trustee shall at all times show that all such investments are part of the Fund. The Administrator or an Investment Manager may direct the Trustee to utilize the services of a securities clearing corporation to the extent permitted by applicable law.

(n)           To employ and enter into agreements with such counsel, accountants, brokers, investment advisors, and other agents as the Trustee shall deem advisable, or as may be directed by the Administrator, and to pay their reasonable expenses and compensation.

(o)           To retain any cash and keep unproductive of income any portion of the Fund as the Administrator or an Investment Manager, in its absolute discretion, may direct, without liability to pay interest on such cash balance or on cash in its hands pending investment or distribution.

(p)           To hold and administer the Fund without distinction between principal and income, and as a single trust fund without physical segregation of any separate funds or accounts provided for in the Plan, except where the Plan clearly requires the segregation of Fund assets.

(q)           The Trustee shall acquire or hold, in accordance with the directions of the Administrator or an Investment Manager, any security issued by the Employer or an affiliate of the Employer which is a “qualifying employer security” or any real property (and related personal property) which is leased to the Employer or an affiliate of the Employer which is a “qualifying employer real property,” as such terms are defined in the Act and the Code. The Trustee may invest up to one hundred percent (100%) of the Fund in qualifying employer securities in accordance with the direction of the Administrator or an Investment Manager.

(r)           In accordance with the direction of the Administrator or an Investment Manager, the Trustee shall purchase or sell qualifying employer securities from or to any party (subject to any restrictions applicable to such employer securities), including the Employer.

(s)           Any qualifying employer securities held in the Fund shall be valued at fair market value for all purposes of the Plan. The determination of fair market value shall be made in good faith by the Trustee in accordance with Section 15.3(g) hereof.

(t)           As this Trust is the trust for an employee stock ownership plan, the Trustee shall invest the assets of the Trust, in accordance with the directions of the Administrator or an Investment Manager, primarily in Employer Securities.

(u)           Any Employer Securities received by the Trustee as a stock split or dividend or as the result of a reorganization or recapitalization of the Sponsor shall be allocated as of each Valuation Date in proportion to the Employer Securities to which they are attributable.

(v)           The Trustee shall perform its duties in accordance with the Act, as well as in accordance with the Plan and this Agreement insofar as they are consistent with the provisions of the Act. The Trustee shall be under no duty to defend or engage in any suit with respect to the Fund unless the Trustee shall have been fully indemnified to its satisfaction. To the extent not prohibited by the Act, the Trustee shall not be responsible in any way for any action or omission of the Employer or the Administrator with respect to its duties and obligations as set forth in the Plan and this Agreement. To the extent not prohibited by the Act, the Trustee shall also not be responsible for any action or omission of any of its agents or with respect to reliance upon the advice of its counsel (whether or not such counsel is also counsel to the Employer or the Administrator), provided that such agents or counsel were prudently chosen by the Trustee and that the Trustee relied in good faith upon the action of such agent or the advice of such counsel. The Trustee shall not be relieved from responsibility or liability for any responsibility, obligation or duty imposed upon it under the Plan or under the Act.

(w)           The Trustee is a party to this document solely for the purposes set forth in this document and to perform the acts set forth herein, and no obligation or duty shall be expected or required of the Trustee except as expressly stated in the Plan or this Agreement.

(x)           The Trustee may receive such reasonable fee for its services as shall be mutually agreed upon, prior to the rendering of such services, between the Sponsor and the Trustee. Any expenses incurred by the Trustee in the administration of the Trust shall be paid from the Trust unless paid by the Employer directly. If paid by the Trust, such expenses (including the fees of a corporate trustee) shall be charged proportionately (or in such other reasonable manner as the Trustee shall determine) to the Accounts of all Participants, unless such expenses are allocable to the Account or Accounts of one or more specific Participants.

(y)           The Employer shall indemnify and hold harmless the Trustee and its respective officers, directors, employees and agents from and against any and all damages (including without limitation amounts paid in settlement), fines, losses, costs, liabilities, interest and reasonable attorneys' fees that result from or relate to any Claims (as defined below) that relate to or arise out of Trustee's being or having been Trustee of the Plan (hereinafter collectively referred to as the “Trustee Liabilities”) (whether or not it is Trustee at the time any such Trustee Liabilities are asserted or incurred); provided, however, that the foregoing indemnification shall not apply to matters as to which Trustee breached its fiduciary duties under the Act, unless such breach either: (i) was performed (or not performed) in accordance with the specific direction of the Employer, the Administrator, or any person engaged by the Employer or Administrator for such purpose (including, but not limited to, directions from an Investment Manager); or (ii) was caused by the Employer's or the Administrator's knowing violation of applicable law or their respective duties undertaken with respect to the Plan and Trust (including, but not limited to, their fiduciary duties under the Act). For purposes of this Section, “Claims” shall mean any actions, causes of action, claims, demands, suits, proceedings, disputes, citations, summons, subpoenas, inquiries or investigations of any nature whatsoever, whether or not in law, in equity or in any civil, criminal or regulatory proceeding.

Each and all of the foregoing powers may be exercised without court order or other legal formality. No one dealing with the Trustee need inquire concerning the validity or propriety of anything that is done or need see to the application of any money paid or property transferred to or upon the order of the Trustee.

15.5            Resignation or Removal of the Trustee .

The Trustee may resign from being trustee under this Agreement at any time by giving the Sponsor and the Administrator written notice of resignation. The Trustee may be removed by the Sponsor by written notice of removal either mailed or delivered by hand to the Trustee. Such resignation or removal shall take effect on the date specified in the notice of resignation or removal, but the date thus specified shall not be less than thirty (30) days nor more than ninety (90) days following the date of mailing or delivery of such notice. In the event that the Trustee is unable or unwilling to comply with instructions from the Sponsor, the Investment Manager (if any), or the Administrator, or the voting determination made pursuant to Plan Section 8.2, the Trustee shall be entitled to resign immediately upon delivery of written notice to the Sponsor. Notwithstanding the preceding sentence, the Trustee shall not be entitled to resign immediately in the event of a dispute between the Trustee and the Sponsor or the Administrator about the prudence of continuing to make payments under a previously negotiated Exempt Loan to purchase Employer Securities. In the event of such a dispute, the Trustee may resign, but such resignation shall not take effect less than thirty (30) days from the date of the mailing of such written resignation. In no event shall the resignation or removal of the Trustee terminate this Agreement, but upon such resignation or removal of the Trustee, the Sponsor shall have the duty forthwith to appoint a successor trustee to carry out the terms of this Agreement. Notice in writing of such appointment of a successor trustee shall be given to the Trustee resigning or being removed by the Sponsor. In the event of such resignation or removal of the Trustee and upon the appointment of a successor trustee and acceptance by such trustee, the Trustee shall transfer to the successor trustee the assets of the Fund and all records or books of account pertaining to this Agreement in its possession, provided that the Trustee shall be given a reasonable time, not to exceed sixty (60) days, to complete its accounting before making such transfer. Upon such resignation or removal of a corporate Trustee, it shall be entitled to be paid its fee, if any, earned to the date of such resignation or removal. A successor trustee shall have the same powers and duties as those herein conferred upon the Trustee. A successor trustee may be removed or may resign in the same manner, and, in the event of such removal or resignation of a successor trustee, the same steps shall be allowed as on the removal or resignation of the Trustee. When the Fund assets shall have been transferred and delivered to the successor trustee and the accounts of the Trustee shall have been settled in accordance with Section 15.4(c), the Trustee shall be forever released and discharged from all further accountability, responsibility and liability to anyone for the Fund assets and shall not be responsible in any way for the further disposition of the Fund.

15.6            Continuance and Termination of this Agreement .

(a)           The Trust shall continue as long as the Plan is in full force and effect. If the Plan ceases to be in full force and effect, the Trust shall thereupon terminate unless expressly extended by the Sponsor.

(b)           Upon the termination of the Plan, the Fund shall be allocated and distributed or held by the Trustee as provided in Article XII.

(c)           Except as otherwise expressly provided in this instrument, neither the termination of the Trust nor any other action or non-action shall cause the Employer to have any right whatsoever with respect to any contribution, any asset of the Fund, or any other matter or thing whatsoever in connection with the Fund, it being expressly agreed and understood that all contributions made are irrevocable and that none of said contributions may, under any circumstances whatsoever (except as specifically set forth in the Plan), be returned to or used for the benefit of the Employer.

15.7            Miscellaneous .

(a)           The parties hereto shall be protected in acting upon any notice, resolution, request, consent, order, certificate, report, opinion, statement or other document which they reasonably believe to be genuine and to have been signed by the proper party or parties or by a person or persons authorized to act on its behalf.

(b)           No person dealing with the Trustee shall be under any obligation to inquire into the validity, expediency or propriety of any action by the Trustee or of any exercise by it of any of the powers conferred upon it by this Agreement. The execution by the Trustee of any instrument, document or paper in connection with the exercise of any of the powers enumerated herein shall, of itself, be conclusive evidence to all persons of the authority of the Trustee to execute the same and to exercise the powers incident thereto.

(c)           If at any time or times the Trustee is in doubt as to the course which it should follow in any matter relating to the administration of this Agreement, it may request the Administrator to advise it with respect thereto, and it shall be protected in relying upon the advice or direction which may be given it by the Administrator, in writing, in response to such request.

(d)           The Trustee shall not be required to give any bond or other security for the faithful performance of its duties hereunder, unless otherwise required by law.

 
 

 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Sponsor has caused these presents to be executed by its duly authorized officers and its corporate seal to be affixed on this _____ day of _______, 2011.


ATTEST:
CAPITOL FEDERAL FINANCIAL, INC.



By           
Secretary
President and Chief Executive Officer




[Corporate Seal]




ATTEST:
CAPITOL FEDERAL SAVINGS BANK



By           
Secretary
President and Chief Executive Officer



[Corporate Seal]







 
 

 

EXHIBIT 31.1
 CERTIFICATION OF CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER
 
I, John B. Dicus, certify that:
 
1.
I have reviewed this Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q of Capitol Federal Financial, Inc.;
     
 
2.
Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;
     
 
3.
Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of and for, the periods presented in this report;
     
 
4.
The registrant’s other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-l5(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the registrant and have:
 
     

 
a.
Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;
   
 
 
b.
Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;
   
 
 
c.
Evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and
   
 
 
d.
Disclosed in this report any change in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the registrant’s most recent fiscal quarter (the registrant’s fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting; and
 
   

5.
The registrant’s other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant’s auditors and the audit committee of the registrant’s Board of Directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):
 

 
a.
All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the registrant’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and
   
 
 
b.
Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting.
 
   


Date: May 10, 2011
By:
/s/ John B. Dicus
 
 
 
John B. Dicus
 
 
 
Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer
 


EXHIBIT 31.2
CERTIFICATION OF CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER
 
I, Kent G. Townsend, certify that:
 
1.
I have reviewed this Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q of Capitol Federal Financial, Inc.;
     
 
2.
Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;
     
 
3.
Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of and for, the periods presented in this report;
     
 
4.
The registrant’s other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-l5(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the registrant and have:
 
     

 
a.
Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;
   
 
 
b.
Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;
   
 
 
c.
Evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and
   
 
 
d.
Disclosed in this report any change in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the registrant’s most recent fiscal quarter (the registrant’s fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting; and
 
   

5.
The registrant’s other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant’s auditors and the audit committee of the registrant’s Board of Directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):
 

 
a.
All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the registrant’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and
   
 
 
b.
Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting.
 
   
Date: May 10, 2011
By:
/ s/ Kent G. Townsend
 
 
 
Kent G. Townsend
 
 
 
Executive Vice President, Chief Financial Officer and Treasurer
 



EXHIBIT 32
STATEMENT FURNISHED PURSUANT TO SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002, 18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350

In connection with the Quarterly Report of Capitol Federal Financial, Inc. (the “Company”) on Form 10-Q for the quarterly period ended March 31, 2011, as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on the date hereof (the “Report”), we, John B. Dicus, Chief Executive Officer of the Company, and Kent G. Townsend, Chief Financial Officer of the Company, certify, pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350, as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, that:

1)  
The Report fully complies with the requirements of Section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; and

2)  
The information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and result of operations of the Company as of the dates and for the periods presented in the financial statements included in such Report.




Date:   May 10, 2011                                                  By:    /s/ John B. Dicus
                                                                                            John B. Dicus, Chairman, President and
                                                                                            Chief Executive Officer



Date:   May 10, 2011                                                  By:    /s/ Kent G. Townsend
                                                                                            Kent G. Townsend, Executive Vice President,
                                                                                            Chief Financial Officer and Treasurer





<Index>